TECHNICAL MANUAL
(Ver. 1.0)
FOR PIONEER PLASMA DISPLAY MONITOR WHEN USED WITH
VIDEO CARDS (EXPANSION SOLUTIONS CARDS)
PLASMA DISPLAY MONITOR: PDP-507CMX/PDP-427CMX
VIDEO CARD: PDA-5003/PDA-5004
TABLE TOP STAND: PDK-TS07
TILT MOUNT UNIT: PDK-5011
WALL MOUNT UNIT: PDK-WM01
CEILING MOUNT UNIT: PDK-5012
MOBILE CART: PDK-5014
PDP BRACKET: PDK-5005
SPEAKER SYSTEM: PDP-S53-LR/PDP-S56-LR
This manual provides precautions and information for installation, preparation, and handling of the Plasma Display and
its dedicated mounting hardware.
Before installation and preparatory work, choose a safe and appropriate site after thorough consideration of construction,
materials used, strength, and surroundings. If adequate safeguards are not in place, immediately halt the installation
process and discontinue marketing activities.
ABOUT MOUNTING/INSTALLATION
To use this product safely
• When using this product attached to a ceiling or wall or
piled up, there is a danger that, according to its weight or
attachment method, it may fall down or fall over.
• In order to use this product safely, be sure to have a
professional installer or the retail agent perform the
installation work. Verify that it is appropriately attached and
take adequate safety measures.
• This product is sold under the assumption that installation
will be performed by experienced, qualified experts.
Refer all mounting and installation work to qualified
personnel or consult the nearest PIONEER dealer for
assistance.
• We accept no responsibility for accident or loss resulting
from failure to select an appropriate installation site,
situations occurring during assembly, installation,
mounting, operation resulting from modifications made
to this product, or from natural disasters.
Attention professional installer
• Install this product according to the instructions in the
owner’s manual or installation manual.
PRECAUTIONS:
• We accept no responsibility for losses resulting from the
use of parts other than those supplied by Pioneer or those
authorized by Pioneer.
• We guarantee the performance of our products only when
they are assembled and adjusted as described in this
manual.
• To ensure safety when this product is installed on a ceiling,
wall or stacked be sure to take measures to prevent any
danger of the panel(s) falling down or falling over.
• Choose an installation or attachment location that has
sufficient strength to fully withstand its weight.
• When installing it on the floor, select an adequately stable,
flat, and level place.
• To prevent damage to the power or connection cords, take
great care not to place any equipment on them or pinch
them between any equipment.
• The specifications and external designs shown in this
manual are subject to change without notice.
• Absolutely do not alter the product or any of its attachment
hardware.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table of Contents
5.3 Menu Mode............................................................... 173
5.3.1 About menu mode .......................................... 173
5.3.2 Concerning the display of the OSD of
10) SIDE MASK Setting .................................. 226
11) VIDEO WALL Setting ............................... 228
12) BAUD RATE Setting ................................. 232
13) Assigning an ID......................................... 233
14) Cooling Fan Control Setting ...................... 235
15) OSD Display Setting ................................. 236
16) FRONT INDICATOR Setting ..................... 238
17) COLOR MODE Setting ............................. 239
18) PRO USE Setting ...................................... 240
19) FRC Setting .............................................. 242
20) POWER ON MODE Setting ...................... 244
21) SEAMLESS SW Setting............................ 246
22) MIRROR MODE Setting ........................... 247
23) MULTISCREEN Setting ............................ 249
24) REPEAT TIMER Setting ............................ 253
25) FUNCTIONAL LOCK ................................. 255
26) Center Position Display ............................ 256
5.4.4 PICTURE, White Balance and SCREEN Position
Adjustment Values Memory Area Tables ....... 257
5.5 RS-232C Adjustment ................................................ 262
5.5.1 About the RS-232C Adjustment...................... 262
5.5.2 Interface .......................................................... 263
5.5.3 Combination Connection................................. 264
5.5.4 ID Assignment ................................................ 265
5.5.5 List of RS-232C Commands............................ 267
5.5.6 QUEST Commands ......................................... 275
5.6 Screen Burning ........................................................ 283
5.7 Precautions on Connecting Camera Images ......... 285
5.8 Concerning frame delay (lip sync).......................... 285
each item ........................................................ 173
5.3.3 Example of a Menu Mode Operation.............. 174
5.3.4 Adjustment and setting in the Menu Mode .... 175
1) Power Management Setting .................... 175
2) Signal Format Setting ............................... 176
3) Menu Language Display Setting............... 177
4) Energy Saving Setting .............................. 178
5) Timer Setting ............................................ 180
6) Program/Repeat Timer Setting ................. 180
7) Orbiter Setting .......................................... 181
8) Soft Focus Setting .................................... 182
9) Auto Set Up Mode Setting ....................... 183
10) Screen Position, Clock Frequency and
Clock Phase Adjustment .......................... 184
11) Auto Function Mode Setting .................... 186
12) PIP DETECT Setting ................................. 187
13) SPLIT FREEZE Setting .............................. 188
5.3.5 Concerning the display of the OSD of each item
(Applicable only when a PDA-5003/PDA-5004
is installed.) ..................................................... 189
5.3.6 Example of a Menu Mode Operation
(Applicable only when a PDA-5003/PDA-5004
is installed.) ..................................................... 189
5.3.7 Adjustment and setting in the Menu Mode
(Applicable only when a PDA-5003/PDA-5004
is installed.) ..................................................... 190
1) Color Temperature Setting ....................... 190
2) Power Management and Auto Power
PRECAUTION
6.1 Precautions ............................................................... 286
OFF Setting .............................................. 191
3) DNR (digital noise reduction) Setting........ 192
4) MPEG NR Setting ..................................... 193
5) CTI Setting ................................................ 194
6) PURECINEMA Setting .............................. 195
7) Color Decoding Setting............................. 197
8) Color System Setting................................ 198
9) Signal Format Setting ............................... 199
10) DVI Setting ............................................... 201
11) Menu Language Display Setting............... 202
12) Energy Saving Setting .............................. 203
13) Timer Setting ............................................ 205
14) Program/Repeat Timer Setting ................. 205
15) Orbiter Setting .......................................... 206
16) Soft Focus Setting .................................... 207
17) Auto Set Up Mode Setting ....................... 208
18) Screen Position, Clock Frequency and Clock
Phase Adjustment .................................... 209
19) Auto Function Mode Setting .................... 211
20) PIP DETECT Setting ................................. 212
21) SPLIT FREEZE Setting .............................. 213
5.4 Integrator Mode ....................................................... 214
5.4.1 About the Integrator Mode ............................. 214
5.4.2 Example of Integrator Mode Operation .......... 215
5.4.3 Adjustment and Setting in the Integrator
Mode............................................................... 216
1) PICTURE Adjustment ............................... 216
2) WHITE BALANCE Adjustment ................. 217
3) COLOR DETAIL setting ............................ 218
4) GAMMA Setting ....................................... 219
5) SCREEN (Screen Position) Adjustment .... 220
6) Brightness Enhancement (BRT. ENHANCE)
Setting at the Center of the Screen.......... 221
7) SUB VOLUME Setting .............................. 222
8) Program Timer Setting ............................. 223
9) SCREEN MASK Setting ............................ 225
MAINTENANCE .................................................................. 287
CAUTION
• To prevent injury and material damage, thoroughly read
this manual and all labels found on the equipment before
attempting to mount, install, move, or adjust the product.
• Do not install the unit outside or in the open air. Doing
so will lead to water seepage into the system, resulting
in fire or electric shock.
• Be especially careful when working around parts of the
system that have sharp edges.
• When performing installation work from a height, take
suitable precautions to guard against falling. Set up a
barrier around the work site to prevent accidentally
dropped objects that can injure people standing or
walking below. Tampering with the unit may result in
fire or electrical shock.
• Keep all foreign objects out of the unit. Tampering with
the unit may result in fire or electrical shock.
• Observe the following operating environmental
limitations:
Temperature: 0 °C to 40 °C
Humidity: 20 % to 80 %
• Install the unit only in properly ventilated areas.
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
Introduction
The contents of “5.1 Before Beginning Adjustments (pg. 144)” and subsequent sections are premised on the PDP-
507CMX/PDP-427CMX being equipped with the PDA-5003 or PDA-5004. Items that apply only when the PDA-5003 or
PDA-5004 is installed are marked with a star ‘#’.
Precautions
With the PDA-5003 or the PDA-5004 installed, the PDP-507CMX/PDP-427CMX supports the following functions:
Input/output terminals
7 PDA-5003
INPUT 1
Input
• Component video signal
• RGB signals from AV devices other than PCs
INPUT 2
INPUT 3
INPUT 4
Input
Input
• Digital video signal (HDCP supported)
• Y/C separate video signal
Input
• Composite video signal
Output
• Composite video signal
INPUT 3/
INPUT 4
Input
Input
• Audio L/R signal
INPUT 5
• Composite video signal
• RGB signals from AV devices or PCs
• Audio L/R signal
7 PDA-5004
INPUT 1
Input
• Component video signal
• RGB signals from AV devices other than PCs
INPUT 2
INPUT 3
Input
Input
• Digital video signal (HDCP supported)
• Y/C separate video signal
• Audio L/R signal
INPUT 4
INPUT 5
Input
• Composite video signal
• Audio L/R signal
Output
• Composite video signal
Input
• Composite video signal
• RGB signals from AV devices or PCs
• Audio L/R signal
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Features
Features and Functions of this device
PDP-507CMX
PDP-427CMX
¶ Introduces newly developed Wide Plasma Panel
The new, wide, high-precision plasma panel (1365x768 /
16:9) pushes the envelope of previous high-luminance
panels, producing brighter, clearer images with higher
contrast.
¶ Introduces newly developed Wide Plasma Panel
The new wide high-precision plasma panel (1024x768 /
16:9) pushes the envelope of previous high-luminance
panels, producing brighter, clearer images with higher
contrast.
¶ ES Slot interface for enhanced potential
The display has a built-in ES Slot Interface to allow card
installation for the connection of external devices, thus
enhancing its expansion potential.
¶ Provides an ES Slot interface for enhanced
potential
The display has a built-in ES Slot Interface for installing
third-party cards. Cards allow external devices to
communicate with the panel, enhancing and expanding
its potential.
¶ Supports wide range of computer signals
(analog/digital)
This panel supports a wide range of signals including
PC standard resolution XGA display, 1920x1080*1,
1360x768, wide signals, DOT BY DOT, full display, etc.
It is possible to switch each signal between DOT BY
DOT, 4:3, and full display*2.
¶ Supports wide range of computer signals
(analog/digital)
This panel supports a wide range of signals including
PC standard resolution XGA display, 1920x1080*1,
1360x768, wide signals, DOT BY DOT, full display, etc.
It is possible to switch each signal between DOT BY
DOT, 4:3, and full display*2.
1
*
Only during DVI input of PC signals (compressed
display)
Screen size differs according to the signal
2
1
*
*
Only during DVI input of PC signals (compressed
display)
Screen size differs according to the signal
¶ Free Installation Configuration
– Broader installation possibilities with thinner,
lighter, high-endurance design –
2
*
¶ Free Installation Configuration
While producing a large 50" screen image, the display is
only 99 mm (3.9") thick, and weighs in at only 35.5 kg
(78.3 lbs).
The efficient heat-radiating design greatly improves
environmental operating conditions. The thinner, lighter
design, coupled to high-endurance construction greatly
broadens the range of possible installation locations and
methods.
– Broader installation possibilities with thinner,
lighter, high-endurance design –
While producing a large 42" screen image, the display is
only 98 mm thick and weighs in at only 30.5 kg. The
efficient heat-radiating design greatly improves
environmental operating conditions. The thinner, lighter
design coupled to high-endurance construction greatly
broadens the range of possible installation locations.
¶ High reliability for commercial applications
This display has features that give it high dependability
in commercial applications. These features include the
ability to suppress peak luminance in accordance with
the viewing program and to adjust the cooling fan’s
speed with changes in operating environment. Such
features provide safety and high-endurance under
conditions of commercial use.
¶ High reliability for commercial applications
This display is highly dependable in commercial
applications because of its ability to supress peak
luminance during viewing and adjust cooling fan speeds
when the operating environment changes.
Such features provide safety and high-endurance under
conditions of commercial use.
¶ Improved usability
¶ Improved usability
User convenience is improved by making the display
more compatible with your computer. Some of these
improvements include the one-touch screen
adjustment [AUTO SET UP] function for computer
connections and the POINT ZOOM function to enlarge
selected portions of the screen image to show detailed
program data.
User convenience has been improved by adding
features that make the display even more compatible
with your computer. Some of these include the one-
touch screen adjustment, [AUTO SET UP] function for
computer connections, and the POINT ZOOM function
to enlarge local portions of the screen image to display
important detailed program data.
¶ Power-Saving Design
The display has a variety of power-saving functions
including an automatic brightness function with ambient
light sensing.
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
2.1 Specifications
PDP-507CMX
Power requirements ............ AC 100 V to 120 V, 50 Hz/60 Hz
Light-emitting panel ..................... 50V type AC Plasma Panel
110.36 cm (W) × 62.09 cm (H) × 126.63 cm (diagonal)
Aspect ratio .................................................................... 16 : 9
Pixels ...................................................................... 1365 × 768
Pixel pitch ..................... 0.81 mm (H•RGB trio) × 0.81 mm (V)
(The power unit range is from AC100 V to 240 V (50 Hz/60 Hz))
In-rush ............................................................... less than 30 A
Power factor .................................................... more than 0.95
Consumption .........................340 W (NOTE 2) (0.6 W in standby)
External dimensions
........................... 1222 mm (W) × 736 mm (H) × 99 mm (D)
Input/output terminals
Video-related
48-1/8 in. (W) × 28-31/32 in. (H) × 3-29/32 in. (D)
Weight.......................................................... 35.5 kg (78.3 lbs.)
Dimensions of packaging
INPUT 1
......................... 1340 mm (W) × 900 mm (H) × 365 mm (D)
Input
Mini D-sub, 15-pin connector (female)
• RGB signal (for SYNC ON G)
RGB ............................... 0.7 Vp-p/75 Ω/no sync
HD/VS, VD ........ TTL level/positive and negative
polarity/2.2 kΩ
52-26/32 in. (W) × 35-1/2 in. (H) × 14-7/16 in. (D)
Weight when packaged.............................. 44.0 kg (97.1 lbs.)
Operating Temperature.... 0 °C to 40 °C (32 °F to 104 °F) (NOTE 3)
Operating Humidity .......................................... 20 % to 80 %
Operating atmospheric pressure.......... 800 hPa to 1100 hPa
Storage limitations (when installed)
Temperature .................. –20 °C to +60 °C (–4 °F to 140 °F)
Humidity......................................................... 20 % to 90 %
Atmospheric pressure......................... 700 hPa to 1114 hPa
Storage limitations (when in original package)
SYNC ON G ............ 1 Vp-p/75 Ω/negative sync.
*Microsoft Plug & Play (VESA DDC 1/2B) supported
Output
Mini D-sub, 15-pin connector (female)
.................................. 75 Ω/with buffer
Temperature ................ –30 °C to +60 °C (–22 °F to 140 °F)
Humidity......................................................... 20 % to 90 %
Atmospheric pressure......................... 700 hPa to 1114 hPa
Stacking ............................................Fewer than three tiers
INPUT 2
Input
DVI-D 24-pin connector
Digital RGB signal (DVI compliant TMDS signal)
*Microsoft Plug & Play (VESA DDC 2B) supported
Standard accessories
Power cord (2 m) .................................................................... 1
Ferrite core (for audio cables) ................................................. 3
Remote control unit ................................................................ 1
AA battery ............................................................................... 2
Wiping cloth (for screen) ......................................................... 1
Speed clamp ........................................................................... 3
Bead band ............................................................................... 3
Operating instructions............................................................. 1
Warranty ................................................................................. 1
Audio-related
Input
AUDIO INPUT (for INPUT1)
Stero mini jack
L/R ...................... 500 mVrms/more than 10 kΩ
AUDIO INPUT (for INPUT2)
Stero mini jack
L/R ...................... 500 mVrms/more than 10 kΩ
Output
AUDIO OUTPUT
Stero mini jack
L/R .......................... 500 mVrms/less than 5 kΩ
SPEAKER
Specifications and external designs are subject to change without
notice.
L/R ................... 6 Ω to 16 Ω/9 W + 9 W (at 6 Ω)
(NOTE 1) The display is preset at the factory to 9600bps. This
setting can be changed using either the remote control
unit or a PC.
(NOTE 2) Allow for 370 W = 370 VA of consumption per unit.
(NOTE 3) The correct operating environmental temperature may
vary depending on the installation site (refer to
“Installation Site Requirements (pg. 20)”.
Control-related
RS-232C terminal: D-sub, 9-pin (male)
(NOTE 1)
Combination In/Out Terminal: Mini-DIN, 6-pin
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
PDP-427CMX
Power requirements ............ AC 100 V to 120 V, 50 Hz/60 Hz
Light-emitting panel ..................... 42V type AC Plasma Panel
92.16 cm (W) × 51.53 cm (H) × 105.59 cm (diagonal)
Aspect ratio .................................................................... 16 : 9
Pixels ...................................................................... 1024 × 768
Pixel pitch ..................... 0.9 mm (H•RGB trio) × 0.671 mm (V)
(The power unit range is from AC100 V to 240 V (50 Hz/60 Hz))
In-rush ............................................................... less than 30 A
Power factor .................................................... more than 0.95
Consumption .........................285 W (NOTE 2) (1.2 W in standby)
External dimensions (not including the handles and supplied stand)
........................... 1022 mm (W) × 610 mm (H) × 98 mm (D)
40-1/4 in. (W) × 24-1/32 in. (H) × 3-27/32 in. (D)
Input/output terminals
Video-related
Weight (without attachment stand) ......... 30.5 kg (67.3 lbs.)
Dimensions of packaging
INPUT 1
......................... 1177 mm (W) × 767 mm (H) × 354 mm (D)
Input
Mini D-sub, 15-pin connector (female)
• RGB signal (for SYNC ON G)
RGB ............................... 0.7 Vp-p/75 Ω/no sync
HD/VS, VD ........ TTL level/positive and negative
polarity/2.2 kΩ
46-11/32 in. (W) × 30-7/32 in. (H) × 13-31/32 in. (D)
Weight when packaged................................. 38 kg (83.8 lbs.)
Operating Temperature.... 0 °C to 40 °C (32 °F to 104 °F) (NOTE 3)
Operating Humidity .......................................... 20 % to 80 %
Operating atmospheric pressure.......... 800 hPa to 1114 hPa
Storage limitations (when installed)
Temperature .................. –20 °C to +60 °C (–4 °F to 140 °F)
Humidity......................................................... 20 % to 90 %
Atmospheric pressure......................... 700 hPa to 1114 hPa
Storage limitations (when in original package)
SYNC ON G ............ 1 Vp-p/75 Ω/negative sync.
*Microsoft Plug & Play (VESA DDC 1/2B) supported
Output
Mini D-sub, 15-pin connector (female)
.................................. 75 Ω/with buffer
Temperature ................ –30 °C to +60 °C (–22 °F to 140 °F)
Humidity......................................................... 20 % to 90 %
Atmospheric pressure......................... 700 hPa to 1114 hPa
Stacking ............................................Fewer than three tiers
INPUT 2
Input
DVI-D 24-pin connector
Digital RGB signal (DVI compliant TMDS signal)
*Microsoft Plug & Play (VESA DDC 2B) supported
Standard accessories
Power cord.............................................................................. 1
Ferrite core (for power cord) ................................................... 2
Ferrite core (for audio cables) ................................................. 3
Cable ties ................................................................................ 2
Remote control unit ................................................................ 1
AA battery ............................................................................... 2
Wiping cloth (for screen) ......................................................... 1
Speed clamp ........................................................................... 3
Operating instructions............................................................. 1
Warranty ................................................................................. 1
Remote control unit holder ..................................................... 1
Display stand ........................................................................... 2
Washer .................................................................................... 2
Hexagon socket head screw (M8 x 40) .................................. 2
Audio-related
Input
AUDIO INPUT (for INPUT1)
Stero mini jack
L/R ...................... 500 mVrms/more than 10 kΩ
AUDIO INPUT (for INPUT2)
Stero mini jack
L/R ...................... 500 mVrms/more than 10 kΩ
Output
AUDIO OUTPUT
Stero mini jack
L/R .......................... 500 mVrms/less than 5 kΩ
SPEAKER
L/R ................... 6 Ω to 16 Ω/8 W + 8 W (at 6 Ω)
Specifications and external designs are subject to change without
notice.
Control-related
RS-232C terminal: D-sub, 9-pin (male)
(NOTE 1)
Combination In/Out Terminal: Mini-DIN, 6-pin
(NOTE 1) The display is preset at the factory to 9600bps. This
setting can be changed using either the remote control
unit or a PC.
(NOTE 2) Allow for 320 W = 320 VA of consumption per unit.
(NOTE 3) The correct operating environmental temperature may
vary depending on the installation site (refer to
“Installation Site Requirements (pg. 20)”.
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
INPUT Response Signals
INPUT 1
INPUT 2
7 PC signals supported
7 PC signals supported
Refresh rate
Refresh rate
Resolution
(Dot x Line)
Resolution
(Dot x Line)
Remarks
Remark
Vertical Horizontal
59.9 Hz 31.5 kHz
72.8 Hz 37.9 kHz
Vertical Horizontal
640x480
640x400
720x400
70.1 Hz 31.5 kHz
70.1 Hz 31.5 kHz
85.1 Hz 37.9 kHz
59.9 Hz 31.5 kHz
66.7 Hz 35.0 kHz Apple Macintosh 13”
72.8 Hz 37.9 kHz
NEC PC-9800
NEC PC-9800
75 Hz
85 Hz
37.5 kHz
43.3 kHz
640x480
100.4 Hz 51.1 kHz
120.4 Hz 61.3 kHz
70.1 Hz 31.5 kHz
85.1 Hz 37.9 kHz
720x400
NEC PC-9800
75 Hz
85 Hz
37.5 kHz
43.3 kHz
848x480
852x480
800x600
60 Hz
60 Hz
31.0 kHz
31.7 kHz
100.4 Hz 51.1 kHz
120.4 Hz 61.3 kHz
I/O DATA
I/O DATA
56.3 Hz 35.2 kHz
60.3 Hz 37.9 kHz
72.2 Hz 48.1 kHz
848x480
852x480
800x600
60 Hz
60 Hz
31.0 kHz
31.7 kHz
56.3 Hz 35.2 kHz
60.3 Hz 37.9 kHz
72.2 Hz 48.1 kHz
75 Hz
46.9 kHz
85.1 Hz 53.7 kHz
99.8 Hz 63.0 kHz
75 Hz
46.9 kHz
120 Hz
60 Hz
60 Hz
75.7 kHz
48.4 kHz
49.7 kHz
85.1 Hz 53.7 kHz
99.8 Hz 63.0 kHz
1024x768
1280x768
I/O DATA
I/O DATA
Work station (SGI)
120 Hz
75.7 kHz
70.1 Hz 56.5 kHz
832x624
1024x768
74.6 Hz 49.7 kHz Apple Macintosh 16”
75 Hz
85 Hz
60.0 kHz
68.7 kHz
60 Hz
60 Hz
48.4 kHz
49.7 kHz
Work station (SGI)
100.6 Hz 80.5 kHz
119.4 Hz 95.5 kHz
56.2 Hz 45.1 kHz
70.1 Hz 56.5 kHz
75 Hz 60.0 kHz
(74.9 Hz) (60.2 kHz)
85 Hz 68.7 kHz
100.6 Hz 80.5 kHz
119.4 Hz 95.5 kHz
56.2 Hz 45.1 kHz
( ) indicates Apple
Macintosh 19
59.8 Hz
69.8 Hz
48 kHz
56 kHz
I/O DATA
1280x800
1280x854
1360x768
1376x768
1152x864
59.8 Hz 49.7 kHz
60 Hz
60 Hz
53.1 kHz
47.7 kHz
1280x768
I/O DATA
I/O DATA
59.8 Hz
69.8 Hz
60 Hz
48 kHz
56 kHz
47.7 kHz
59.9 Hz 48.3 kHz
60 Hz
72 Hz
75 Hz
66 Hz
76 Hz
53.7 kHz
64.9 kHz
67.5 kHz
61.8 kHz Sun Microsystems LO
71.7 kHz Sun Microsystems HI
1360x765
1360x768
1376x768
1280x800
1280x854
1152x864
60 Hz
47.7 kHz
I/O DATA
I/O DATA
CVT
59.9 Hz 48.3 kHz
59.8 Hz 49.7 kHz
1152x900
60 Hz
60 Hz
72 Hz
75 Hz
53.1 kHz
53.7 kHz
64.9 kHz
67.5 kHz
PC
1440x900
1280x960
59.9 Hz 55.9 kHz Apple Macintosh17“
60 Hz
85 Hz
60 Hz
60 Hz
60 Hz
60.0 kHz
85.9 kHz
63.9 kHz
64.0 kHz
Work station (SGI)
1152x870
1152x900
75.1 Hz 68.7 kHz Apple Macintosh 21”
1280x1024
1400x1050
66 Hz
76 Hz
61.8 kHz Sun Microsystems LO
71.7 kHz Sun Microsystems HI
64.6 kHz Work station (EWS4800
)
71.2 Hz 75.1 kHz Work station (EWS4800)
1440x900
1280x960
59.9 Hz 55.9 kHz Apple Macintosh 17”
72 Hz
75 Hz
78.1 kHz
80.0 kHz
Work station (HP)
60 Hz
85 Hz
60 Hz
60 Hz
60 Hz
60.0 kHz
85.9 kHz
63.9 kHz
64.0 kHz
76.1 Hz 81.1 kHz
Work station (SUN)
1280x1024
Work station (SGI)
85 Hz
60 Hz
91.1 kHz
65.3 kHz
64.6 kHz Work station (EWS4800)
74.9 Hz 82.3 kHz
71.2 Hz 75.1 kHz Work station (EWS4800)
1680x1050
1920x1080
60 Hz
50 Hz
60 Hz
60 Hz
60 Hz
65.3 kHz
56.2 kHz
67.5 kHz
75.0 kHz
74.0 kHz
72 Hz
75 Hz
78.1 kHz
80.0 kHz
Work station (HP)
Work station (SUN)
I/O DATA
76.1 Hz 81.1 kHz
85 Hz 91.1 kHz
100.1 Hz 108.5 kHz
60 Hz 65.3 kHz
74.9 Hz 82.3 kHz
1600x1200
1920x1200RB
CVT
1400x1050
85 Hz
60 Hz
60 Hz
65 Hz
70 Hz
75 Hz
93.9 kHz
65.3 kHz
75.0 kHz
81.3 kHz
87.5 kHz
93.8 kHz
1680x1050
1600x1200
85 Hz 106.3 kH z
59.9 Hz 74.6 kHz
1920x1200
1920x1200RB
CVT
CVT
60 Hz
74.0 kHz
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
External Dimensions
2.2 External Dimensions
PDP-507CMX
WEIGHT: 35.5 kg (78.3 lbs) (without stand)
MATERIAL: Front: Resin; Rear cover: Metal plate, Front protector panel: Glass
TREATMENT: Front: Paint; Rear cover: Paint (All paints are Pioneer original colors)
For packaging information, refer to “3.4.2 Unpacking” (pg. 30).
(Unit: mm)
: center of gravity
FILTER SURFACE
TOP VIEW
1222
1126
99
99
1103.6(SCREEN AREA)
59
41
38
53
IR
7.5
7.5
LED
522
65
LEFT SIDE VIEW
RIGHT SIDE VIEW
13.5
15
13.5
19
14.7
CONTROL BUTTONS
378
22.3
95
335.7
339.9
158.6
POWER BUTTON
SPEAKER TERMINAL
BOTTOM VIEW
1154
AC INLET
798
496
4-M8.DEPTH14
FOR SPEAKER(M8.DEPTH12)
798
6-M8.DEPTH18
REAR VIEW
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
External Dimensions
PDP-427CMX
WEIGHT: 30.5 kg (67.3 lbs) (without stand)
MATERIAL: Front: Resin; Rear cover: Metal plate, Front protector panel: Glass
TREATMENT: Front: Paint; Rear cover: Paint (All paints are Pioneer original colors)
For packaging information, refer to “3.4.2 Unpacking” (pg. 30).
(Unit: mm)
TOP VIEW
1022
952
921.6(SCREEN AREA)
50.2
LED
Light sensor
468.6
18
40.4
Ambient light sensor
LEFT SIDE VIEW
98
13.5
13.5
14.7
22.3
RIGHT SIDE VIEW
19 15
304
CONTROL BUTTONS
POWER BUTTON
AC INLET
BOTTOM VIEW
SPEAKER TERMINAL
for mount unit
8-M4 DEPTH 16
530
496
for mount unit
6-M8 DEPTH 18
REAR VIEW
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
External Dimensions
<Main Unit Operation Panel>
<Light Sensor for the remote/ambient light
sensor/indicator>
PDP-507CMX
109
98
IR
LED
7.5
7.5
89
PDP-427CMX
Indicator
Light sensor for
the remote
24.4
42.4
Ambient light sensor
<Connection panel>
PDP-507CMX
(112.5)
123.6
17
44.5
107.5
12 12 28
38
42
95
(180.3)
PDP-427CMX
(121)
17
44.5
122.6
12 12 28
38
42
62.5
43
(78.8)
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controls and Connectors
2.3 Controls and Connectors
Main unit
5
Main unit
2
STANDBY
ON
Operation panel on the
main unit
DISPLAY
/ SET
INPUT SCREEN SIZE
– VOL +
STANDBY/ON
MENU
3 4
6
7=8
9
0
-
1
* Illustration depicts PDP-427CMX model.
Main unit
Operation panel on the main unit
1 Display stand (PDP-427CMX only)
6 STANDBY/ON button ( )
Press to put the display in Standby or into operation.
2 Remote control sensor
Point the remote control toward the remote sensor
to operate the unit.
7 MENU button
Press to open and close the on-screen menu.
8 DISPLAY/SET button
3 Ambient light sensor
Use to confirm on-screen menu selections and to
change settings.
When not in use by on-screen menus, press to
display the current set status.
This sensor measures the level of light inside the
viewing room; it is enabled when the [ENERGY
SAVE] option is set to [AUTO].
4 STANDBY/ON indicator
9 INPUT (’) button
When the unit is operating:
The indicator lights green.
When flashing, the light indicates an error.
The indicator flashes green once per second when
the [POWER MGT.] function is operating.
Except when menu screen is displayed, this button
can change the input.
0 SCREEN SIZE (‘) button
Except when menu screen is displayed, this button
can change the screen size.
When the unit is in Standby, the indicator lights red.
When flashing, the light indicates an error.
- VOL +/– (}/]) buttons
When not in use for by on-screen menus, these
buttons can adjust the sound volume.
5 Handles
= Functional lock button (concealed button)
This button is used to switch between permitted
and blocked operation of the control panel and the
remote control. It can also set the input function
memory.
12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controls and Connectors
Connection Panel (PDP-507CMX)
When installing PDA-5003
INPUT3
INPUT4
AUDIO
INPUT5
S-VIDEO
VIDEO
INPUT 3/4
ANALOG RGB
AUDIO
IN
OUT
R
L
G(ON SYNC)
B
R
HD (H/V SYNC) VD
R
L
! @
#
$
%
~
When installing PDA-5004
COMPONENT
VIDEO
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
S-VIDEO
AUDIO
VIDEO
AUDIO
AUDIO
R
L
IN
OUT
R
L
Y
Pb/Cb
Pr/Cr
R
L
-
=
^
&
* (
)
_
+
IN
OUT
OUTPUT INPUT1 INPUT2
AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO
INPUT1
INPUT2
ANALOG RGB OUT
(D-Sub)
ANALOG RGB IN
(D-Sub)
DIGITAL RGB
(DVI-D)
RS-232C
COMBINATION
1 2
3
4
567
8
9
0
Plasma Display Section
6 AUDIO (INPUT1) (Stereo mini jack)
1 SPEAKER (R) terminal
Use to obtain sound when INPUT1 is selected.
Connect the audio output jack of components
connected to INPUT1 to this unit.
For connection of an external right speaker.
Connect a speaker that has an impedance of 6 Ω to
16 Ω.
7 AUDIO (INPUT2) (Stereo mini jack)
Use to obtain sound when INPUT2 is selected.
Connect the audio output jack of components
connected to INPUT2 to this unit.
2 SPEAKER (L) terminal
For connection of an external left speaker. Connect
a speaker that has an impedance of 6 Ω to 16 Ω.
3 COMBINATION IN/OUT
8 ANALOG RGB OUT (INPUT1) (mini D-sub 15 pin)
Use the ANALOG RGB OUT (INPUT1) terminal to
output the video signal to an external monitor or
other component.
Never connect any component to these
connectors without first consulting your Pioneer
installation technician.
These connectors are used for Plasma Display
setup adjustments.
Note: The video signal is not output from the ANALOG
RGB OUT (INPUT1) terminal when the panel's main power
is OFF or the panel is in Standby.
4 RS-232C
Never connect any component to this connector
without first consulting your Pioneer installation
technician.
This connector is used for Plasma Display setup
adjustments.
9 ANALOG RGB IN (INPUT1) (mini D-sub 15 pin)
For connection of a personal computer (PC) or
similar component. Confirm that the connection
made corresponds to the signal output from the
connected component.
0 DIGITAL RGB (INPUT2) (DVI-D jack)
Use to connect a computer.
Note: This unit does not support the display of
copyguard-protected video signals.
- AC IN
5 AUDIO (OUTPUT) (Stereo mini jack)
Use to output the audio of the selected source
component connected to this unit to an AV amplifier
or similar component.
Note: No sound is produced from the AUDIO (OUTPUT)
jack when the MAIN POWER switch is set to OFF or when
set to Standby.
Use to connect the supplied power cord to an AC outlet.
= MAIN POWER switch
Use to switch the main power of the unit on and off.
13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controls and Connectors
Video Card <PDA-5003> Section
Video Card <PDA-5004> Section
The video card provides three video input connectors,
one video output connector, and two audio input
connectors. Consult the pages noted in parentheses ( )
for details regarding connections to the various jacks
and connectors.
The video card provides three video input connectors,
one video output connector, and three audio input
connectors. Consult the pages noted in parentheses ( )
for details regarding connections to the various jacks
and connectors.
~ S-VIDEO (INPUT3) (S-video jack)
^ S-VIDEO (INPUT3) (S-video jack)
Use this jack to connect components that have an
S-video output jack such as a video deck, video
camera, laser disc player, or DVD recorder.
Use this jack to connect components that have an
S-video output jack such as a video deck, video
camera, laser disc player, or DVD recorder.
! VIDEO IN (INPUT4) (BNC jack)
& AUDIO R/L (INPUT3) (RCA Pin jacks)
Use this jack to obtain sound when INPUT3 is
selected.
Use this jack to connect components that have a
composite video output jack such as a video deck,
video camera, laser disc player, or DVD recorder.
Connect these jacks to the component’s audio
outputs that are connected to the video card’s
INPUT3.
@ VIDEO OUT (INPUT4) (BNC jack)
Use this jack to output the video signal to an
external monitor or other component.
Note
* VIDEO IN (INPUT4) (RCA Pin jack)
Use this jack to connect components that have a
composite video output jack such as a video deck,
video camera, laser disc player, or DVD recorder.
The video signal is not output from the VIDEO OUT
(INPUT4) jack when the display is OFF or in the Standby
mode.
( VIDEO OUT (INPUT4) (RCA Pin jack)
Use this jack to output the video signal to an
external monitor or other component.
Note
# AUDIO R/L (INPUT3/4) (RCA Pin jacks)
Use this jack to obtain sound when INPUT3 or
INPUT4 is selected. Connect these jacks to the
component’s audio outputs that are connected to
the video card’s INPUT3 or INPUT4.
The video signal is not output from the VIDEO OUT
(INPUT4) jack when the display is OFF or in Standby.
$ ANALOG RGB (INPUT5) (BNC jacks)
) AUDIO R/L (INPUT4) (RCA Pin jacks)
Use this jack to obtain sound when INPUT4 is
selected.
Use this jack to connect components equipped with
RGB outputs jacks such as personal computers,
external RGB decoders, or components equipped
with component output jacks such as DVD
recorders. Verify that the connection corresponds to
the signal output from the connected component.
Connect these jacks to the component’s audio
outputs that are connected to the video card’s
INPUT4.
_ COMPONENT VIDEO (INPUT5) (RCA Pin jacks)
Use this jack to connect devices that have
component video output jacks such as DVD
recorders.
% AUDIO R/L (INPUT5) (RCA Pin jacks)
Use this jack to obtain sound when INPUT5 is
selected.
Connect these jacks to the component’s audio
outputs that are connected to the video card’s
INPUT5.
+ AUDIO R/L (INPUT5) (RCA Pin jacks)
Use this jack to obtain sound when INPUT5 is
selected.
Connect these jacks to the device’s audio outputs
that are connected to the video card’s INPUT5.
14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controls and Connectors
Connection Panel (PDP-427CMX)
9 0
-
=
When installing PDA-5003
INPUT3
INPUT4
AUDIO
INPUT5
S-VIDEO
VIDEO
INPUT 3/4
ANALOG RGB
AUDIO
IN
OUT
R
L
G(ON SYNC)
B
R
HD (H/V SYNC) VD
R
L
! @
#
$
%
~
When installing PDA-5004
COMPONENT
VIDEO
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
S-VIDEO
AUDIO
VIDEO
AUDIO
AUDIO
R
L
IN
OUT
R
L
Y
Pb/Cb
Pr/Cr
R
L
^
&
* (
)
_
+
IN
OUT
OUTPUT INPUT1 INPUT2
AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO
INPUT1
INPUT2
ANALOG RGB OUT
(D-Sub)
ANALOG RGB IN
(D-Sub)
DIGITAL RGB
(DVI-D)
RS-232C
COMBINATION
1
2
345
6
7
8
Plasma Display Section
6 ANALOG RGB OUT (INPUT1) (mini D-sub 15 pin)
Use this connector to output the video signal to an
external monitor or other component.
Note
1 COMBINATION IN/OUT
These connectors are used for Plasma Display
setup adjustments.
2 RS-232C
The video signal is not output from the ANALOG RGB OUT
(INPUT1) connector when the main power of this display is
OFF or in Standby mode.
This connector is used for Plasma Display setup
adjustments.
3 AUDIO (OUTPUT) (Stereo mini jack)
7 ANALOG RGB IN (INPUT1) (mini D-sub 15 pin)
Use this input to connect components equipped
with RGB outputs jacks such as personal
computers. Verify that the connection corresponds
the signal output format from the connected
component.
Use this port to output the audio of the selected
source component that is connected to the Plasma
Display, to an AV amplifier or similar component.
Note
No sound is produced from the AUDIO (OUTPUT) jack
when the display is OFF or in the Standby mode.
8 DIGITAL RGB (INPUT2) (DVI-D jack)
Use this input to connect to a computer.
Connect to an AV component (HDCP supported)
equipped with DVI output connector.
4 AUDIO (INPUT1) (Stereo mini jack)
Use this port to obtain sound when INPUT1 is
selected. Connect this jack to the audio output
connector on the device that is connected to the
plasma panel’s INPUT1.
9 SPEAKER (R) terminal
Use this port to connect an external right speaker.
Connect a speaker whose impedance is 6 Ω to 16 Ω.
5 AUDIO (INPUT2) (Stereo mini jack)
Use this port to obtain sound when INPUT2 is
selected. Connect this jack to the audio output
connector on the device connected to the Plasma
Display’s INPUT2.
0 SPEAKER (L) terminal
Use this port to connect an external left speaker.
Connect a speaker whose impedance is 6 Ω to 16 Ω.
15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controls and Connectors
- AC IN
Video Card <PDA-5004> Section
A power cable is furnished with the Plasma Display.
Connect one end of the power cable to this
connector and the other end to a standard AC
power source.
The video card provides 3 video input connectors, 1
video output connector and 3 audio input connectors.
Consult the pages noted in parentheses ( ) for details
regarding connections to the various jacks and
connectors.
= MAIN POWER switch
Use this switch to toggle the panel’s main power
ON and OFF.
^ S-VIDEO (INPUT3) (S-video jack)
Use this jack to connect components that have an
S-video output jack such as a video deck, video
camera, laser disc player, or DVD recorder.
Video Card <PDA-5003> Section
The video card is provided with 3 video input
connectors, 1 video output connector and 2 audio input
connectors. Consult the pages noted in parentheses ( )
for details regarding connections to the various jacks
and connectors.
& AUDIO R/L (INPUT3) (RCA Pin jacks)
Use this jack to obtain sound when INPUT3 is
selected.
Connect these jacks to the component’s audio
outputs that are connected to the video card’s
INPUT3.
~ S-VIDEO (INPUT3) (S-video jack)
Use this jack to connect components that have an
S-video output jack such as a video deck, video
camera, laser disc player, or DVD recorder.
* VIDEO IN (INPUT4) (RCA Pin jack)
Use this jack to connect components that have a
composite video output jack such as a video deck,
video camera, laser disc player, or DVD recorder.
! VIDEO IN (INPUT4) (BNC jack)
Use this jack to connect components that have a
composite video output jack such as a video deck,
video camera, laser disc player, or DVD recorder.
( VIDEO OUT (INPUT4) (RCA Pin jack)
Use this jack to output the video signal to an
external monitor or other component.
Note
@ VIDEO OUT (INPUT4) (BNC jack)
Use this jack to output the video signal to an
external monitor or other component.
Note
The video signal is not output from the VIDEO OUT
(INPUT4) jack when the display is OFF or in the Standby
mode.
The video signal is not output from the VIDEO OUT
(INPUT4) jack when the display is OFF or in the Standby
mode.
) AUDIO R/L (INPUT4) (RCA Pin jacks)
Use this jack to obtain sound when INPUT4 is
selected.
# AUDIO R/L (INPUT3/4) (RCA Pin jacks)
Use this jack to obtain sound when INPUT3 or
INPUT4 is selected. Connect these jacks to the
component’s audio outputs that are connected to
the video card’s INPUT3 or INPUT4.
Connect these jacks to the component’s audio
outputs that are connected to the video card’s
INPUT4.
_ COMPONENT VIDEO (INPUT5) (RCA Pin jacks)
Use this jack to connect devices that have
component video output jacks such as DVD
recorders.
$ ANALOG RGB (INPUT5) (BNC jacks)
Use this jack to connect components equipped with
RGB outputs jacks such as personal computers,
external RGB decoders, or components equipped
with component output jacks such as DVD
recorders. Verify that the connection corresponds to
the signal output format from the connected
component.
+ AUDIO R/L (INPUT5) (RCA Pin jacks)
Use this jack to obtain sound when INPUT5 is
selected.
Connect these jacks to the device’s audio outputs
that are connected to the video card’s INPUT5.
% AUDIO R/L (INPUT5) (RCA Pin jacks)
Use this jack to obtain sound when INPUT5 is
selected.
Connect these jacks to the component’s audio
outputs that are connected to the video card’s
INPUT5.
16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Pin layout
2.4 Pin layout
INPUT1 (Mini D-sub, 15-pin connector; female)
pin layout
RS-232C terminal (D-sub 9-pin connector; male)
pin layout (DCE format)
5
1
1
5
6
10
15
11
6
9
Pin No.
Input
Output
Pin No.
Signal
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
R
G
B
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
NC (not connected)
TxD (Transmit Data)
RxD (Receive Data)
NC (not connected)
GND
NC (not connected)
GND
GND
NC (not connected)
NC (not connected)
RTS (Request To Send)
NC (not connected)
GND
GND
DDC +5V
NC (not connected)
NC (not connected)
NC (not connected)
10 GND
INPUT2 (DVI-D 24 pin connector; female)
pin layout
11 NC (not connected)
12 DDC SDA
13 HD or H/V SYNC
14 VD
1
2
15 DDC SCL
9
16
17
24
Pin No.
Signal Assignment
T.M.D.S. Data2–
Combination IN/OUT terminal pin layout
1
2
T.M.D.S. Data2+
T.M.D.S. Data2/4 Shield
NC (No connection)
NC (No connection)
DDC Clock
6
4
2
5
3
1
3
4
5
6
7
DDC Data
8
NC (No connection)
T.M.D.S. Data1–
T.M.D.S. Data1+
T.M.D.S. Data1/3 Shield
NC (No connection)
NC (No connection)
+5V Power
Pin No.
Combination
IN
Combination
OUT
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
1
2
GND
GND
NC (not connected)
NC (not connected)
3
4
5
6
TxD (output)
NC (not connected)
RxD (input)
RxD (input)
NC (not connected)
TxD (output)
GND
Hot Plug Detect
T.M.D.S. Data0 –
T.M.D.S. Data0+
T.M.D.S. Data0/5 Shield
NC (No connection)
NC (No connection)
T.M.D.S. Clock Shield
T.M.D.S. Clock+
T.M.D.S. Clock–
NC (not connected)
NC (not connected)
17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Control Unit
2.5 Remote Control Unit
1 SCREEN SIZE button
Press to select the screen size.
2 INPUT buttons
Press to select the input.
0
-
1
2
3 MENU button
Press to reveal and hide the on-screen menu.
4 ADJUST (5/∞/3/2) buttons
Press to navigate menu screens and adjust various
settings on the unit.
=
5 SET button
Press to adjust or enter various settings on the unit.
3
4
5
~
!
6 SUB INPUT button
Press to change subscreen inputs during multi-
screen display.
7 SPLIT button
Press to switch to multi-screen display.
6
7
@
#
8 MUTING button
Press to mute the volume.
$
%
8
9
9 ID NO. SET button
Press to select which position the panel holds in a
video wall.
0 AUTO SET UP button
Press to automatically set the [POSITION], [CLOCK].
and [PHASE] to optimum values when using a
computer signal.
- STANDBY/ON button
Press to activate the display or place in Standby.
= DISPLAY button
Press to view the unit’s current input and setup
mode.
~ POINT ZOOM button
Press to select and enlarge a portion of the screen.
! FREEZE button
Press to display a still image in the subscreen when
the memo screen function is enabled.
@ SWAP button
Press to switch between the main screen and the
subscreen during multi-screen display.
# PIP SHIFT button
Press to move the position of the subscreen when
viewing in PinP mode with multi-screen dsplay.
$ VOLUME (+/–) buttons
Press to adjust the volume.
% CLEAR button
Press to clear for program timer and ID assignment.
18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Control Unit Holder
2.6 Remote Control Unit Holder (PDP-427CMX only)
Peel the sticker covers from the lower and upper mounting tapes on the rear of the remote control holder. Attach it to
the back of the main unit or on some other fixed surface so that it will be available for storing the remote control with
the panel.
Remote control unit
Area of remote control
unit holder attachment
Remote control
unit holder
Upper and
lower tape
Example of remote control
unit holder attachment
Do not block ventilation holes with the remote control holder.
Caution
19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installation Site Requirements
[507CMX : 427CMX]
3.1 Installation Site Requirements
If the site requires modifications or special preparations before installing the Plasma Display or its mounting hardware,
obtain permission in advance from the building owner or building authorities. To ensure safety, it is also important to
determine the strength of the installation site with the help of an authorized building contractor.
Safety Precautions
1) Structure of the installation site
Thoroughly study the structure of the installation site before determining the most suitable installation method.
Buildings vary in structure and materials, thus the best mounting choice differs at each location. When drilling into
walls, check for internal electrical wiring and hidden pipes.
2) Weight capacity of the installation site
Select a location sufficient to support the total weight of the display and mounting hardware.
3) Flat, level surfaces
Select a flat, level surface so that the mounting hardware is parallel to the proposed mounting surface.
Install the unit so that the load is evenly distributed along the ceiling or floor, as well as on mounting hardware such as
from hang bolts.
4) Sufficient work space
Select a location with sufficient space for installation preperations. The panel mounting should be conducted by two or
more people.
5) Nearby equipment
If air conditioning ducts, lamps, etc. are located near the installation site, dust, temperatures fluctuations, humidity, and
condensation may cause problems. Please take steps to avoid this possibility.
6) Safe locations
Do not install the unit where it may be easily touched or leaned against. Avoid locations subject to high vibration or
severe impacts.
7) Lighting conditions
• Check existing lighting and sunlight angles when considering an installation layout. Bright lighting can reduce the
visibility and quality of a displayed image.
• In very bright surroundings, adjusting screen intensity may not result in perceptibly brighter images. Extreme intensity
settings can reduce a system’s service life.
8) Other installation conditions
The panel is designed for indoor use and is not suited for open-air use. Installation in locations that are even partially
exposed to the elements may lead to malfunctions or breakdown. If there is a danger of being subjected to the conditions
listed below, it is necessary to limit the exposure as much as possible.
• Water or other liquids and dust
• Temperature and humidity changes
• Salt-bearing wind
• Direct sunlight (avoid sites exposed to direct sunlight upon the display as this can degrade image quality)
20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installation Site Requirements
[507CMX : 427CMX]
9) Temperature and humidity conditions
• The installation site should meet the following conditions:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Operating temperatures: 0 °C to 40 °C (largely depending on installation conditions)
Operating humidity: 20 % to 80 %
Storage temperature: –20 °C to 60 °C
Storage humidity: 20 % to 90 %
Operating atmospheric pressure: 800 hPa to 1100 hPa
Storage atmospheric pressure: 700 hPa to 1114 hPa
• We discourage installing electronic products such as this unit in locations subject to high humidity. If the unit is to be
installed in a location subject to relatively high humidity, observe the following:
•
•
•
Failure to install the unit in acceptable ways may result in non-warranty damages.
Make sure the unit is grounded.
Do not allow water or other liquids to enter the unit.
10) Prevent condensation
A primary problem during the winter is condensation forming on or in electronic equipment. Rapid temperature fluctuations
can leave water vapor inside the unit or on the screen, degrading performance. If condensation occurs, turn the unit
OFF for an hour or more then increase the room temperature gradually before turning ON the unit.
Consult Pioneer authorized dealers for assistance.
11) Power requirements
• This unit functions properly when powered at 10 % of its rated voltage. Characteristics of power lines may effect
the voltage output. If any of the following issues occur, contact an electrician to inspect the power source.
-- Significant voltage drop between the circuit panel and the Plasma Display
-- Significant changes in voltage when switching the display power ON or OFF
• Please allow the following margin for power consumption per unit.
PDP-507CMX: 370 W = 370 VA
PDP-427CMX: 320 W = 320 VA
(NOTE)
When powering up the unit, the in-rush current is approximately 30 A.
• A grounded three-core power cable is used by the Plasma Display in order to maintain its functions.
Connect the power cord by inserting it into a grounded electrical outlet.
When using a different power source, use a conversion plug. Insert it into a grounded electrical outlet and securely
attach the ground wire.
• A leakage current within a value, stipulated by standards in each country, flows from an internal noise filter through
devices installed inside switching power sources such as television sets or air-conditioners. Because these currents
are added together when multiple units are connected, take steps to prevent electric shock caused by ground wires,
etc. When a leakage breaker is installed in a power distribution series, choose the leakage breaker rating that is at
least two times the total leakage current.
When many devices are connected, increase the number of leakage breakers and form branches in the wiring system.
12) Effective remote control distance
The remote control of this display receives at the following angles and distances.
• Front: 8 m
• Left-right 45°: 3 m/Left-right 30°: 7 m
• Upward 30°: 3.5 m/Upward 15°: 5 m
• Downward 30°: 5 m
If other products controlled with infrared remote controls are placed nearby, remote control function may be affected.
In such cases, move other devices further away from the display or contact a Pioneer-authorized dealer for assistance.
Depending on installation conditions, the remote control range may be reduced by infrared radiation emitted by the
screen.
The screen’s infrared intensity varies, depending upon the displayed image.
21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[507CMX]
Installation Conditions
3.2 Installation Conditions (PDP-507CMX)
3.2.1 Heat dissipation
This unit has openings for effective ventilation. Vent locations are marked by arrows in the illustration below. The
arrows show the direction of airflow. To allow proper dissipation of heat from the unit, do not cover these openings.
(Unit : mm)
395.5
171
552.5
107.4
9.4
157.9
72.5
94.7
72.5
72.5
72.5
107.4
72.5
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Fan
Fan
246.7
76.7
76.7
246.7
52.8 54.5
143.7
174.5
174.5
143.7
93.7
48.6
24.5
24.5
93.7
48.6
384.5
119.8
119.8
133.7
194.5
194.5
133.7
In a standard installation, two fans and part A draw hot air from the unit. All openings not assisted by fans serve as
air inlets. If the unit is hung from or embedded into a wall, special operating temperature limits and other limitations
may apply. Refer to section “3.5 Special Installation (PDP-507CMX)” (pg. 35) for more information.
22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installation Conditions
[507CMX]
3.2.2 Calculating heat quantity
As a courtesy to our customers, we have included the power formula for calculating air conditioning needs.
For power consumption, allow 370 W = 370 VA per unit.
Since most of the power consumed is transformed into heat, power consumption may be regarded as roughly equal to
generated heat.
1 Conversion to calories
[W] × 0.86 = [kcal/h]
Heat generated per display: 370 W × 0.86 = 318 kcal/h
2 Conversion to British Thermal Units
[W] × 3.41 = [BTU/h]
Heat generated per unit: 370 W × 3.41 = 1262 BTU/h
3.2.3 Product mounting holes
We recommend using mounting hardware available from Pioneer. If you use other mounting hardware, mount the
hardware to the unit using the M8-bolt holes on the unit. Tighten the bolts with a torque between 50 kg/cm and 80 kg/
cm. Applying a torque beyond these limits may lead to internal component failure.
Locations of usable mounting holes are shown below.
a Holes (10 places)
b Holes (4 places)
Vent (fan)
b hole
b hole
a hole
a hole
Attaching
surface
Installation
bracket etc.
a hole
This unit
Bolt
a holes
a holes
12 mm to
18 mm
b hole
Bolt
Center line
a hole
a hole
12 mm to 14 mm
b hole
b hole
Rear view diagram
Side view diagram
Always use a minimum of 4 mounting holes that are evenly distributed on opposite sides of both the horizontal
and vertical center lines.
Use bolts that can be driven 12 mm to 18 mm into holes “a” and from 12 mm to 14 mm into holes “b” as shown
in the Side View above.
Do not block or cover vents on the rear panel.
Take precautions to prevent the walls from being soiled by the Plasma Display’s exhaust outlets.
This unit incorporates glass components. Install only on flat surfaces.
Always turn every bolt by hand two to three times then check to make sure the bolt is straight.
You may tighten using a tool but do not over-tighten the bolts.
Do not use loctight or similar bonding products.
Please use M8 (P=1.25) bolts. DO NOT use any other type of bolt.
23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installation Conditions
[507CMX]
This unit is designed to be mounted using four bolt holes. For additional safety, we recommend securing it at four or six
points on opposite sides of the horizontal and vertical center lines, as shown in the drawing below.
Poor methods for securing
Suggested methods for securing
Secured at six points
*Attach using M8x6.
Secured at four points (with mounting hardware attached to the top and bottom)
*Attach using M8x4.
Secured at four points (with mounting hardware attached to the sides)
*Attach using M8x4.
Take proper precautions to prevent pinching the power cord or signal cables.
24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[507CMX]
Installation Conditions
3.2.4 Mounting surface warping
The display incorporates glass. Before mounting the panel using hardware other than that provided by Pioneer, perform
the following checks to confirm that the display is free from warps exceeding 1 mm*.
Regarding the 1 mm limit:
The panel frame may have a warp of up to 3 mm. If the total warp (the warp of the frame plus the warp of the
mounting surface) exceeds 4 mm then the glass in the display may experience excessive stress. To ensure that
the total warp is less than 4 mm, verify that the warp of the mounting surface is less than 1 mm.
1 Referring to the illustration below, diagonally extend string (maximum diameter φ 0.1- mm) through the bolt
mount openings. Strings should be completely free of slack.
2 Measure the clearance (L) between the strings where they cross.
Distortion is expressed by: [Distortion] = L × 2.
3 If L is found to be 0, pass the strings through the other bolt mount openings then repeat the measurements. Any
value of L greater than 0 indicates the presence of distortion. If the measured value in both cases is 0, the
distortion is negligible.
A
Mount bolt holes
Plasma Display Mount Surface (Mount Brackets)
A
Magnified view of section A
D
String
String
Point E is the center point of string
segment A-B.
Point F is the center point of string
segment C-D.
Clearance between points E and F = L
(Points E and F are shown displaced
for illustrative purposes).
F
E
L
B
C
25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installation Conditions
[427CMX]
3.3 Installation Conditions (PDP-427CMX)
3.3.1 Heat dissipation
This unit has openings for effective ventilation. Vent locations are marked by arrows in the illustration below. The
direction of the arrows shows the direction of airflow. To allow proper dissipation of heat from the unit, do not
cover any of these openings.
(Unit : mm)
372.4
264.5
137.3
81.3
Fan
52.4
72.4
72.4
72.4
52.4
81.3
Fan
137.3
A
A
A
A
A
52.6 39.8
98.8
374.5
414.5
149.8
114.5
52.6
98.8
114.5
In a standard installation, two fans and part A draw hot air from the unit. All openings not assisted by fans serve as
air inlets. If the unit is hung from or embedded into a wall, special operating temperature limits and other limitations
may apply. Refer to section “3.6 Special Installation (PDP-427CMX)” (pg. 55) for more information.
26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installation Conditions
[427CMX]
3.3.2 Calculating heat quantity
As a courtesy to our customers, we have included the power formula for calculating air conditioning needs.
For power consumption, allow 320 W = 320 VA per unit.
Since most of the power consumed is transformed into heat, power consumption may be regarded as roughly equal to
generated heat.
1 Conversion to calories
[W] × 0.86 = [kcal/h]
Heat generated per display: 320 W × 0.86 = 275 kcal/h
2 Conversion to British Thermal Units
[W] × 3.41 = [BTU/h]
Heat generated per unit: 320 W × 3.41 = 1019 BTU/h
3.3.3 Product mounting holes
We recommend using mounting hardware available from Pioneer. If you use other mounting hardware, mount the
hardware to the unit using the M8-bolt holes provided in the unit. Tighten the bolts with a torque between 50 kg/cm and
80 kg/cm. Applying a torque beyond these limits may lead to internal component failure.
Locations of usable mounting holes are shown below.
a Holes (6 places)
b Holes (4 places)
Vent (fan)
b hole
b hole
Attaching
surface
Installation
bracket etc.
This unit
a hole
Bolt
a holes
a holes
12 mm to 18 mm
b hole
Bolt
Center line
b hole
b hole
12 mm to 18 mm
Rear view diagram
Side view diagram
Always use a minimum of 4 mounting holes that are evenly distributed on opposite sides of both the horizontal
and vertical center lines.
Use bolts that can be driven 12 mm to 18 mm into holes “a” and from 12 mm to 14 mm into holes “b” as shown
in the Side View above.
Do not block or cover vents on the rear panel.
Take precautions to prevent the walls from being soiled by the Plasma Display’s exhaust outlets.
This unit incorporates glass components. Install only on flat surfaces.
Always turn every bolt by hand two to three times then check to make sure the bolt is straight.
You may tighten using a tool but do not over-tighten the bolts.
Do not use loctight or similar bonding products.
Please use M8 (P=1.25) bolts. DO NOT use any other type of bolt.
The panel is attached using M8x6 or M8x4, but it can also be attached using M4x8.
For details, see the following page.
27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[427CMX]
Installation Conditions
This unit is designed to be mounted using four bolt holes. For additional safety, we recommend securing it at four, six
or eight points on opposite sides of the horizontal and vertical center lines, as shown in the drawing below. Methods
shown with a large “X” must not be used.
Poor methods for securing
Suggested methods for securing
Secured at six points
*Attach using M8x6.
Secured at eight points
*Attach using M4x8.
Secured at four points
*Attach using M8x4.
Secured at four points (with mounting hardware attached to the sides)
*Attach using M8x4.
(Take proper precautions to prevent pinching the power cord or signal cables.)
28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[427CMX]
Installation Conditions
3.3.4 Mounting surface warping
The display incorporates glass. Before mounting the panel using hardware other than that provided by Pioneer, perform
the following checks to confirm that the display is free from warps exceeding 1 mm*.
Regarding the 1 mm limit:
The panel frame may have a warp of up to 3 mm. If the total warp (the warp of the frame plus the warp of the
mounting surface) exceeds 4 mm then the glass in the display may experience excessive stress. To ensure that
the total warp is less than 4 mm, verify that the warp of the mounting surface is less than 1 mm.
1 Referring to the illustration below, diagonally extend string (maximum diameter φ 0.1- mm) through the bolt
mount openings. Strings should be completely free of slack.
2 Measure the clearance (L) between the strings where they cross.
Distortion is expressed by: [Distortion] = L × 2.
3 If L is found to be 0, pass the strings through the other bolt mount openings then repeat the measurements. Any
value of L greater than 0 indicates the presence of distortion. If the measured value in both cases is 0, the
distortion is negligible.
A
Mount bolt holes
Plasma Display Mount Surface (Mount Brackets)
A
Magnified view of section A
D
String
String
Point E is the center point of string
segment A-B.
Point F is the center point of string
segment C-D.
Clearance between points E and F = L
(Points E and F are shown displaced
for illustrative purposes).
F
E
L
B
C
29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installation Procedures
[507CMX : 427CMX]
3.4 Installation Procedures
3.4.1 Transportation precautions
• Once the shipping container is opened, transporting the unit in its packaging should be handled by two or more
people. To avoid injury or damage, do not lift the package by its packing bands.
• When transporting or storing the unit, always position it vertically - never horizontally. Horizontal transportation or
storage invalidates the product warranty.
• In transportation or storage of products in original packing, never stack more than three units high.
• For transportation or storage, observe the warnings and instructions on the upper face of the carton.
• The Plasma Display is made of glass. Please handle the panel carefully to prevent it from being damaged.
3.4.2 Unpacking
PDP-507CMX
The original packing material can be re-used to safely ship the Plasma Display. When repacking, it is important to use
the material in the same way as when the unit originally shipped. Failure to pack the panel correctly can damage the
Plasma Display.
1) Packing specifications; 1340 mm (W) × 900 mm (H) × 365 mm (D), 50 kg
Ref. No.
Terms
1
1
2
3
4
5
Upper Carton
Carton
Reinforce Pad
Pad
Pad
9
15
17
6
7
Mirror Mat
Power Cord
16
8
9
10
Remote Control Unit
Dry Cell Battery (R6P, AA)
Vinyl Bag’s Assembly
18
3
19
20
4
11
12
13
14
15
Wiping Cloth
Operating Instructions
Caution Sheet
Caution Sheet
Warranty Card
7
6
16
17
18
19
Warranty Card Vinyl Pouch
Vinyl Bag (S)
Speed Clamp
10
21
Binder
5
20
21
Ferrite Core (S)
Vinyl Bag
8
11
12
5
13
14
2
30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[507CMX : 427CMX]
Installation Procedures
PDP-427CMX
The original packing material can be re-used to safely ship the Plasma Display. When repacking, it is important to use
the material in the same way as when the unit originally shipped. Failure to pack the panel correctly can damage the
Plasma Display.
1) Packing specifications; 1177 mm (W) × 767 mm (H) × 354 mm (D), 38 kg
Ref. No.
Terms
1
2
3
4
5
Upper Carton
Carton
Reinforce Pad
Pad
Pad
17
1
22
24
23
6
7
8
9
10
Mirror Mat
Power Cable Case
Accessory Case
Power Cord
25
26
Remote Control Unit
3
27
11
12
13
14
15
Dry Cell Battery (R6P, AA)
Remote Control Unit Holder
Display Stand
Vinyl Bag’s Assembly
Wiping Cloth
4
12
14
18
8
16
17
18
19
20
Operating Instructions
Warranty Card Vinyl Pouch
Caution Sheet
Caution Sheet
Warranty Card
21
13
15
16
19
6
9
20
7
5
21
22
23
24
25
Vinyl Bag
Bag
Screw Set
Speed Clamp
Nylon Binder
5
5
26
27
Ferrite Core (S)
Ferrite Core (L)
10
2
11
31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installation Procedures
[507CMX : 427CMX]
2) Unpacking procedures
1 Remove the packing bands.
2 Slowly lift and remove the upper carton.
3 Lift and remove the carton cover.
4 Remove the pads.
5 Remove the accessory and power cord cases.
6 Remove the unit (requires two or more people).
3) Transportation of the unpacked unit.
If it needs to be moved, the unit should be lifted by two or more people.
Caution
• Never move the unit by dragging it along the floor.
• Move the unit slowly, taking care to prevent scraping or striking the delicate
front protective panel.
• In order to prevent adhesion of dust, remove the protective film only after
all work and preparations for the installation site, including clean-up following
unpacking, are complete.
• When moving the display, it should always be carried by two people holding
the rear handles in the manner shown.
No!
Never attempt to move the Plasma Display by holding only one of the handles.
3.4.3 Mounting on the attachment stands (PDP-427CMX only)
(See " 4.3 Installation of the Attachment Stand (pg. 78)" for instructions on permanent installation.)
Insert the stand into A and A' on the back of the main unit and anchor it with the attached washers and bolts. After
manually tightening the bolts, completely tighten them with the attached tools.
When doing this installation with the main unit on its side, align the bolts while pushing the stand.
This method should be a temporary setup pending proper installation. When installing the stand, consult “4.3 Installation
of the Attachment Stand” (pg. 78) for more information.
Placing the screen on the stands is only a temporary step before proper installation. We cannot guarantee against
damage if the display falls from someone bumping it while in the stands.
A
A'
32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[507CMX : 427CMX]
Installation Procedures
3.4.4 Re-packing (re-packing and re-shipping are not covered by the warranty)
If the unit needs to be re-packaged, observe the following guidelines.
• Refer to the unpacking instructions in section “3.4.2 Unpacking” (pg. 30 to 32). Pack the unit by reversing the
unpacking procedure. There is a front and back to the miller mat. Place the shiny film surface facing out and the
soft surface facing in towards the display glass.
• Restore all accessories to their original locations. Secure with adhesive tape to prevent damage during
transportation.
• Do not re-package and ship if the packing material is damaged.
3.4.5 Wiring
1) Connecting the power cable
• Refer to the “ Power Cord Connection ” section in the operating instructions.
• For power source specifications, refer to “3.1 Installation Site Requirements, Section 11) Power requirements”
(pg. 21) earlier in this document.
2) Connecting signal cables
• Refer to the operating instructions shipped with the unit for information on how to connect a PC or audio
device.
• Precautions when using long connecting signal cables
-- Use coaxial cables. For video signals use 3 C-2 V cables for lengths up to 15 meters and 5 C-2 V cables for
lengths up to 30 meters. Because computer signals are more likely to degrade than video signals, even if the
cable is shorter than 15 m, the use of 5 C-2 V coaxial multi-cables (5BNC) is recommended. You can also
improve signal quality by minimizing cable length.
-- Video cables plugged into video inputs and outputs close to dimmers, neon signs, air-conditioning units, or
cables for wired broadcasts may occasionally corrupt images.
3) Processing wires
• For permanent or long-term installation, please select cables of the correct length and consider the entire wiring
route. This is not as important for temporary or short-term installations such as at special events.
• Arrange and secure cables so that they are not subject to pinching or physical force. For temporary installations,
securing cables with string is adequate. For permanent installations, secure by more reliable means.
33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[507CMX : 427CMX]
Installation Procedures
4) Arranging and securing cables with speed clamps and bead bands
Fasten cables using the supplied speed clamps.
Once speed clamps are fastened, they are
not easily removed.
*
As viewed from the rear of the display.
1
2
1. Organize cables together using the provided
speed clamps.
2. Bunch separated cables together and secure them
with the provided bead bands.
Do not allow excessive stress to be placed on the
ends of cables.
Insert 1 into an appropriate hole on the rear of the
unit then snap 2 into the back of 1 to fix the clamp.
Note
Speed clamps are designed to be difficult to undo
once in place. Please attach carefully.
Cables can be routed to the right or left.
To attach the speed clamps to the main unit
Use the holes marked with the & border shown below as
needed.
*
As viewed from the rear of the display. (PDP-507CMX)
*
As viewed from the rear of the display. (PDP-427CMX)
To remove speed clamps
Using pliers, twist the clamp 90° and pull outward.
In some cases, the clamp may have deteriorated over
time. Removed speed clamps may not be re-usable.
34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[507CMX]
Special Installation (Mounting to fittings)
3.5 Special Installation (PDP-507CMX)
The unit can be hung from or embedded in a wall. However, some installations impose additional limitations on
operating temperatures and other factors.
Examine installation methods and the ambient conditions for your installation site. Refer to sections “3.1 Installation
Site Requirements” (pg. 20), ”3.2 Installation Conditions (PDP-507CMX)” (pg. 22), and “3.4 Installation Procedures”
(pg. 30) in this manual.
Measurements discussed in this manual assume the following conditions:
• A 100 % white input is supplied.
• Sufficient aging has been completed.
Make all measurements under identical conditions. The aging period required for correct measurement
is about two and a half hours, depending on the time available at the installation site.
3.5.1 Mounting to fittings
Observe the following guidelines when mounting the unit to fittings.
4 mm MAX
Notes 2 to 8 apply to all cases of mounting to fittings.
1 Remove any objects from around the panel within a distance of
300 mm.
2 Any unit deformation/warping occurring as a result of installation
should be less than 4 mm.
Maximum allowable deformation/
warping is 4 mm.
3 Never block or cover vents or other openings aside from those
shown as blocked in the illustrations on the following page.
4 The fittings should have a thickness of less than 20 mm.
(This limit does NOT apply to fitting in examples 1, 4, 6, and 7 on
Less than
20 mm
the following page.)
5 L-shaped fittings should have a thickness of less than 100 mm.
6 The strength of the fittings should be adequate to bear the weight
of the display.
(No thickness limitations in examples 2
and 4 on the following page.)
7 Take precautions to avoid sharply bending the power cable.
8 If necessary, remove the handles. When reinstalling the handles,
completely tighten the screws for safety.
Less than
20 mm
✩ Operating environment for standard installation
• Ambient Temperature: 0 °C to 40 °C (examples 1 to 4)
✩ Operating environment for vertical installation(*1)
• Ambient Temperature: 0 °C to 40 °C (vertical installation:
examples 5 to 8)
(No thickness limitations in examples 2
and 4 on the following page.)
✩ Operating temperatures for Upside-Down Installations(*1, *2)
• Ambient Temperature: 0 °C to 35 °C (examples 1 to 4)
The operating temperature restrictions for the speaker system (PDP-
S53-LR) are the same regardless of whether installation is horizontal
or vertical.
Less than
100 mm
L-shaped fitting
*1
For this installation, set the ‘FAN CONTROL’ to ‘MAX’ as shown in “5.4.3
Adjustment and Setting in the Integrator Mode 14) Cooling Fan Control
Setting (pg. 235)”.
When INPUT2 has been selected, use input compatible signal up to
*2
Arrange the power
cable so that minimum
stress is placed on it.
1280x1024 (60 Hz) at ambient temperature condition of 0 °C to 35 °C.
Note
When a video card other than PDA-5003/PDA-5004 is used, the operating
temperature conditions given above may vary. Check the video card
operating instructions for the conditions.
35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Special Installation (Mounting to fittings)
[507CMX]
Standard installation
Example 1
(In cases where top and bottom are reversed)
Example 2
35 mm or
less
35 mm or less
Example 3
Example 4
Vertical installation
Example 5
Example 6
Attach so that
the fan is on
the left side
when viewed
from the rear.
35 mm or
less
35 mm or less
Example 7
Example 8
36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[507CMX]
Special Instruction (Hanging on the wall)
3.5.2 Hanging on the wall
Carefully read the following imformation before attempting to hang the unit on a wall. Take note of the various limitations
specified in this section. Mount the unit so that twisting, bending, or any other warping does not exceed 4 mm.
Shaded areas
: Thermometer (temperature measurement point)
1222
indicate attachment points for mounting hardware.
A
50
C
D
D
Operating temperature restrictions
✩ Standard single-unit installation
Distance from wall (A)
50 mm or less
B
C
D
Ambient temperature
300 mm or more 300 mm or more 300 mm or more 0 °C to 35 °C
100 mm or more 50 mm or more 50 mm or more 0 °C to 40 °C
50 mm or more
✩ Horizontal/vertical, left/right reverse installation (Note that only Examples 2 and 3 apply in cases
where the top and bottom are reversed)
* Regardless of the distance between the Plasma Display and the wall, the unit must be installed to allow
free air flow (no obstructions within a distance of 300 mm from the unit) around the panel.
Distance from wall (A)
50 mm or more
B
C
D
Ambient temperature
300 mm or more 300 mm or more 300 mm or more 0 °C to 35°C
✩ Requirements when used with PDP-S53-LR speaker system
When installed as a single unit, all requirements are the same as those listed above for horizontal/
vertical, left/right reverse installations. However, the figures listed above indicate the distance
between the speakers and the wall.
Note
Different temperature restrictions apply to the PDK-5011 and PDK-WM01. Refer to “4.6 Tilt Mount Unit PDK-5011”
(pg. 104) and “4.7 Wall Mount Unit PDK-WM01” (pg. 110). For a wall-mount installation, allow adequate space (a
clearance of 300 mm or more) above, below, and to each side of the panel.
37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Special Installation (Hanging on the wall)
[507CMX]
Methods of Securing: Basic methods of securing the panel to a wall are shown below. Avoid blocking or covering
areas aside from those indicated by . The method indicated by a large “X” must not be
used. Before attaching the unit to fittings, double-check that the thickness and height of the
fittings and the number of fixing bolts is correct.
(Also refer to “3.5.1 Mounting to fittings” (pg. 35).)
Note
Heated air is drawn from the interior of the unit by fans. Before installation, consider the heat resistance of the wall
or other surface behind the unit. Exhaust temperatures can be 30 °C higher than the outside temperature.
Note
For wall-mounting, do not bundle the cables in a way that block vents.
Panting net
100 mm or more
300 mm or
more
100 mm or more
100 mm or more
300 mm or
more
50 mm or
more
50 mm or
more
50 mm or more
100 mm or more
100 mm or more
Ex.: Installation requirements when
installed in wall recess
Ex.: Installation when covered with a
Panting net
Flush-wall installation
(distance between unit and wall
less than 50 mm)
Wall-mounted installation
(distance between unit and wall
greater than 50 mm)
Wall-embeddedinstallation
(i.e., installation in closed space)
(distance between unit and wall
greater than 50 mm)
Requirements :
Requirements :
• Free air flow (With no obstructions
within a distance of 300 mm from
the unit’s sides, top and bottom)
• Temperature of 0 °C to 35 °C
• Free air flow (With no obstructions within
a distance of 300 mm from the unit)
around all four sides of the unit is not
necessarily required when the unit is
installed at a distance of greater than 50
millimeters away from the wall.
Requirements :
• See “3.5.3 Embedding in the wall” (pg.
39) for installation requirements.
• Temperature of 0 °C to 40 °C
* However, in such cases, the unit may not
be placed behind a glass panel or any
other obstruction which would create an
enclosed space.
• Temperature of 0 °C to 40 °C
38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[507CMX]
Special Installation (Embedding in the wall)
3.5.3 Embedding in the wall
Carefully read the following imformation before trying to embed the unit in a wall. Observe all the limitations specified
below.
Be sure to mount the unit so that twisting, bending, or other deformation of the unit does not exceed 4 mm.
(1)Embedding in walls with space provided behind the unit (no obstructions within a distance of 300 mm from the
back surface of the unit).
X (Front of the unit)
A
A
A
Y (Rear of the unit)
<Viewed from Above>
✩ Operating Temperature Restrictions
Temperature in space X and Y
0 °C to 40 °C
A: 0 mm to 370 mm
* The same operating temperature restrictions apply to the speaker system (PDP-S53-LR).
✩ Operating Temperature Restrictions for Upside-Down Installations
* Upside-down mounting is unavailable when embedding this device in a wall.
A
<Viewed from the Right Side>
Methods of Securing: Basic methods of securing are shown below. Avoid blocking or covering areas aside from those
indicated by
.
Before attaching the unit to fittings, double-check that the thickness and height of the fittings,
and the number of bolts is correct.
(Also refer to “3.5.1 Mounting to fittings” (pg. 35).)
39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Special Installation (Embedding in the wall)
[507CMX]
Temperature Measurement Points (Illustration for reference purposes)
: Thermometer (temperature measurement point)
50 mm 50 mm
• Make measurements at a distance of 50 mm from the unit without directly subjecting the thermometer to fan
exhaust.
• For spaces where temperature fluctuations are likely, gather additional measurement points for adequate data.
40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[507CMX]
Special Installation (Embedding in the wall)
(2)Embedding in walls with no space provided behind the unit.
Panting (Punching) net (numerical aperture 50 % or over)
100 mm or
more
100 mm or
more
50 mm or
more
Cation : Due to possible heat issues, we do not recommend installing the panel in narrow, enclosed areas.
✩ Operating Temperature Restrictions
• Ambient temperature: 0 °C to 40 °C
• The same operating temperature restrictions apply to the speaker system (PDP-S53-LR).
✩ Operating Temperature Restrictions for Upside-Down Installations
* Upside-down mounting is unavailable when embedding this device in a wall.
Methods of Securing: Basic methods of securing are shown below. Avoid blocking or covering areas aside from those
indicated by
. The methods indicated by a large “X” must not be used.
Before attaching the unit to fittings, double-check that the thickness and height of the fittings
and the number of bolts is correct.
(Also refer to “3.5.1 Mounting to fittings” (pg. 35).)
Installation is not possible
41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Special installation (When the display is put in a box)
[507CMX]
3.5.4 When the display is put in a box
Operating this display in confined spaces is not recommended.
• If the display is to be used in a confined space, observe the following conditions shown in the drawing below:
A ≥ 50
B ≥ 50
C ≥ 10
D ≥ 50
Use a mesh with aperture efficiency of 50 % or more.
If hot air remains in the enclosed space, the temperature may rise causing a malfunction or fire. As a precaution, the
inner wall should have sufficient heat resistance or fire resistance.
✩ Usage temperature conditions (BOX air temperature)
• Ambient temperature: 0 °C to 35 °C
Outside air temperature
measuring point
: Thermometer
(temperature measurement point)
10 mm
Exhaust side
Intake side
A ≥ 50
B ≥ 50
C ≥ 10
D ≥ 50
A
A
10 mm
C
D
Rear view (the following area should be made of mesh)
Mesh with aperture efficiency
of 50 % or more
A+
A+
50 mm
800 mm or more
50 mm
A+
50 mm
A+
50 mm
800 mm or more
42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[507CMX]
Special Installation (Ceiling suspension with wires)
3.5.5 Ceiling suspension (with wires)
When suspending with wire, attach the unit either at rows A and B or at rows C and D to keep it from warping. In
addition, the unit must be attached at four or more points, with these points distributed symmetrically on opposite
sides of the vertical and horizontal center lines.
A
B
Attach so that the fan is on the left
side when viewed from the rear.
C
D
C
D
B
A
When suspending from a ceiling with wire, use the brackets shown below to prevent concentrating loads on the upper
two fixing points.
For additional safety, secure the wires to separate fittings or parts of the ceiling.
Use mounting screws of material stronger than soft steel and use hexagonal bolts.
Use wires adequate for the combined weight of the panel and the weight of the support brackets.
No!
When installing the Plasma Display, DO NOT use the handles as means of hanging the display.
Wires
Wires
Screws
Screws
Brackets
Brackets
✩ Operating environment for standard installation
• Ambient Temperature: 0 °C to 40 °C
✩ Operating environment for vertical installation(*1)
• Ambient Temperature: 0 °C to 40 °C
✩ Operating temperatures for Upside-Down Installations(*1, *2)
• Ambient Temperature: 0 °C to 35 °C
*1
For this installation, set the ‘FAN CONTROL’ to ‘MAX’ as shown in “5.4.3 Adjustment and Setting in the Integrator Mode 14)
Cooling Fan Control Setting” (pg. 235).
When INPUT2 has been selected, use input compatible signal up to 1280x1024 (60 Hz) at ambient temperature condition of 0 °C
*2
to 35 °C.
43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Special Installation (Ceiling suspension with wires)
[507CMX]
Methods of Securing: Basic methods of securing are shown below. Avoid blocking or covering areas aside from those
indicated by . The methods indicated by a large “X” must not be used.
Before attaching the unit to fittings, double-check that the thickness and height of the fittings,
and the number of bolts is correct.
(Also refer to “3.5.1 Mounting to fittings” (pg. 35).)
Vertical suspension
Attach so that the fan is
on the left side when
viewed from the rear.
Installation is not possible
Installation is not possible
44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[507CMX]
Special Installation (Hanging on the wall lengthwise)
3.5.6 Hanging on the wall lengthwise
Carefully read the following imformation before attempting to mount the unit on the wall. Observe the various limitations
specified below.
Be sure to mount the unit so that twisting, bending, or any other deformation does not exceed 4 mm.
Shaded areas
indicate attachment points for mounting hardware.
: Thermometer (temperature measurement point)
Attach so that the fan is on the left
side when viewed from the rear.
Avoid blocking or
covering this area
on the upper and
lower sides.
21.6
93.4
10
D
D
736
10
A
(*1)
✩
Operating Temperature Restrictions
Distance from wall (A)
50 mm or more
B
C
D
Ambient temperature
100 mm or more 50 mm or more
50 mm or more 0 °C to 35 °C
*1
For this installation, set the ‘FAN CONTROL’ to ‘MAX’ as shown in “5.4.3 Adjustment and Setting in the Integrator
Mode 14) Cooling Fan Control Setting” (pg. 235).
45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Special Installation (Hanging on the wall lengthwise)
[507CMX]
Methods of Securing: Basic methods of securing are shown below. Avoid blocking or covering areas aside from those
indicated by . The method indicated by a large “X” must not be used.
Before attaching the unit to fittings, double-check that the thickness and height of the fittings
and the number of bolts is correct.
(Also refer to “3.5.1 Mounting to fittings” (pg. 35).)
Installation is not possible
Installation is not possible
Note
Heat air is drawn from the interior of the unit by fans. Before installation, consider the heat resistance of the wall or
other surface behind the unit. Exhaust temperatures can be 30 °C higher than the outside temperature.
Note
For wall-mounting, do not bundle the cables in a way that block vents.
46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[507CMX]
Special Installation (Place product upright and flush, embedded in the wall)
3.5.7 Place product upright and flush into wall (embedding in the wall)
Carefully read the following instructions before trying to embed the unit in a wall. Observe all the limitations specified
below.
Be sure to mount the unit so that twisting, bending, or other deformation of the unit does not exceed 4 mm.
(1)Embedding in walls with space provided behind the unit (with no obstructions within a distance of 300 mm
from the back surface of the unit)
A
A
X (Front of the unit)
A
Y (Rear of the unit)
<Viewed from Above>
A
<Viewed from the Right Side>
✩ Operating Temperature Restrictions(*1)
Temperature in space X and Y
A: 0 mm to 370 mm
0 °C to 40 °C
*1
For this installation, set the ‘FAN CONTROL’ to ‘MAX’ as shown in “5.4.3 Adjustment and Setting in the Integrator Mode 14)
Cooling Fan Control Setting” (pg. 235).
47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[507CMX]
Special Installation (Place product upright and flush, embedded in the wall)
Methods of Securing: Basic methods of securing are shown below. Avoid blocking or covering areas aside from those
indicated by . The methods indicated by a large “X” must not be used.
Before attaching the unit to fittings, double-check that the thickness and height of the fittings
and the number of fixing bolts is correct.
(Also refer to “3.5.1 Mounting to fittings” (pg. 35).)
Attach so that the fan is
on the left side when
viewed from the rear.
Installation is not possible
Installation is not possible
48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[507CMX]
Special Installation (Place product upright and flush, embedded in the wall)
(2)Embedding in walls with no space provided behind the unit
100 mm or
more
100 mm or
more
Attach so that the
fan is on the left
side when viewed
from the rear.
Panting (Punching) net
(numerical aperture 50 %
or over)
50 mm or
more
Cation : Due to possible heat issues, we do not recommend installing the panel in narrow, enclosed areas.
✩ Operating Temperature Restrictions(*1)
• Ambient temperature: 0 °C to 35 °C
*1
For this installation, set the ‘FAN CONTROL’ to ‘MAX’ as shown in “5.4.3 Adjustment and Setting in the Integrator Mode 14)
Cooling Fan Control Setting” (pg. 235).
49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[507CMX]
Special Installation (Place product upright and flush, embedded in the wall)
Methods of Securing: Basic methods of securing are shown below. Avoid blocking or covering areas aside from those
indicated by . The methods indicated by a large “X” must not be used.
Before attaching the unit to fittings, double-check that the thickness and height of the fittings
and the number of bolts is correct.
(Also refer to “3.5.1 Mounting to fittings” (pg. 35).)
Attach so that the fan is
on the left side when
viewed from the rear.
Installation is not possible
Installation is not possible
50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Special Installation (Installed facing upward)
[507CMX]
3.5.8 Installed facing upward
(1) When installed on top of a horizontal surface <an open space other than a horizontal surface>
50 mm or more
Horizontal surface
✩ Operating Temperature Restrictions(*1)
• Ambient temperature: 0 °C to 35 °C
• The same operating temperature restrictions apply to the speaker system (PDP-S53-LR).
*1
For this installation, set the ‘FAN CONTROL’ to ‘MAX’ as shown in “5.4.3 Adjustment and Setting in the Integrator Mode 14)
Cooling Fan Control Setting” (pg. 235).
Methods of Securing: Basic methods of securing are shown below. Avoid blocking or covering areas aside from those
indicated by
. The methods indicated by a large “X” must not be used.
Before attaching the unit to fittings, double-check that the thickness and height of the fittings
and the number of bolts is correct.
(Also refer to “3.5.1 Mounting to fittings” (pg. 35).)
Installation is not possible
51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[507CMX]
Special installation (Installed facing upward)
(2) When the Plasma Display is in a confined space
Operating this display in confined spaces is not recommended.
• If the display is to be used in confined spaces, observe the following conditions shown in the drawing below:
A ≥ 50
• If heat remains in the enclosed space, the temperature may rise causing a malfunction or fire. As a precaution, the
inner wall should have sufficient heat resistance or fire resistance.
• Leave a space at least 10 mm wide when installing glass etc. on the front of the Plasma Display.
✩ Usage temperature conditions(*1)
• Ambient temperature: 0 °C to 35 °C (Outside air temperature)
• Space enclosed by the back surface of the Plasma Display: 0 °C to 35 °C (Use a fan etc. to discharge air to
maintain this temperature range.)
*1
For this installation, set the ‘FAN CONTROL’ to ‘MAX’ as shown in “5.4.3 Adjustment and Setting in the Integrator Mode 14)
Cooling Fan Control Setting” (pg. 235).
: Thermometer (temperature measurement point)
Outside air
temperature
measuring point
Enclosed space air
temperature measuring
point
10 mm
A
Outside air temperature
measuring point
A ≥ 50
50 mm
Enclosed space air temperature
measuring point
Note
When installing the Plasma Display facing upwards, do not place anything on top of it nor apply any load on it from
above.
52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[507CMX]
Special installation (Horizontal connections)
3.5.9 Horizontal connections
While the display is designed to accommodate side-by-side installations, keep in mind that specific installation
configurations may affect ventilation. Observe the following requirements:
1 Installation of up to two units (Horizontal connection)
The following table lists the operating temperature conditions when installing more than one panel. Use the units
under conditions that keep the outside atmosphere in this range.
A
Unit A
Unit B
✩ Operating Temperature Restrictions
Distance from wall (A) Ambient temperature
50 mm or more
0 °C to 40 °C
2 Installing three or more units (Horizontal connection)
The following table lists the operating temperature conditions. Use the units under conditions that keep the
outside atmosphere in this range.
A
Unit A
Unit B
Unit C
✩ Operating Temperature Restrictions
Distance from wall (A) Ambient temperature
50 mm or more
0 °C to 40 °C
53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[507CMX]
Special installation (Multiple)
3.5.10 Multiple
While the display is designed to accommodate side-by-side installations, keep in mind that specific installation
configurations may affect ventilation. Observe the following requirements:
1 Installing multiple (Two vertical units)
The following table lists the operating temperature conditions when installing more than one panel. Use the units
under conditions that keep the outside atmosphere in this range.
A
Partition
Unit A
Unit B
Unit C
In case of lateral connections, ensure that left and right partitions are provided.
To prevent heat venting from one video wall plasma panel into another panel, each display must
be oriented in the same direction.
In the above example, each panel is shown with the Pioneer logo at the bottom.
✩ Operating Temperature Restrictions
Distance from wall (A)
Ambient temperature
50 mm to 300 mm or less 0 °C to 35 °C
300 mm or more
0 °C to 40 °C
54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[427CMX]
Special Installation (Mounting to fittings)
3.6 Special Installation (PDP-427CMX)
The unit can be hung from or embedded in a wall. However, some installations impose additional limitations on
operating temperatures and other factors.
Examine installation methods and the ambient conditions for your installation site. Refer to sections “3.1 Installation
Site Requirements” (pg. 20), ”3.3 Installation Conditions (PDP-427CMX)” (pg. 26), and “3.4 Installation Procedures”
(pg. 30) in this manual.
Measurements discussed in this manual assume the following conditions:
• A 100 % white input is supplied.
• Sufficient aging has been completed.
Make all measurements under identical conditions. The aging period required for correct measurement
is about two and a half hours, depending on the time available at the installation site.
3.6.1 Mounting to fittings
Observe the following guidelines when mounting the unit to fittings.
4 mm MAX
Notes 2 to 8 apply to all cases of mounting to fittings.
1 Remove any objects from around the panel within a distance of
300 mm.
2 Any unit deformation/warping occurring as a result of installation
should be less than 4 mm.
Maximum allowable deformation/
warping is 4 mm.
3 Never block or cover vents or other openings aside from those
shown as blocked in the illustrations on the following page.
4 The fittings should have a thickness of less than 20 mm.
(This limit does NOT apply to fitting in examples 1, 3, 5, and 6 on
Less than
20 mm
the following page.)
5 L-shaped fittings should have a thickness of less than 100 mm.
6 The strength of the fittings should be adequate to bear the weight
of the display.
(No thickness limitations in examples 2
and 4 on the following page.)
7 Take precautions to avoid sharply bending the power cable.
8 If necessary, remove the handles. When reinstalling the handles,
completely tighten the screws for safety.
Less than
20 mm
✩ Operating environment for standard installation
• Ambient Temperature: 0 °C to 40 °C (examples 1 to 3)
✩ Operating environment for vertical installation(*1, *2)
• Ambient Temperature: 0 °C to 40 °C (vertical installation:
examples 4 to 6)
(No thickness limitations in examples 2
and 4 on the following page.)
✩ Operating temperatures for Upside-Down Installations(*1, *2)
• Ambient Temperature: 0 °C to 40 °C (examples 1 to 3)
The operating temperature restrictions for the speaker system (PDP-
S56-LR) are the same regardless of whether installation is horizontal
or vertical.
Less than
100 mm
L-shaped fitting
*1
For this installation, set the ‘FAN CONTROL’ to ‘MAX’ as shown in “5.4.3
Adjustment and Setting in the Integrator Mode 14) Cooling Fan Control
Setting (pg. 235)”.
When INPUT2 has been selected, use input compatible signal up to
*2
Arrange the power
cable so that minimum
stress is placed on it.
1280x1024 (60 Hz) at ambient temperature condition of 0 °C to 35 °C.
Note
When a video card other than PDA-5003/PDA-5004 is used, the operating
temperature conditions given above may vary. Check the video card
operating instructions for the conditions.
55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Special Installation (Mounting to fittings)
[427CMX]
Standard installation
Example 1
(In cases where top and bottom are reversed)
35 mm or
less
35 mm or
less
Example 2
Example 3
Vertical installation
Example 4
Example 5
35 mm or
less
Attach so that
the fan is on
the left side
when viewed
from the rear.
35 mm or
less
Example 6
56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[427CMX]
Special Instruction (Hanging on the wall)
3.6.2 Hanging on the wall
Carefully read the following imformation before attempting to hang the unit on a wall. Take note of the various limitations
specified in this section. Mount the unit so that twisting, bending, or any other warping does not exceed 4 mm.
Shaded areas
: Thermometer (temperature measurement point)
1022
indicate attachment points for mounting hardware.
A
50
C
D
D
Operating temperature restrictions
✩ Standard single-unit installation
Distance from wall (A)
50 mm or less
B
C
D
Ambient temperature
300 mm or more 300 mm or more 300 mm or more 0 °C to 35 °C
100 mm or more 50 mm or more 50 mm or more 0 °C to 40 °C
50 mm or more
✩ Horizontal/vertical, left/right reverse installation (Note that only Examples 2 and 3 apply in cases
where the top and bottom are reversed)
* Regardless of the distance between the Plasma Display and the wall, the unit must be installed to allow
free air flow (no obstructions within a distance of 300 mm from the unit) around the panel.
Distance from wall (A)
50 mm or more
B
C
D
Ambient temperature
300 mm or more 300 mm or more 300 mm or more 0 °C to 35°C
✩ Requirements when used with PDP-S56-LR speaker system
When installed as a single unit, all requirements are the same as those listed above for horizontal/
vertical, left/right reverse installations. However, the figures listed above indicate the distance
between the speakers and the wall.
Note
Different temperature restrictions apply to the PDK-5011 and PDK-WM01. Refer to “4.6 Tilt Mount Unit” (pg. 104) and
“4.7 Wall Mount Unit” (pg. 110). For a wall-mount installation, allow adequate space (a clearance of 300 mm or more)
above, below, and to each side of the panel.
57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Special Installation (Hanging on the wall)
[427CMX]
Methods of Securing: Basic methods of securing the panel to a wall are shown below. Avoid blocking or covering
areas aside from those indicated by . The method indicated by a large “X” must not be
used. Before attaching the unit to fittings, double-check that the thickness and height of the
fittings and the number of fixing bolts is correct.
(Also refer to “3.6.1 Mounting to fittings” (pg. 55).)
Note
Heated air is drawn from the interior of the unit by fans. Before installation, consider the heat resistance of the wall
or other surface behind the unit. Exhaust temperatures can be 30 °C higher than the outside temperature.
Note
For wall-mounting, do not bundle the cables in a way that block vents.
Panting net
100 mm or more
300 mm or
more
100 mm or more
100 mm or more
300 mm or
more
50 mm or
more
50 mm or
more
50 mm or more
100 mm or more
100 mm or more
Ex.: Installation requirements when
installed in wall recess
Ex.: Installation when covered with a
Panting net
Flush-wall installation
(distance between unit and wall
less than 50 mm)
Wall-mounted installation
(distance between unit and wall
greater than 50 mm)
Wall-embeddedinstallation
(i.e., installation in closed space)
(distance between unit and wall
greater than 50 mm)
Requirements :
Requirements :
• Free air flow (With no obstructions
within a distance of 300 mm from
the unit’s sides, top and bottom)
• Temperature of 0 °C to 35 °C
• Free air flow (With no obstructions within
a distance of 300 mm from the unit)
around all four sides of the unit is not
necessarily required when the unit is
installed at a distance of greater than 50
millimeters away from the wall.
Requirements :
• See “3.6.3 Embedding in the wall” (pg.
59) for installation requirements.
• Temperature of 0 °C to 40 °C
* However, in such cases, the unit may not
be placed behind a glass panel or any
other obstruction which would create an
enclosed space.
• Temperature of 0 °C to 40 °C
58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[427CMX]
Special Installation (Embedding in the wall)
3.6.3 Embedding in the wall
Carefully read the following imformation before trying to embed the unit in a wall. Observe all the limitations specified
below.
Be sure to mount the unit so that twisting, bending, or other deformation of the unit does not exceed 4 mm.
(1)Embedding in walls with space provided behind the unit (no obstructions within a distance of 300 mm from the
back surface of the unit).
X (Front of the unit)
A
A
A
Y (Rear of the unit)
<Viewed from Above>
✩ Operating Temperature Restrictions
Temperature in space X and Y
0 °C to 40 °C
A: 0 mm to 370 mm
* The same operating temperature restrictions apply to the speaker system (PDP-S56-LR).
✩ Operating Temperature Restrictions for Upside-Down Installations
* Upside-down mounting is unavailable when embedding this device in a wall.
A
<Viewed from the Right Side>
Methods of Securing: Basic methods of securing are shown below. Avoid blocking or covering areas aside from those
indicated by
. The methods indicated by a large “X” must not be used.
Before attaching the unit to fittings, double-check that the thickness and height of the fittings,
and the number of bolts is correct.
(Also refer to “3.6.1 Mounting to fittings” (pg. 55).)
59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Special Installation (Embedding in the wall)
[427CMX]
Temperature Measurement Points (Illustration for reference purposes)
: Thermometer (temperature measurement point)
50 mm 50 mm
• Make measurements at a distance of 50 mm from the unit without directly subjecting the thermometer to fan
exhaust.
• For spaces where temperature fluctuations are likely, gather additional measurement points for adequate data.
60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[427CMX]
Special Installation (Embedding in the wall)
(2)Embedding in walls with no space provided behind the unit.
Panting (Punching) net (numerical aperture 50 % or over)
100 mm or
more
100 mm or
more
50 mm or
more
Cation : Due to possible heat issues, we do not recommend installing the panel in narrow, enclosed areas.
✩ Operating Temperature Restrictions
• Ambient temperature: 0 °C to 40 °C
• The same operating temperature restrictions apply to the speaker system (PDP-S56-LR).
✩ Operating Temperature Restrictions for Upside-Down Installations
* Upside-down mounting is unavailable when embedding this device in a wall.
Methods of Securing: Basic methods of securing are shown below. Avoid blocking or covering areas aside from those
indicated by
. The methods indicated by a large “X” must not be used.
Before attaching the unit to fittings, double-check that the thickness and height of the fittings
and the number of bolts is correct.
(Also refer to “3.6.1 Mounting to fittings” (pg. 55).)
Installation is not possible
61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Special installation (When the display is put in a box)
[427CMX]
3.6.4 When the display is put in a box
Operating this display in confined spaces is not recommended.
• If the display is to be used in a confined space, observe the following conditions shown in the drawing below:
A ≥ 50
B ≥ 50
C ≥ 10
D ≥ 50
Use a mesh with aperture efficiency of 50 % or more.
If hot air remains in the enclosed space, the temperature may rise causing a malfunction or fire. As a precaution, the
inner wall should have sufficient heat resistance or fire resistance.
✩ Usage temperature conditions (BOX air temperature)
• Ambient temperature: 0 °C to 35 °C
Outside air temperature
measuring point
: Thermometer
(temperature measurement point)
10 mm
Exhaust side
Intake side
A ≥ 50
B ≥ 50
C ≥ 10
D ≥ 50
A
A
10 mm
C
D
Rear view (the following area should be made of mesh)
Mesh with aperture efficiency
of 50 % or more
A+
A+
50 mm
800 mm or more
50 mm
A+
50 mm
A+
50 mm
800 mm or more
62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[427CMX]
Special Installation (Ceiling suspension with wires)
3.6.5 Ceiling suspension (with wires)
When suspending with wire, attach the unit either at rows A and B or at rows C and D to keep it from warping. In
addition, the unit must be attached at four or more points, with these points distributed symmetrically on opposite
sides of the vertical and horizontal center lines.
Attach so that the fan is on the left
side when viewed from the rear.
C
D
C
D
B
A
When suspending from a ceiling with wire, use the brackets shown below to prevent concentrating loads on the upper
two fixing points.
For additional safety, secure the wires to separate fittings or parts of the ceiling.
Use mounting screws of material stronger than soft steel and use hexagonal bolts.
Use wires adequate for the combined weight of the panel and the weight of the support brackets.
No!
When installing the Plasma Display, DO NOT use the handles as means of hanging the display.
Wires
Wires
Screws
Screws
Brackets
Brackets
✩ Operating environment for standard installation
• Ambient Temperature: 0 °C to 40 °C
✩ Operating environment for vertical installation(*1, *2)
• Ambient Temperature: 0 °C to 40 °C
✩ Operating temperatures for Upside-Down Installations(*1, *2)
• Ambient Temperature: 0 °C to 40 °
*1
For this installation, set the ‘FAN CONTROL’ to ‘MAX’ as shown in “5.4.3 Adjustment and Setting in the Integrator Mode 14)
Cooling Fan Control Setting” (pg. 235).
When INPUT2 has been selected, use input compatible signal up to 1280x1024 (60 Hz) at ambient temperature condition of 0 °C
*2
to 35 °C.
63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Special Installation (Ceiling suspension with wires)
[427CMX]
Methods of Securing: Basic methods of securing are shown below. Avoid blocking or covering areas aside from those
indicated by . The methods indicated by a large “X” must not be used.
Before attaching the unit to fittings, double-check that the thickness and height of the fittings,
and the number of bolts is correct.
(Also refer to “3.6.1 Mounting to fittings” (pg. 55).)
Vertical suspension
Attach so that the fan is
on the left side when
viewed from the rear.
Installation is not possible
Installation is not possible
64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[427CMX]
Special Installation (Hanging on the wall lengthwise)
3.6.6 Hanging on the wall lengthwise
Carefully read the following imformation before attempting to mount the unit on the wall. Observe the various limitations
specified below.
Be sure to mount the unit so that twisting, bending, or any other deformation does not exceed 4 mm.
Shaded areas
indicate attachment points for mounting hardware.
: Thermometer (temperature measurement point)
Attach so that the fan is on the left
side when viewed from the rear.
Avoid blocking or
covering this area
on the upper and
lower sides.
21.6
93.4
10
D
D
610
10
A
(*1, *2)
✩
Operating Temperature Restrictions
Distance from wall (A)
50 mm or more
B
C
D
Ambient temperature
100 mm or more 50 mm or more
50 mm or more 0 °C to 35 °C
*1
*2
For this installation, set the ‘FAN CONTROL’ to ‘MAX’ as shown in “5.4.3 Adjustment and Setting in the Integrator
Mode 14) Cooling Fan Control Setting” (pg. 235).
When INPUT2 has been selected, use input compatible signal up to 1280x1024 (60 Hz) at ambient temperature
condition of 0 °C to 35 °C.
65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Special Installation (Hanging on the wall lengthwise)
[427CMX]
Methods of Securing: Basic methods of securing are shown below. Avoid blocking or covering areas aside from those
indicated by . The method indicated by a large “X” must not be used.
Before attaching the unit to fittings, double-check that the thickness and height of the fittings
and the number of bolts is correct.
(Also refer to “3.6.1 Mounting to fittings” (pg. 55).)
Installation is not possible
Installation is not possible
Note
Heat air is drawn from the interior of the unit by fans. Before installation, consider the heat resistance of the wall or
other surface behind the unit. Exhaust temperatures can be 30 °C higher than the outside temperature.
Note
For wall-mounting, do not bundle the cables in a way that block vents.
66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[427CMX]
Special Installation (Place product upright and flush, embedded in the wall)
3.6.7 Place product upright and flush into wall (embedding in the wall)
Carefully read the following instructions before trying to embed the unit in a wall. Observe all the limitations specified
below.
Be sure to mount the unit so that twisting, bending, or other deformation of the unit does not exceed 4 mm.
(1)Embedding in walls with space provided behind the unit (with no obstructions within a distance of 300 mm
from the back surface of the unit)
A
A
X (Front of the unit)
A
Y (Rear of the unit)
<Viewed from Above>
A
<Viewed from the Right Side>
✩ Operating Temperature Restrictions(*1, *2)
Temperature in space X and Y
A: 0 mm to 370 mm
0 °C to 40 °C
*1
*2
For this installation, set the ‘FAN CONTROL’ to ‘MAX’ as shown in “5.4.3 Adjustment and Setting in the Integrator Mode 14)
Cooling Fan Control Setting” (pg. 235).
When INPUT2 has been selected, use input compatible signal up to 1280x1024 (60 Hz) at ambient temperature condition of
0 °C to 35 °C.
67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[427CMX]
Special Installation (Place product upright and flush, embedded in the wall)
Methods of Securing: Basic methods of securing are shown below. Avoid blocking or covering areas aside from those
indicated by . The methods indicated by a large “X” must not be used.
Before attaching the unit to fittings, double-check that the thickness and height of the fittings
and the number of fixing bolts is correct.
(Also refer to “3.6.1 Mounting to fittings” (pg. 55).)
Attach so that the fan is
on the left side when
viewed from the rear.
Installation is not possible
Installation is not possible
68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[427CMX]
Special Installation (Place product upright and flush, embedded in the wall)
(2)Embedding in walls with no space provided behind the unit
100 mm or
more
100 mm or
more
Attach so that the
fan is on the left
side when viewed
from the rear.
Panting (Punching) net
(numerical aperture 50 %
or over)
50 mm or
more
Cation : Due to possible heat issues, we do not recommend installing the panel in narrow, enclosed areas.
✩ Operating Temperature Restrictions(*1, *2)
• Ambient temperature: 0 °C to 35 °C
*1
For this installation, set the ‘FAN CONTROL’ to ‘MAX’ as shown in “5.4.3 Adjustment and Setting in the Integrator Mode 14)
Cooling Fan Control Setting” (pg. 235).
When INPUT2 has been selected, use input compatible signal up to 1280x1024 (60 Hz) at ambient temperature condition of 0 °C
*2
to 35 °C.
69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[427CMX]
Special Installation (Place product upright and flush, embedded in the wall)
Methods of Securing: Basic methods of securing are shown below. Avoid blocking or covering areas aside from those
indicated by . The methods indicated by a large “X” must not be used.
Before attaching the unit to fittings, double-check that the thickness and height of the fittings
and the number of bolts is correct.
(Also refer to “3.6.1 Mounting to fittings” (pg. 55).)
Attach so that the fan is
on the left side when
viewed from the rear.
Installation is not possible
Installation is not possible
70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Special Installation (Installed facing upward)
[427CMX]
3.6.8 Installed facing upward
(1) When installed on top of a horizontal surface <an open space other than a horizontal surface>
50 mm or more
Horizontal surface
✩ Operating Temperature Restrictions(*1)
• Ambient temperature: 0 °C to 35 °C
• The same operating temperature restrictions apply to the speaker system (PDP-S56-LR).
*1
For this installation, set the ‘FAN CONTROL’ to ‘MAX’ as shown in “5.4.3 Adjustment and Setting in the Integrator Mode 14)
Cooling Fan Control Setting” (pg. 235).
Methods of Securing: Basic methods of securing are shown below. Avoid blocking or covering areas aside from those
indicated by
. The methods indicated by a large “X” must not be used.
Before attaching the unit to fittings, double-check that the thickness and height of the fittings
and the number of bolts is correct.
(Also refer to “3.6.1 Mounting to fittings” (pg. 55).)
71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[427CMX]
Special installation (Installed facing upward)
(2) When the Plasma Display is in a confined space
Operating this display in confined spaces is not recommended.
• If the display is to be used in confined spaces, observe the following conditions shown in the drawing below:
A ≥ 50
• If heat remains in the enclosed space, the temperature may rise causing a malfunction or fire. As a precaution, the
inner wall should have sufficient heat resistance or fire resistance.
• Leave a space at least 10 mm wide when installing glass etc. on the front of the Plasma Display.
✩ Usage temperature conditions(*1)
• Ambient temperature: 0 °C to 35 °C (Outside air temperature)
• Space enclosed by the back surface of the Plasma Display: 0 °C to 35 °C (Use a fan etc. to discharge air to
maintain this temperature range.)
*1
For this installation, set the ‘FAN CONTROL’ to ‘MAX’ as shown in “5.4.3 Adjustment and Setting in the Integrator Mode 14)
Cooling Fan Control Setting” (pg. 235).
: Thermometer (temperature measurement point)
Outside air
Enclosed space air
temperature
temperature measuring
measuring point
point
10 mm
A
Outside air temperature
measuring point
A ≥ 50
50 mm
Enclosed space air temperature
measuring point
Note
When installing the Plasma Display facing upwards, do not place anything on top of it nor apply any load on it from
above.
72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[427CMX]
Special installation (Horizontal connections)
3.6.9 Horizontal connections
While the display is designed to accommodate side-by-side installations, keep in mind that specific installation
configurations may affect ventilation. Observe the following requirements:
1 Installation of up to two units (Horizontal connection)
The following table lists the operating temperature conditions when installing more than one panel. Use the units
under conditions that keep the outside atmosphere in this range.
A
Unit A
Unit B
✩ Operating Temperature Restrictions
Distance from wall (A) Ambient temperature
50 mm or more
0 °C to 40 °C
2 Installing three or more units (Horizontal connection)
The following table lists the operating temperature conditions. Use the units under conditions that keep the
outside atmosphere in this range.
A
Partition
Unit A
Unit B
Unit C
✩ Operating Temperature Restrictions
Distance from wall (A) Ambient temperature
50 mm or more
0 °C to 40 °C
73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[427CMX]
Special installation (Multiple)
3.6.10 Multiple
While the display is designed to accommodate side-by-side installations, keep in mind that specific installation
configurations may affect ventilation. Observe the following requirements:
1 Installing multiple (2 Vertical units)
The following table lists the operating temperature conditions when installing more than one panel. Use the units
under conditions that keep the outside atmosphere in this range.
A
Partition
Unit A
Unit B
Unit C
In case of lateral connections, ensure that left and right partitions are provided.
To prevent heat venting from one video wall plasma panel into another panel, each display must
be oriented in the same direction.
In the above example, each panel is shown with the Pioneer logo at the bottom.
✩ Operating Temperature Restrictions
Distance from wall (A)
Ambient temperature
50 mm to 300 mm or less 0 °C to 35 °C
300 mm or more
0 °C to 40 °C
74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[427CMX]
Special installation
75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[507CMX : 427CMX]
How to use the standard mounting components
4.1 Standard Mounting Components Features and Characteristics
In addition to reliability and vivid display resulting from its large screen area, brightness, and image quality, the Plasma
Display (PDP-507CMX/PDP-427CMX) is thin and lightweight. This panel can be mounted in locations not possible for
conventional displays.
We considered various mounting patterns and operating conditions during the design of the Plasma Display (PDP-
507CMX/PDP-427CMX). A wide range of standard mounting hardware is available for easy mounting.
¶ Video Card: PDA-5003/PDA-5004
The video card makes video input and analog RGB input possible.
This product has a total of three lines: a COMPOSITE (1), S INPUT (1), and an analog RGB INPUT or COMPONENT
INPUT (1). Furthermore, it can handle three-line or two-line audio, thus increasing the uses for video presentations.
¶ Table Top Stand: PDK-TS07
This on-board support designed for the Plasma Display enables vertical placement of the unit.
¶ Tilt Mount Unit: PDK-5011
This mount permits tilting of the display downward from the horizontal by up to 25 degrees. Mount depth is 145 mm
or less (in vertical position, without optional speaker). This hardware permits a wide range of viewing angles.
¶ Wall Mount Unit: PDK-WM01
Distance from the rear surface of the Plasma Display to the wall is 32 mm.
This mount provides installation holes for various wall-mounting arrangements. The mount is constructed so that it
can be easily attached to the main unit.
¶ Ceiling Mount Unit: PDK-5012
Simple rod-type mounting hardware permits display panning over a range of 45 degrees and up to 25-degree downward
tilting from the horizontal. This hardware enables installation of the unit in a wide variety of locations.
¶ Mobile Cart: PDK-5014
This is an extremely stable movable stand that one person can use to freely move the Plasma Display.
It can also be used to adjust the screen height and the screen angle to match the line of sight.
¶ PDP Bracket: PDK-5005 (Can be used only with the PDP-507CMX)
Can be used as a handle when moving the unit, or as a frame when wire-suspending it or hanging it on the wall. Most
suitable for temporary use when quick, easy, and safe attachment is necessary.
¶ Speaker System:PDP-S53-LR (Can be used only with the PDP-507CMX)
Speaker System:PDP-S56-LR (Can be used only with the PDP-427CMX)
Two way speakers feature 5 cm (2 in.) tweeter and 8 cm (3-3/16 in.) woofer in a vertical arrangement.
76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Handling the Standard Mounting Components
[507CMX : 427CMX]
4.2 Handling the Standard Mounting Components
4.2.1 Handling precautions
This section of the manual discusses ways to mount, install, and handle the mounting hardware exclusively designed
for Pioneer Plasma Displays. Mounting should be performed by qualified experts.
Refer all installation and mounting work to qualified installers, or request assistance from a Pioneer dealer.
4.2.2 Precautions for installation contractors
1) Before installation
Observe the specifications supplied in “3.1 Installation Site Requirements” earlier in this manual.
2) During Installation
Carefully read and observe the contents of this section of the manual.
The installation work should be performed by two or more people.
3) After installation
After installation the mounting hardware, check for adequate strength and properly tightened screws. Repeat this
inspection after mounting the display.
4) Delivering to the customer
(1)Explaining mounting precautions
The mounting contractor is responsible for explaining the following precautions to the customer after mounting
and installation work is complete. Even if the particulars of an installation are letter-perfect, your work may be
perceived as inadequate unless you patiently and thoroughly explain these precautions to the customer.
¶ The following are highly dangerous and must be avoided at all times:
• Any sudden application of force, including pushing and pulling
• Splashing water on the unit
• Placing any object on the unit
• Touching mount screws and other mounting hardware
¶ For worry-free use of the unit:
• If problem arises, the user should immediately ask the installation contractor to inspect the unit and make
repairs if necessary.
• To guard against accidents, ask the customer avoid making tilt or height adjustments. Changes should be
referred to the installation contractor.
(2)Mounting contractor contact form
As the mounting and installation contractor, please complete the contractor contact form supplied with the unit
and give it to the end-user after post-installation inspections are complete.
(3)Periodic inspections
Over time, aging of various components of the suspension/mounting hardware that may not be readily visible can
render the installation unreliable. This may lead to the display breaking free of its mounting. Please recommend
periodic inspections.
77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installation of the Attachment Stand
[427CMX]
3 Tighten the bolt against the washer so as to secure
the unit.
4.3 Installation of the Attachment Stand
(Can be used only with the PDP-427CMX)
After manually tightening the bolts, completely tighten
them with the attached tools.
Be sure to fix the supplied stands to the installation surface.
Use commercially available M8 bolts that are 25 mm
longer than the thickness of the installation surface.
1 Fix the supplied stands to the installation surface at
each of the 4 prepared holes using commercially
available M8 bolts.
Front
Use a 6 mm hexagonal
wrench to tighten the bolt.
517 mm
(Bolt hole thread pitch)
Rear
The unit weights 30 kg. or more.
Its thinness makes it unstable. Therefore,
110 mm
CAUTION
it should be unpacked, carried, and
installed by two or more people.
Always install the supplied display stands
according to the dimensions shown in
the accompanying illustration.
2 Insert the unit into the stand.
78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installation of the Attachment Stand
[427CMX]
Dimensions
(Unit: mm)
252.4
447.2
1022
70
300
110
66.8
R12
ø24
79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Video Card: PDA-5003/PDA-5004
[507CMX : 427CMX]
4.4 Video Card: PDA-5003/PDA-5004
4.4.1 Specifications
External dimensions................. PDA-5003: 301.5 mm (W) × 27.6 mm (H) × 148.9 mm (D)
(11-7/8 in. (W) × 1-3/32 in. (H) × 5-7/8 in. (D))
PDA-5004: 301.5 mm (W) × 27.6 mm (H) × 148.3 mm (D)
(11-7/8 in. (W) × 1-3/32 in. (H) × 5-27/32 in. (D))
Weight ....................................... 0.4 kg (14 oz)
Dimensions of packaging......... 359 mm (W) × 68 mm (H) × 234 mm (D)
(14-1/8 in. (W) × 2-11/16 in. (H) × 9-7/32 in. (D))
Package weight......................... 1.4 kg (3.1 lbs.)
Input/Output jacks
7 PDA-5003
Video-related
INPUT1
Input
The following signal is supported only when a PDA-5003 is installed.
• Component video signal
Y ........................ 1 Vp-p/75 Ω/negative sync.
PB/CB, PR/CR ........ 0.7 Vp-p (color 100 %)/75 Ω
INPUT2
INPUT3
Input
Input
DVI-D 24-pin connector
Digital video signal (HDCP supported)
S-VIDEO jack (Mini-DIN, 4-pin connector)
• Y/C separate video signal
Y ........................ 1 Vp-p/75 Ω/negative sync.
C ........................ 0.286 Vp-p/75 Ω (NTSC)
0.3 Vp-p/75 Ω (PAL)
INPUT4
INPUT5
Input
BNC jack
• Composite video signal ........ 1 Vp-p/75 Ω/negative sync.
Output
Input
BNC jack .................................. 75 Ω/with buffer
BNC jack × 5
• RGB signal (for SYNC ON G)
RGB ........................... 0.7 Vp-p/75 Ω/no sync.
HD/VS, VD ................. TTL level/positive and negative polarity/75 Ω or 2.2 kΩ
(with impedance switching)
SYNC ON G ............... 1 Vp-p/75 Ω/negative sync.
• Component video signal
Y ................................ 1 Vp-p/75 Ω/negative sync.
PB/CB, PR/CR ................ 0.7 Vp-p (color 100 %)/75 Ω
Audio-related
Input AUDIO INPUT (for INPUT3/4)
Pin jack (×2)
L/R ............ 500 mVrms/more than 10 kΩ
AUDIO INPUT (for INPUT5)
Pin jack (×2)
L/R ............ 500 mVrms/more than 10 kΩ
80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Video Card: PDA-5003/PDA-5004
[507CMX : 427CMX]
7 PDA-5004
Video-related
INPUT1
Input
The following signal is supported only when a PDA-5004 is installed.
• Component video signal
Y ........................ 1 Vp-p/75 Ω/negative sync.
PB/CB, PR/CR ........ 0.7 Vp-p (color 100 %)/75 Ω
INPUT2
INPUT3
Input
Input
DVI-D 24-pin connector
Digital video signal (HDCP supported)
S-VIDEO jack (Mini-DIN, 4-pin connector)
• Y/C separate video signal
Y ........................ 1 Vp-p/75 Ω/negative sync.
C ........................ 0.286 Vp-p/75 Ω (NTSC)
0.3 Vp-p/75 Ω (PAL)
INPUT4
INPUT5
Input
RCA jack
• Composite video signal ........ 1 Vp-p/75 Ω/negative sync.
Output
Input
RCA jack .................................. 75 Ω/with buffer
RCA jack
• RGB ................... 0.7 Vp-p/75Ω/no sync.
SYNC ON G ....... 1 Vp-p/75 Ω/negative sync.
• Component video signal
Y ........................ 1 Vp-p/75 Ω/negative sync.
PB/CB, PR/CR ........ 0.7 Vp-p (color 100 %)/75 Ω
Audio-related
Input
AUDIO INPUT (for INPUT3)
Pin jack (×2)
L/R ............ 500 mVrms/more than 10 kΩ
AUDIO INPUT (for INPUT4)
Pin jack (×2)
L/R ............ 500 mVrms/more than 10 kΩ
AUDIO INPUT (for INPUT5)
Pin jack (×2)
L/R ............ 500 mVrms/more than 10 kΩ
Accessories
Label for remote control unit............................... × 1
Connector indicator label..................................... × 1
Screws (3 × 8) ..................................................... × 2
Operating instructions ......................................... × 1
Warranty.............................................................. × 1
81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Video Card: PDA-5003/PDA-5004
[507CMX : 427CMX]
4.4.2 External Dimensions
(Unit: mm)
7 PDA-5003
262
301.5
7 PDA-5004
262
301.5
82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[507CMX : 427CMX]
Video Card: PDA-5003/PDA-5004
<PDP-507CMX connection panel: when equipped with PDA-5003>
(112.5)
123.6
17
44.5
107.5
1212 28
38
42
33
37
37
18 21.5 14 22 18 18 18 18 36.5 14
141.6
95
(180.3)
#: Symbol indicates the alignment point.
<PDP-507CMX connection panel: when equipped with PDA-5004>
(112.5)
123.6
17
44.5
107.5
1212 28
38
42
33
39
39
14 26 14 26 14 26 14 14 34 14
141.6
95
(180.3)
#: Symbol indicates the alignment point.
<PDP-427CMX connection panel: when equipped with PDA-5003>
(121)
17
44.5
122.6
12 12 28
38
42
33
37
37
18 21.5 14 22 18 18 18 18
36.5 14
132.6
62.5
43
(78.8)
#: Symbol indicates the alignment point.
<PDP-427CMX connection panel: when equipped with PDA-5004>
(121)
17
44.5
122.6
12 12 28
38
42
33
39
39
14 26 14 26 14 26 14 14
34
14
132.6
62.5
43
(78.8)
#: Symbol indicates the alignment point.
83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Video Card: PDA-5003/PDA-5004
[507CMX : 427CMX]
4.4.3 Installing procedures
Installation instructions are listed below. When installing
the unit, if a screw or other object should drop inside the
Plasma Display, immediately consult your nearest Pioneer
Service Center. Continuing operation may damage the
panel. This device has been designed for installation on
the Pioneer Plasma Display PDP-507CMX/PDP-427CMX.
Installation procedures are as follows:
Installation
Illustration depicts PDA-5003 model
1 Remove the protective cover over the video card
slot on the Plasma Display’s terminal panel.
Check the following before installing this video card:
• Plasma Display is disconnected from the computer and
any other devices.
• The Plasma Display is unplugged from the wall outlet
before installing/removing a card from a panel slot.
Protective cover
2 Align the video card with the two rails visible inside
Installation Notes:
of the port then gently and evenly insert the card.
• Do not install the PDA-5002 on the PDP-507CMX/PDP-
427CMX display units.
• When opening the protective cover, take care not to
drop screws or other objects in the opening. Objects
dropped inside the display may cause damage or
malfunction.
rails
Note
• When installing a video card, if the Plasma Display is
laid with its screen side facing down, the work surface
should be flat and level. The packing material, a blanket,
or other soft material should be spread on the work
surface to protect the screen before laying the panel
down. Take care to prevent scratches or other damage
to the unit from tools or other objects. Never rest the
display on a surface in such a way that weight or
pressure is placed only on the screen surface.
• This video card has been designed for exclusive use with
the Pioneer Plasma Display PDP-507CMX/PDP-427CMX.
Do not attempt unauthorized modifications or alterations
since malfunction or damage may result.
• Be very careful when inserting the card. Aim the card’s
mounting surface oriented toward the rear of the Plasma
Display. The card or display may be damaged if the card
is inserted crookedly or with excessive force.
• Impedance selector switch is found only on the PDA-
5003.
Device
mounting
surface
Impedance
selector switch
75 Ω
2.2 kΩ
AUDIO
INPUT5
S-VIDEO
INPUT3
VIDEO
INPUT4
INPUT 3/4
ANALOG RGB
AUDIO
/V SYNC)
• Take care not to modify or damage the card’s internal
devices in any way.
• Before installation, take precautions to eliminate static
electricity on your body. Do not touch the card’s circuitry
or devices.
3 After inserting the video card all the way into the
slot, confirm that it is seated securely. The screws
removed in step 1 to secure the card in place.
• This device has not been designed to be repeatedly
removed and reinstalled. Avoid removing the card once
it is installed.
S-VIDEO
INPUT3
VIDEO
INPUT4
INPUT 3/4
ANALOG RGB
AUDIO
AUDIO
INPUT5
/V SYNC)
• When installing the PDA-5003, it may be necessary to
adjust the impedance selector switch setting. Confirm
this item before installing.
• Prior to insertion, use a cloth containing ethanol to clean
the PCI bus. Wipe in the direction of the electrodes to
remove dirt and dust. Wiping with a dry cloth may cause
damage due to static electricity.
84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Video Card: PDA-5003/PDA-5004
[507CMX : 427CMX]
4 Affix the accessory connector indicator label to the
Plasma Display then affix the remote control label
to the remote control that is furnished with the
Plasma Display.
S-VIDEO
INPUT3
VIDEO
INPUT4
INPUT 3/4
ANALOG RGB
AUDIO
AUDIO
INPUT5
V SYNC)
INPUT3
INPUT4
VIDEO
AUDIO
INPUT5
INPUT3
R
/
4
L
ANALOG RGB
(H/V SYNC)
HD
AUDIO
(ON SYNC)
G
S-VIDEO
IN
OUT
B
R
VD
R
L
PDA-5003
PDA-5004
RGB (BNC)
COMPONENT
Notes
Note
Use a soft cloth to gently wipe away any dust or soiling
from the surface before affixing the label.
Video Card Removal (Be careful not to insert
and remove it frequently).
1 Remove the two screws holding the video card.
S-VIDEO
INPUT3
VIDEO
INPUT4
INPUT 3/4
ANALOG RGB
AUDIO
AUDIO
INPUT5
/V SYNC
2 Holding the inside tabs, pull the video card straight
out.
Impedance
selector switch
2.2 kΩ
Device
mounting
surface
75 Ω
S-VIDEO
INPUT3
VIDEO
INPUT4
INPUT 3/4
ANALOG RGB
AUDIO
INPUT5
/V SYNC)
85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Video Card: PDA-5003/PDA-5004
[507CMX : 427CMX]
4.4.4 Input connectors on the Plasma Display
with video card
4.4.5 Connection to INPUT1 and INPUT5
7 When using PDA-5003
7 When using PDA-5003
Consult the following chart when making connections to
a Plasma Display equipped with this video card.
Various components can be connected to the INPUT1 and
INPUT5 jacks. After connections are made, on-screen
setup is necessary to match the characteristics of the
connected component.
Input
Connector
INPUT INPUT INPUT INPUT INPUT
1*1
2
3
4
5*1
Connected
INPUT5
jack
[ON SYNC]
[H/V SYNC]
component
and signals
G
B
R
HD
VD
Output source
AV component
Video component/
personal
computer (PC)
with RGB output
Analog RGB
Component video
S video
G ON SYNC
B
B
B
R
R
R
G
G
Y
H/V SYNC
Composite video
Digital RGB
Personal computer
(PC)
HD
VD
Video component
with component
video output
*2
Analog RGB
S video
PB/CB PR/CR
: Connect to this jack.
*3
*3
Composite video
Digital RGB
: Do not connect anything.
Note
Components compatible with INPUT1 are also compatible with
INPUT5. When making connections to INPUT1, please refer to
the Plasma Display’s Operating Instructions.
*4
*1 Although INPUT1 and INPUT5 are compatible with various
kinds of signals, setup using the on-screen menu is
necessary after connections are made in order match the
characteristics of the source component.
*2 INPUT1 is compatible with Microsoft’s Plug & Play (VESA
DDC 1/2B).
*3 Depending on the video output board of the computer, this
type of connection may not be possible.
*4 INPUT2 is compatible with Microsoft’s Plug & Play (VESA
DDC 2B).
7 When using PDA-5004
Various components can be connected to the INPUT1 and
INPUT5 jack. After connections are made, on-screen setup
is necessary to match the characteristics of the connected
component.
7 When using PDA-5004
Consult the following chart when making connections to
a Plasma Display equipped with this video card.
INPUT5 jack
Output source
Y
PB/CB
PR/CR
Video component/personal
computer (PC) with RGB
output
Input
Connector
G ON SYNC
B
R
INPUT INPUT INPUT INPUT INPUT
1*1
2
3
4
5*1
Connected
component
and signals
Video component with
component video output
Y
PB/CB
PR/CR
AV component
: Connect to this jack.
Analog RGB
Component video
S video
Note
When making connections to INPUT1, please refer to the
Plasma Display’s Operating Instructions.
Composite video
Digital RGB
Personal computer (PC)
Analog RGB
*2
*3
S video
*3
Composite video
Digital RGB
*4
*1 Although INPUT1 and INPUT5 are compatible with various
kinds of signals, setup using the on-screen menu is
necessary after connections are made in order match the
characteristics of the source component.
*2 INPUT1 is compatible with Microsoft’s Plug & Play (VESA
DDC 1/2B).
*3 Depending on the video output board of the computer, this
type of connection may not be possible.
*4 INPUT2 is compatible with Microsoft’s Plug & Play (VESA
DDC 2B).
86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[507CMX : 427CMX]
Video Card: PDA-5003/PDA-5004
4.4.6 Connection to INPUT1 or INPUT5
7 When using PDA-5003
7 When using PDA-5004
Connection to AV components
Connection to AV components
Connection to AV component equipped with
component video jacks
Connection to AV component equipped with
component video jacks
Make component video connections for AV
components equipped with component video jacks.
Make component video connections for AV
components equipped with component video jacks.
When connecting to ANALOG RGB IN (INPUT1)
When connecting to ANALOG RGB IN (INPUT1)
INPUT1
INPUT1
ANALOG RGB OUT
(D-Sub)
ANALOG RGB IN
(D-Sub)
ANALOG RGB OUT
(D-Sub)
ANALOG RGB IN
(D-Sub)
On-screen setup is necessary after connection.
On-screen setup is necessary after connection.
When connecting to COMPONENT VIDEO (INPUT5)
When connecting to ANALOG RGB (INPUT5)
INPUT5
ANALOG RGB
COMPONENT
INPUT5
VIDEO
G(ON SYNC)
B
R
HD (H/V SYNC) VD
Y
Pb/Cb
Pr/Cr
Connect the Y signal to the G jack, the PB/CB signal to
the B jack, and the PR/CR signal to the R jack.
On-screen setup is necessary after connection.
Connect the Y signal to the Y jack, the PB/CB signal to
the PB/CB jack, and the PR/CR signal to the PR/CR jack.
INPUT5 jacks are all BNC jacks.
If necessary, use commercially available BNC/pin-plug
conversion adapters to make connections.
Note
The Plasma Display and this Video Card are designed to
support component video signals with standard, stable signal
levels and sync signals. As a result, some image disruption
may be generated during use of various special trick play
functions on video components.
Note
The Plasma Display and this Video Card are designed to
support component video signals with standard, stable signal
levels and sync signals. As a result, some image disruption
may be generated during use of various special trick play
functions on video components.
87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Video Card: PDA-5003/PDA-5004
[507CMX : 427CMX]
Connection of G ON SYNC analog RGB source
Make G ON SYNC connections for a component with
output that has the synchronization signal layered on
top of the green signal.
When connecting to ANALOG RGB IN (INPUT1)
When connecting to COMPONENT VIDEO (INPUT5)
[Connections for PDA-5004]
INPUT1
ANALOG RGB OUT
(D-Sub)
ANALOG RGB IN
(D-Sub)
COMPONENT
INPUT5
VIDEO
Y
Pb/Cb
Pr/Cr
On-screen setup is necessary after connection.
Connect the G ON SYNC signal to the Y jack, the B
signal to the PB/CB jack, and the R signal to the PR/CR
jack.
When connecting to ANALOG RGB (INPUT5)
[Connections for PDA-5003]
On-screen setup is necessary after connection.
INPUT5
ANALOG RGB
G(ON SYNC)
B
R
HD (H/V SYNC) VD
On-screen setup is necessary after connection.
Note
When making G ON SYNC connections, do not make any
connections to the VD or HD jacks. If connections are made,
the picture may be not displayed normally.
88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[507CMX : 427CMX]
Video Card: PDA-5003/PDA-5004
Connection of composite SYNC analog RGB
source
Make composite SYNC connections for a component
with output that has the vertical synchronization signal
layered on top of the horizontal synchronization signal.
Connection to a personal
computer
Connection method differs depending on the computer
type. When connecting, please thoroughly read the
computer’s operating instructions.
When connecting to ANALOG RGB IN (INPUT1)
Before making connections, be sure to make sure that
the personal computer’s power and display’s main
power is off.
INPUT1
ANALOG RGB OUT
(D-Sub)
ANALOG RGB IN
(D-Sub)
For the PC input signals and screen sizes that the
display is compatible with, please refer to the Plasma
Display’s Operating Instructions.
Connection of separate SYNC analog RGB
source
Make separate SYNC connections for a personal
computer that has RGB output separated into 5 output
signals: green, blue, red, horizontal synchronization
signal, and vertical synchronization signal.
When connecting to ANALOG RGB (INPUT5)
[Connections for PDA-5003]
On-screen setup is necessary after connection.
INPUT5
ANALOG RGB
When connecting to ANALOG RGB (INPUT5)
[Connections for PDA-5003]
G(ON SYNC)
B
R
HD (H/V SYNC) VD
INPUT5
ANALOG RGB
G(ON SYNC)
B
R
HD (H/V SYNC) VD
When using INPUT5, set the impedance selector
switch to match the output impedance of the
connected computer’s synchronization signal.
When the output impedance of the sync signal is below
75 Ω remove the video card and set the impedance
selector switch to 75 Ω.
When using INPUT5, set the impedance selector
switch to match the output impedance of the
connected component’s synchronization signal.
When the output impedance of the sync signal is below
75 Ω remove the video card and set the impedance
selector switch to 75 Ω.
On-screen setup is necessary after connection.
On-screen setup is necessary after connection.
Note
When making composite SYNC connections, do not connect
anything to the VD jack. If connected to, the picture may not
be displayed properly.
89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Video Card: PDA-5003/PDA-5004
[507CMX : 427CMX]
When connecting to ANALOG RGB IN (INPUT1)
Connection of G ON SYNC analog RGB source
Make G ON SYNC connections for a personal computer
with output that has the synchronization signal layered
on top of the green signal.
INPUT1
ANALOG RGB OUT
(D-Sub)
ANALOG RGB IN
(D-Sub)
When connecting to ANALOG RGB IN (INPUT1)
INPUT1
ANALOG RGB OUT
(D-Sub)
ANALOG RGB IN
(D-Sub)
Connect the cable corresponding to the shape of the
input terminal on the display and the personal
computer’s output terminal.
Secure by tightening the terminal screws on both units.
On-screen setup is necessary after connection.
On-screen setup is necessary after connection.
Note
When connecting to ANALOG RGB (INPUT5)
[Connections for PDA-5003]
Depending on the type of computer model being connected, a
conversion connector or adapter etc. provided with the
computer or sold separately may be necessary.
For details, please read your PC’s instruction manual or consult
the maker or nearest dealer of your computer.
INPUT5
ANALOG RGB
G(ON SYNC)
B
R
HD (H/V SYNC) VD
When connecting to ANALOG RGB OUT (INPUT1)
INPUT1
ANALOG RGB OUT
(D-Sub)
ANALOG RGB IN
(D-Sub)
To an external monitor
On-screen setup is necessary after connection.
With the Plasma Display, it is possible to output the
video signal to an external monitor or other component
from the ANALOG RGB OUT (INPUT1) terminal.
Note
When making G ON SYNC connections, do not make any
connections to the VD or HD jacks. If connections are made,
the picture may be not displayed normally.
Note
A video signal will not be output from the ANALOG RGB OUT
(INPUT1) terminal when the main power of this unit is off or in
standby.
90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[507CMX : 427CMX]
Video Card: PDA-5003/PDA-5004
When connecting to COMPONENT VIDEO (INPUT5)
[Connections for PDA-5004]
When connecting to ANALOG RGB (INPUT5)
[Connections for PDA-5003]
COMPONENT
INPUT5
INPUT5
ANALOG RGB
VIDEO
G(ON SYNC)
B
R
HD (H/V SYNC) VD
Y
Pb/Cb
Pr/Cr
On-screen setup is necessary after connection.
When using INPUT5, set the impedance selector
switch to match the output impedance of the
connected computer’s synchronization signal.
When the output impedance of the sync signal is below
75 Ω remove the video card and set the impedance
selector switch to 75 Ω.
Connection of composite SYNC analog RGB
source
Make composite SYNC connections for a personal
computer with output that has the vertical
synchronization signal layered on top of the horizontal
synchronization signal.
On-screen setup is necessary after connection.
Notes
÷ When making composite SYNC connections, do not connect
anything to the VD jack. If connected to, the picture may not
be displayed properly.
When connecting to ANALOG RGB IN (INPUT1)
÷ Some types of computer devices manufactured by Apple
Computer, Inc. are equipped with both G ON SYNC and
composite SYNC outputs. This type of component should
be connected using the G ON SYNC connection.
INPUT1
ANALOG RGB OUT
(D-Sub)
ANALOG RGB IN
(D-Sub)
On-screen setup is necessary after connection.
91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Video Card: PDA-5003/PDA-5004
[507CMX : 427CMX]
4.4.7 Connection to INPUT2
4.4.9 Connection to INPUT4
A computer equipped with DVI output (digital RGB signal)
or an AV component equipped with DVI output, can be
connected to the Plasma Display’s DVI connector.
Connect an AV component that has a video output jack
to the video card’s INPUT4 jack. The VIDEO OUT
(INPUT4) jack can be used to output the video signal to
a separate monitor, recording device or other
component with video input capability.
INPUT2
DIGITAL RGB
(DVI-D)
Note
A video signal will not be output from the VIDEO OUT
(INPUT4) jack when the main power of this display is off or in
standby mode.
[When using PDA-5003]
INPUT4
VIDEO
IN
OUT
To a monitor or a
recording device
Computer or AV component
On-screen setup is necessary after connection.
Note
Use a DVI-D 24-pin (digital only) cable for the connection.
AV component
NOTICE
¶ INPUT2 is compatible with Microsoft’s Plug & Play (VESA
DDC 2B).
[When using PDA-5004]
¶ For screen sizes and input signals compatible with INPUT2,
please refer to the Plasma Display’s Operation Instructions.
INPUT4
VIDEO
IN
OUT
4.4.8 Connection to INPUT3
Connect an AV component that has S-video output jack
to the video card’s S-VIDEO (INPUT3) jack.
To a monitor or a
recording device
INPUT3
S-VIDEO
AV component
Signals to the INPUT3 and INPUT4 jacks are all
compatible with the following TV systems: NTSC,
PAL, SECAM, 4.43NTSC, PAL M and PAL N.
AV component
92
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[507CMX : 427CMX]
Video Card: PDA-5003/PDA-5004
4.4.10 About DTV set top box connection
To ensure proper connection, please carefully read the
instruction manual supplied with the DTV set top box.
The set top box output signals that this display is
compatible with are as follows.
Jacks where connection is possible
Video
Video
Video signal
1125i (1080i)
signal type
signal format
INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 INPUT5
HDTV
Component
RGB
750p (720p)
SDTV
525i (480i)
625i (575i)
Composite
S Video
Component
RGB
525p (480p)
625p (575p)
Component
RGB
93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Video Card: PDA-5003/PDA-5004
[507CMX : 427CMX]
4.4.11 Audio connections
Audio connections for component connected to
INPUT2
Before making connections, be sure to check that the
audio component’s power and the display’s main power
is off.
OUTPUT INPUT1 INPUT2
AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO
Connect an audio component to the audio
input jack of the Plasma Display with installed
video card.
When the video card is installed, the Plasma Display
provides four or five audio input jacks and one audio
output jack. Consult the following chart to choose the
proper audio input for each video input.
Video
input
Audio input
Sound output
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT5
INPUT3
INPUT4
Stereo mini jack (L/R)
Stereo mini jack (L/R)
Pin jacks (L/R)
Pin jacks (L/R) *1
Pin jacks (L/R) *1
Sound of the selected
video input is output from
the
• SPEAKER (L/R) terminals
• Stereo mini jack (L/R).
A stereo miniplug cable can be used to connect the
audio output from the component connected to
INPUT2, to the Plasma Display’s AUDIO (INPUT2) jack
(L/R).
*1
When using the PDA-5003, the INPUT3 and INPUT4
audio input connectors are shared.
Sound is output from both the AUDIO (OUTPUT) stereo
mini jack (L/R) and the SPEAKER (L/R) terminals
according to the video input selection.
Audio connection for component connected to
INPUT1
OUTPUT INPUT1 INPUT2
AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO
Audio connection for component connected to
INPUT5
INPUT5
AUDIO
R
L
A stereo miniplug cable can be used to connect the
audio output from the component connected to
INPUT1, to the Plasma Display’s AUDIO (INPUT1) jack
(L/R).
The audio line for the component connected to INPUT5
can be connected to the AUDIO R/L (INPUT5) pin jacks.
Sound is output from both the AUDIO (OUTPUT) stereo
mini jack (L/R) and the SPEAKER (L/R) terminals
according to the video input selection.
Sound is output from both the AUDIO (OUTPUT) stereo
mini jack (L/R) and the SPEAKER (L/R) terminals
according to the video input selection.
94
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[507CMX : 427CMX]
Video Card: PDA-5003/PDA-5004
[When using PDA-5003]
[When using PDA-5004]
Audio connection for component connected to
INPUT3 or INPUT4
Audio connection for component connected to
INPUT3
AUDIO
INPUT 3/4
INPUT3
AUDIO
R
L
R
L
Audio input to the AUDIO R/L (INPUT3/4) pin jacks is
possible for a component connected to either INPUT3
or INPUT4.
The audio line for the component connected to INPUT3
can be connected to the AUDIO R/L (INPUT3) pin jacks.
Sound is output from both the AUDIO (OUTPUT) stereo
mini jack (L/R) and the SPEAKER (L/R) terminals
according to the video input selection.
Sound is output from both the AUDIO (OUTPUT) stereo
mini jack (L/R) and the SPEAKER (L/R) terminals
according to the video input selection.
Audio connection for component connected to
INPUT4
INPUT4
AUDIO
R
L
The audio line for the component connected to INPUT4
can be connected to the AUDIO R/L (INPUT4) pin jacks.
Sound is output from both the AUDIO (OUTPUT) stereo
mini jack (L/R) and the SPEAKER (L/R) terminals
according to the video input selection.
95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Video Card: PDA-5003/PDA-5004
[507CMX : 427CMX]
INPUT Response Signals
7 PC signals supported
INPUT 1, 5
Refresh rate
Vertical Horizontal
70.1 Hz 31.5 kHz
70.1 Hz 31.5 kHz
85.1 Hz 37.9 kHz
59.9 Hz 31.5 kHz
Resolution
(Dot x Line)
Remark
7 Video signals supported # (applies only when
equipped with PDA-5003/PDA-5004)
640x400
720x400
NEC PC-9800
NEC PC-9800
Vertical Horizontal
Frequency Frequency
Signal Format
Remark
640x480
Fv (Hz)
Fh (kHz)
66.7 Hz 35.0 kHz Apple Macintosh 13”
72.8 Hz 37.9 kHz
Component
RGB
Component
RGB
Component
RGB
Component
RGB
Component
RGB
Component
RGB
Component
RGB
Component
RGB
15.625
625i(576i)/SDTV
1125i(1080i)/HDTV
625p(576p)/SDTV
750p(720p)/HDTV
1125p(1080p)/HDTV
520i(480i)/SDTV
525i(480i)/SDTV
75 Hz
85 Hz
37.5 kHz
43.3 kHz
28.13
100.4 Hz 51.1 kHz
120.4 Hz 61.3 kHz
I/O DATA
I/O DATA
848x480
852x480
800x600
60 Hz
60 Hz
31.0 kHz
31.7 kHz
31.25
37.50
50
56.3 Hz 35.2 kHz
60.3 Hz 37.9 kHz
72.2 Hz 48.1 kHz
56.20
75 Hz
46.9 kHz
85.1 Hz 53.7 kHz
99.8 Hz 63.0 kHz
I/O DATA
I/O DATA
62.50
15.734
31.5
120 Hz
75.7 kHz
832x624
1024x768
74.6 Hz 49.7 kHz Apple Macintosh 16”
60 Hz
60 Hz
48.4 kHz
49.7 kHz
Work station (SGI)
525p(480p)/SDTV
70.1 Hz 56.5 kHz
75 Hz 60.0 kHz
(74.9 Hz) (60.2 kHz)
85 Hz 68.7 kHz
100.6 Hz 80.5 kHz
119.4 Hz 95.5 kHz
56.2 Hz 45.1 kHz
( ) indicates Apple
Macintosh 19
Component
RGB
Component
RGB
Component
RGB
1125i(1080i)/HDTV
1125i(1035i)/HDTV
60
33.75
45.0
I/O DATA
750p(720p)/HDTV
1280x768
1125p(1080p)/HDTV
67.5
59.8 Hz
69.8 Hz
60 Hz
48 kHz
56 kHz
47.7 kHz
1360x765
1360x768
1376x768
1280x800
1280x854
1152x864
60 Hz
47.7 kHz
I/O DATA
I/O DATA
CVT
59.9 Hz 48.3 kHz
59.8 Hz 49.7 kHz
60 Hz
60 Hz
72 Hz
75 Hz
53.1 kHz
53.7 kHz
64.9 kHz
67.5 kHz
PC
1152x870
1152x900
75.1 Hz 68.7 kHz Apple Macintosh 21”
66 Hz
76 Hz
61.8 kHz Sun Microsystems LO
71.7 kHz Sun Microsystems HI
1440x900
1280x960
59.9 Hz 55.9 kHz Apple Macintosh 17”
60 Hz
85 Hz
60 Hz
60 Hz
60 Hz
60.0 kHz
85.9 kHz
63.9 kHz
64.0 kHz
1280x1024
Work station (SGI)
64.6 kHz Work station (EWS4800)
71.2 Hz 75.1 kHz Work station (EWS4800)
72 Hz
75 Hz
76.1 Hz 81.1 kHz
85 Hz 91.1 kHz
100.1 Hz 108.5 kHz
60 Hz 65.3 kHz
74.9 Hz 82.3 kHz
78.1 kHz
80.0 kHz
Work station (HP)
Work station (SUN)
I/O DATA
1400x1050
85 Hz
60 Hz
60 Hz
65 Hz
70 Hz
75 Hz
93.9 kHz
65.3 kHz
75.0 kHz
81.3 kHz
87.5 kHz
93.8 kHz
1680x1050
1600x1200
85 Hz 106.3 kH z
59.9 Hz 74.6 kHz
1920x1200
1920x1200RB
CVT
CVT
60 Hz
74.0 kHz
96
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Video Card: PDA-5003/PDA-5004
[507CMX : 427CMX]
INPUT 2
7 PC signals supported
7 Video signals supported # (applies only when
equipped with PDA-5003/PDA-5004)
Refresh rate
Resolution
(Dot x Line)
Remarks
Vertical
Frequency Frequency
Fv (Hz)
Horizontal
Vertical Horizontal
59.9 Hz 31.5 kHz
72.8 Hz 37.9 kHz
Signal
Format
Remark
640x480
Fh (kHz)
RGB
RGB
RGB
RGB
RGB
RGB
1125i(1080i)/HDTV
28.13
31.25
37.50
31.5
75 Hz
85 Hz
37.5 kHz
43.3 kHz
50
625p(576p)x720 dot/SDTV
750p(720p)/HDTV
100.4 Hz 51.1 kHz
120.4 Hz 61.3 kHz
70.1 Hz 31.5 kHz
85.1 Hz 37.9 kHz
525p(480p)x720 dot/SDTV
1125i(1080i)/HDTV
720x400
NEC PC-9800
33.75
45.0
60
750p(720p)/HDTV
848x480
852x480
800x600
60 Hz
60 Hz
56.3 Hz 35.2 kHz
60.3 Hz 37.9 kHz
72.2 Hz 48.1 kHz
31.0 kHz
31.7 kHz
The following signals are not formally supported, but can
be displayed (They are not recorded in EDID data).
75 Hz
85.1 Hz 53.7 kHz
99.8 Hz 63.0 kHz
46.9 kHz
Vertical
Frequency Frequency
Fv (Hz)
Horizontal
Signal
Format
Remark
Fh (kHz)
120 Hz
60 Hz
60 Hz
70.1 Hz 56.5 kHz
75 Hz
85 Hz
100.6 Hz 80.5 kHz
119.4 Hz 95.5 kHz
56.2 Hz 45.1 kHz
59.8 Hz
69.8 Hz
75.7 kHz
48.4 kHz
49.7 kHz
RGB
RGB
RGB
RGB
RGB
RGB
625i(576i)/SDTV
15.6
56.25
15.8
31.5
67.5
62.5
1024x768
1280x768
50
1125p(1080p)/HDTV
525i(480i)/SDTV
Work station (SGI)
60
50
525p(480p)x640 dot/SDTV
1125p(1080p)/HDTV
1250p/HDTV
60.0 kHz
68.7 kHz
* They may not be displayed normally depending on the
connected device.
48 kHz
56 kHz
1280x800
1280x854
1360x768
1376x768
1152x864
59.8 Hz 49.7 kHz
60 Hz
60 Hz
53.1 kHz
47.7 kHz
I/O DATA
I/O DATA
59.9 Hz 48.3 kHz
60 Hz
72 Hz
75 Hz
66 Hz
76 Hz
53.7 kHz
64.9 kHz
67.5 kHz
61.8 kHz Sun Microsystems LO
71.7 kHz Sun Microsystems HI
1152x900
1440x900
1280x960
1280x1024
1400x1050
74.9 Hz 82.3 kHz
1680x1050
1920x1080
60 Hz
50 Hz
60 Hz
60 Hz
60 Hz
65.3 kHz
56.2 kHz
67.5 kHz
75.0 kHz
74.0 kHz
1600x1200
1920x1200RB
CVT
INPUT 3#
(applies only when equipped with PDA-5003/PDA-5004):
Y/C Separate video signal NTSC, PAL, SECAM, 4.43 NTSC, PAL
M, PAL N
INPUT 4#
(applies only when equipped with PDA-5003/PDA-5004):
Composite video signal NTSC, PAL, SECAM, 4.43 NTSC, PAL
M, PAL N
97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table Top Stand: PDK-TS07
[507CMX : 427CMX]
4.5 Table Top Stand: PDK-TS07
4.5.1 Specifications
External dimensions................. 566 mm (W) × 508 mm (H) × 339 mm (D)
(22-9/32 in. (W) × 20 in. (H) × 13-11/32 in. (D))
Weight ....................................... 4.0 kg (8.8 lbs.) (mounting hardware only)
39.5 kg (87.1 lbs.) (mounting hardware and Plasma Display <PDP-507CMX>)
34.5 kg (76.1 lbs.) (mounting hardware and Plasma Display <PDP-427CMX>)
Materials .................................... Base: plastic (ABS); Stand pipes: general structural steel tubes (STKMR-D)
Finish.......................................... Finish: Base: paint (Pioneer original color); Stand pipes: semi-matt black paint
Package dimensions................. 640 mm (W) × 214 mm (H) × 415 mm (D)
(25-3/16 in. (W) × 8-7/16 in. (H) × 16-11/32 in. (D))
Package weight......................... 6.2 kg (13.7 lbs.)
Layers of packing...................... 10 layers
Accessories
Base cover ................................................................... × 1
Stand pipes (left and right interchangeable) ................. × 2
Screws (4 mm × 8 mm) ............................................... × 4
Installation bolts 1 (M8 × 20 mm) ............................... × 2
Installation bolts 2 (M8 × 40 mm) ............................... × 2
Hexagonal wrench (opposite side 5 mm for M8 use) .... × 1
Stabilization bolts (eye screw) ..................................... × 2
Operating instructions .................................................. × 1
✩ Operating Temperature Restrictions
• Ambient Temperature: 0 °C to 40 °C
✩ Operating temperature restrictions for when the speaker system (PDP-S53-LR, PDP-S56-LR) is attached.
• Ambient temperature: 0 °C to 40 °C
✩ Other factors
• Maintain sufficient clearance between the display and the wall (at least 100 mm)
4.5.2 Installation coordinates for screws used to attach the stand to a surface
* When stabilizing the stand to a surface, use M6 longer than 20 mm.
Unit: mm (inch)
487 (19-3/16)*
248 (9-3/4)
387 (15-1/4)**
ø20
(25/32)
ø6.5
(1/4)
Side View
*
50 inch display model (PDP-507CMX)
** 42 inch display model (PDP-427CMX)
98
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table Top Stand: PDK-TS07
[507CMX : 427CMX]
4.5.3 External Dimensions
7 When using Plasma Display PDP-507CMX
Unit: mm (inch)
1222 (48-1/8)
566 (22-9/32)
7 When using Plasma Display PDP-427CMX
Unit: mm (inch)
1022 (40-1/4)
566 (22-9/32)
99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table Top Stand: PDK-TS07
[507CMX : 427CMX]
4.5.4 Stand assembling
1) Assembling Steps
1 Turn the base cover over so that the bottom is facing up.
2 Insert the stand pipes into the base cover.
3 Use the included screws (4 mm × 8 mm) to stabilize the stand pipes.
Note
Assemble the stand with a soft sheet placed under the base cover.
If a sheet is not laid before assembly, the front surface of the base cover may be scratched.
Screws (4 mm × 8 mm)
Screws (4 mm × 8 mm)
Stand pipe
Base cover
Sheet
100
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table Top Stand: PDK-TS07
[507CMX : 427CMX]
4.5.5 Attaching the Stand to the Plasma Display
Table. Regarding the stand pipe bolt holes when the
stand is used as a desktop stand
Caution
Plasma Display model Bolt holes used with stand orientation
The Plasma Display is heavy, has no depth, and is
unstable, so be sure to have at least two people
assemble and install it.
50 inch display model
43 inch display model
42 inch display model
,
'
'
'
B B
,
A A
,
A A
Note
Note
C and C’ indicate bolt holes for optional components
that are sold separately.
ꢀ Insert the bolts in the holes vertically.
ꢀ Place a sheet or protective cover to protect the display
from scratches or damage.
B
ꢀ Assemble only with the Plasma Display lying flat on a
table or similar surface.
1 With the Plasma Display lying flat, insert and secure
the two Installation bolts 1 (M8 x 20 mm) in the
holes "a" located in center of the Plasma Display
housing.
At this point, tighten these bolts 1 only until the
threads are no longer visible when viewed from the
side (you will be unable to attach the display if the
bolts are screwed in completely).
2 Hook the stand pipe holes B onto the bolt heads of
the installation bolts 1, then slide the stand
upwards to the Plasma Display until it engages the
installation bolts 1.
Installation
Stop screwing
bolt
1
down the bolt
when the threads
are no longer
visible.
It slides no more than 19 mm (3/4 inch) because of
the structure of the stand.
Plasma Display
housing
3 Pass the installation bolts 2 (M8 x 40 mm) through
the stand pipe holes B’, and then screw them into
the main Plasma Display with the accessory
hexagonal wrench.
Installation bolt
(M8 x 20 mm)
1
Holes "a"
(holes in center
of Plasma
ꢀ Move the stand so that the stand screw holes
and the nuts that connect the main display line
up correctly.
Display)
ꢀ Be sure to tighten the bolts securely.
4 Tighten the installation bolts 1 firmly with the
accessory hexagonal wrench.
Be sure to tighten the bolts securely.
Plasma Display
* Illustration depicts
50 inch display
model.
Installation bolts
(M8 x 40 mm)
(Step 3)
2
Sheet
Note
When laying down the Plasma Display, be careful so as
to not scratch or damage it.
Slide the stand
(Step 2)
Table top stand
101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table Top Stand: PDK-TS07
[507CMX : 427CMX]
After attachment, take measures to prevent it from
falling over.
7 Stabilizing on the floor
7 Using a wall for stabilization
Stabilize the equipment as shown in the diagram using
screws that are available on the market.
1 Attaching the accessory falling prevention bolts
(hooks) to the Plasma Display (two locations).
2 Using strong cords to firmly stabilize it appropriately
Note
and firmly to a wall, pillar, or other sturdy element.
To stabilize the equipment
on the floor, use screws that
have a nominal diameter of
6 mm (1/4 inch) and that are
at least 20 mm (13/16 inch)
long.
Perform this work in the same way on the left and
right sides.
Note
Min. 20 mm
(13/16 inch)
Use cords and fittings (eye screw) that are available on
the market.
1 Falling prevention bolts
2 Cords
Fittings
(eye screw)
102
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[507CMX : 427CMX]
Table Top Stand: PDK-TS07
103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tilt Mount Unit: PDK-5011
[507CMX : 427CMX]
4.6 Tilt Mount Unit: PDK-5011
4.6.1 Specifications
External dimensions................. 1222 mm (W) ×736 mm (H) ×144 mm (D) (48-1/8 in. (W) ×28-31/32 in. (H) ×5-21/32 in. (D))
(mounting hardware and Plasma Display <PDP-507CMX>)
1022 mm (W) × 610 mm (H) × 143 mm (D) (40-1/4 in. (W) × 24-1/32 in. (H) × 5-5/8 in. (D))
(mounting hardware and Plasma Display <PDP-427CMX>)
Weight ....................................... 13.8 kg (30.4 lbs.) (mounting hardware only)
49.3 kg (108.7 lbs.) (mounting hardware and Plasma Display <PDP-507CMX>)
44.3 kg (97.7 lbs.) (mounting hardware and Plasma Display <PDP-427CMX>)
Materials .................................... General structural steel tubes (STKM-R), SS400, SPHC
Finish.......................................... Semi-matte black paint on rear (Original Pioneer color)
Dimensions of packaging......... 890 mm (W) × 120 mm (H) × 700 mm (D)
(35-1/32 in. (W) × 4-23/32 in. (H) × 27-9/16 in. (D))
Package weight......................... 18.0 kg
(39.7 lbs.)
Layers of packing...................... 20 layers
Components
Tilt mount unit ..................................................... × 1
Bolts M8.............................................................. × 6
Hexagonal wrench .............................................. × 1
✩ Operating Temperature Restrictions
• Ambient temperature: 0 °C to 40 °C
✩ Operating Temperature Restrictions for Upside-Down Installations
* Upside-Down Installation is unavailable with the PDK-5011.
✩ Operating temperature restrictions for when the speaker system (PDP-S53-LR, PDP-S56-LR) is attached.
• Ambient temperature: 0 °C to 40 °C
For wall-mounting, allow adequate space (a clearance of 300 mm or more) above and below the panel, as well as on the
right and the left.
104
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[507CMX : 427CMX]
Tilt Mount Unit: PDK-5011
4.6.2 External Dimensions
7 When using Plasma Display PDP-507CMX
(Units: mm)
655
555
455
(258)
(144)
45
Center of
the display
Attachment
holes
(six locations)
Center of
the display
6-23x10.5
6-ø10.5
496
740
1222
7 When using Plasma Display PDP-427CMX
(Units: mm)
(236)
(143)
655
555
455
45
496
740
1022
105
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tilt Mount Unit: PDK-5011
[507CMX : 427CMX]
4.6.3 Assembling the mounting hardware and mounting the Plasma Display
1 Remove the special screws (two locations) from the
4 Fix the Plasma Display to the PDP side hardware with
bottom of the wall mounting unit.
M8 bolts (six locations).
Use the holes marked with the red triangle "%".
Top side of Plasma Display
Special screws (M6)
Note
Be sure to install speakers at this stage.
For the installation method, refer to the speaker
instruction manual.
2 Remove the hardware on the wall side half and the
hardware on the PDP side half.
5 Attach the wall side hardware to the wall.
Wall side hardware
Install the wall side hardware (four locations) symmetri-
cally on the left and right side (one at each location
from the center of the
). Wall strength and ma-
terial determines the type of screws and bolts (sold
separately) needed for this installation.
Note
Check the strength of the wall and beams before in-
stalling the display.
PDP side hardware
3 Attach the PDP side hardware to the Plasma Display.
Note
• Place a sheet or protective cover to protect the
display from scratches or damage.
• Be sure to attach it on top of a flat table or similar
surface.
PDP side hardware
Top side of Plasma Display
106
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tilt Mount Unit: PDK-5011
[507CMX : 427CMX]
6 Attach the hook on the PDP side hardware to the wall
side hardware.
Note
Do not hold the speakers during the installation work.
Hook
Opening
Closing
ꢀ Always have at least two people do this task.
ꢀ Verify that the hook has been hung before
lifting the Plasma Display into place.
Caution
7 Fix the bottom of the hardware with the special screws
removed at step 1 (one on the left and one on the
right).
Special screw (M6)
107
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tilt Mount Unit: PDK-5011
[507CMX : 427CMX]
4.6.4 Angle setup
This installation hardware allows the display to be tilted down freely at any angle from the vertical to 25°.
This adjustment must always be done by two people.
Adjust the angle by rotating the screws at the center top and center bottom of the wall side hardware (left or right).
Note
• It is difficult turn the center-bottom screw while increasing the angle. When this happens, adjust the angle by turning
the top-center screw.
• Turn the screws very carefully to avoid damaging the wall.
• When a screw becomes tight at either end of the adjustment range, do not turn the adjustment screw any. Doing so
applies excessive force, deforming the screw.
B Criterion when its angle is 25°
A Criterion for the vertical location
End face of the plate
Gap
disappears
Back of the
Plasma Display
Resin plate
Matched in both
directions
Wall side hardware
Notch
When it is in this state, do not turn
the adjustment screw any further in
the closing direction.
When it is in this state, do not turn the
adjustment screw any further in the
opening direction.
Measuring the opening distance
X provides an approximate angle
value.
Hexagon wrench
Opening
Closing
X
A
Tilt Angle Criteria
X
B
Angle
Normal holes of
PDP-427CMX model
Normal holes Upper holes
PDP-507CMX model
5°
199 mm
253 mm
305 mm
355 mm
191 mm
240 mm
287 mm
333 mm
376 mm
194 mm
246 mm
296 mm
345 mm
391 mm
10°
15°
20°
25°
Resin plate
403 mm
Angle of incline and appearance of the screw for
angle adjustment from a horizontal position on
the front (PDP-427CMX only)
Standard hole
16° or more visible
Upper holes
23° or more visible
*Illustration depicts
PDP-507CMX model.
108
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[507CMX : 427CMX]
Tilt Mount Unit: PDK-5011
4.6.5 Measure to prevent shakiness when the unit is installed at a slight tilt
With this installation hardware, for structural reasons, the
top of the panel may be shaky when installed at a 5° angle
from the vertical position.
3 If, when it is moved only forward, the distance is too
short, rotate the resin plate to use the longer side.
If this shakiness is a problem, reduce it by following the
instructions provided below.
1 Use a Philips driver (+) to loosen (left, right) the
installation screws on the resin plate used as a guideline
when installing it vertically (left, right). Allow the resin
plate to move freely.
Rotated
Resin plate
4 After setting the resin plate (left, right) in position,
retighten the screws that were loosened at step (1).
2 Slide the resin plate (left, right) forward along the slit
to the rear cover of the Plasma Display.
Rear cover of the Plasma Display
You can use above method to reduce the shakiness that
occurs when the panel is installed at a slight angle.
Slide forward
109
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Wall Mount Unit: PDK-WM01
[507CMX : 427CMX]
4.7 Wall Mount Unit: PDK-WM01
4.7.1 Specifications
External dimensions...............1222 mm (W) × 736 mm (H) × 131 mm (D) (48-1/8 in. (W) × 28-31/32 in. (H) × 5-5/32 in. (D))
(mounting hardware and Plasma Display <PDP-507CMX>)
1022 mm (W) × 610 mm (H) × 130 mm (D) (40-1/4 in. (W) × 24-1/32 in. (H) × 5-1/8 in. (D))
(mounting hardware and Plasma Display <PDP-427CMX>)
Weight .....................................9.3 kg (20.5 lbs.) (mounting hardware only)
44.8 kg (98.8 lbs.) (mounting hardware and Plasma Display <PDP-507CMX>)
39.8 kg (87.7 lbs.) (mounting hardware and Plasma Display <PDP-427CMX>)
Materials ..................................SPHC, SS400
Finish........................................Semi-matte black paint on rear (Original Pioneer color)
Dimensions of packaging.......1070 mm (W) × 100 mm (H) × 500 mm (D)
(42-1/8 in. (W) × 3-15/16 in. (H) × 19-11/16 in. (D))
Package weight.......................11.5 kg
(25.4 lbs.)
Layers of packing....................30 layers
Components
Wall mount unit ................................................... × 1
Tilt adjustment metal fitting ................................ × 1
Bolts M8.............................................................. × 6
Hexagonal wrench
(Opposite side 6 mm for M8 use) ....................... × 1
Stencil ................................................................. × 1
✩ Operating Temperature Restrictions
• Ambient temperature: 0 °C to 40 °C
✩ Operating Temperature Restrictions for Upside-Down Installations
* Upside-Down Installation is unavailable with the PDK-WM01.
✩ Operating temperature restrictions for when the speaker system (PDP-S53-LR, PDP-S56-LR) is attached.
• Ambient temperature: 0 °C to 40 °C
✩ Attachment Restrictions
• Install it on perpendicular walls, columns, etc.
It cannot be installed on an inclined surface.
In wall-mounting installation allow adequate space (a clearance of 300 mm or more) above and below the panel, as well
as on the right and the left.
110
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[507CMX : 427CMX]
Wall Mount Unit: PDK-WM01
4.7.2 External Dimensions
7 When using Plasma Display PDP-507CMX
(Unit: mm)
910
540
496
455
120
141
141
120
197
197
Center of
the display
6-6x63
17-6x120
32
99
388
682.5
940
30
30
1222
7 When using Plasma Display PDP-427CMX
(Unit: mm)
910
540
496
455
41
120
120
41
197
197
Center line
(Center of the display)
6-6 x 63
17-6 x 120
388
682.5
98
32
30
940
30
1022
111
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Wall Mount Unit: PDK-WM01
[507CMX : 427CMX]
3 Remove the PDP side metal fitting
4.7.3 Assembling the mounting hardware and
mounting the display
1 Lift the lock bar to the position where the lock on
the PDP side metal fitting is released.
2 While holding the lock bar up, pull out the bottom
of the PDP side metal fitting.
1 Remove the push rivet of the lock plate and the bottom
anchor screw (M6 x 14 mm (9/16 inch)) (one location:
left and right sides)
3 Lift then remove the PDP side metal fitting.
1 Move the push rivet of the lock plate to its
unlocked position (shown in the figure below).
2 Remove the anchor screw from the bottom.
3
Lock bar
1
Pull the
push
rivet
PDP side metal fitting
Unlocked
position
2
Locked
position
1
Wall side metal fitting
4 Attach the PDP side metal fitting to the Plasma Display
1 Spread a sheet or similar material so that the
display will not be scratched or damaged.
2 Fix the PDP side metal fitting firmly to the Plasma
Display with M8 bolts (six locations).
Push rivet
Lock plate
Anchor screw (M6 x 14mm)
Bolts M8
Note
Be careful not to lose the two anchor screws (M6
x 14 mm (9/16 inch)) because they will be used
later.
PDP side
metal fitting
2 Release the lock bar (one location: left and right sides)
Top side of the
Plasma Display
Lock
bar
Note
ꢀ Always install it on top of a stable table or similar
surface.
ꢀ If you plan to install speakers and cables, please
install them at this stage.
Do not connect cables for any other device.
ꢀ For the speaker installation method, refer to the
speaker installation procedure in the Plasma
Display operating instructions.
Locked
position
Unlocked
position
Set the lock bar in the
unlocked position.
Lock bar
112
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Wall Mount Unit: PDK-WM01
[507CMX : 427CMX]
5 Install the wall side metal fitting to the wall
Fix it firmly in place symmetrically to the left and right
(four or more locations).
7 Fine adjustment of the left-right tilt of the Plasma
Display.
If the Plasma Display is slightly tilted to the left or right
after it is installed on the wall, adjust this tilt by attaching
the adjustment metal fitting (at lone location on the
right and on the left).
Wall strength and material determines the type of
screws and bolts (sold separately) needed for this
installation.
Insert the tilt adjustment metal fitting in the notch on
the top surface of the PDP side metal fitting that is
tilted downward. Attach it by rotating the screw.
1 Rotate the screw until the gap between the wall
side metal fitting and the tilt adjustment metal
fitting disappears. When the gap between the
wall side metal fitting and the tilt adjustment
metal fitting has disappeared, the screw becomes
difficult to rotate and begins to lift up the Plasma
Display.
Note
Chack the strength of the wall, columns, etc. before
beginning the installation.
2 Rotate the screw to adjust the tilt.
Tilt adjustment
metal fitting
Screw head
6 Hang the hook of the PDP side metal fitting on the
wall side metal fitting
1 Hang the hook on the ceiling surface part of the
PDP side metal fitting on the wall side metal
fitting.
2 Raise the lock bar to attach the Plasma Display.
Make sure that the lock bar is fully lowered.
Hook of the PDP side
metal fitting
Tilt adjustment
metal fitting
1
2
Note
The range that the tilt can be adjusted by the screw
is about 5 mm (3/16 inch). The screw rotates about
three times. Be careful not to over-rotate the screw.
If the screw is turned too much, the metal fitting
may be damaged.
Hang the hook.
Lift the lock bar to its
unlocked position.
ꢀ Always have at least two people do this task.
ꢀ Check that the hook has been hung before
lifting the Plasma Display.
Caution
Note
ꢀ If speakers are attached, do not hold the
speakers to perform this attachment.
ꢀ Be careful that the wiring etc. is not caught in the
metal fitting or on the Plasma Display. When a
speaker is attached, the wiring is easily caught
between the wall and the speaker.
113
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Wall Mount Unit: PDK-WM01
[507CMX : 427CMX]
8 With the lock bar in the lock position, fix the lock plate
firmly in place with push rivet and the anchor screw
(M6 x 14 mm (9/16 inch)) (one location: left and right
sides) removed in step 1 (one location: left and right
4.7.4 When removing the Plasma Display
Before beginning this procedure, turn off the
power to the Plasma Display and peripheral
sides).
devices. Remove the power plugs from the
outlets. Also remove connecting cables if
necessary.
Caution
• If there are speakers installed on both sides
Fix in place with the anchor screw (M6 x 14 mm (9/
16 inch)) removed in step 1 (*1).
1 Loosening the screw on the tilt adjustment metal
fitting.
Note
Removing the Plasma Display without removing the
tilt adjustment metal fitting (may scratch the wall).
Locked
position
Unlocked
position
Lock bar in the lock
position.
Anchor screw (*1)
2 Remove the push rivet and anchor screws that are
holding the lock plate. Then, remove the anchor
screws that are holding the PDP metal fitting (two
locations on the left and right).
Push rivet
Anchor screw
Anchor screw
Lock plate
3 Unlock the lock bar (two locations on the left and right).
Lock
bar
Locked
position
Unlocked
position
Set the lock bar in its
unlocked position
114
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[507CMX : 427CMX]
Wall Mount Unit: PDK-WM01
4 Raise the lock bar then pull the bottom of the Plasma
(Precautions when installing the hardware)
Display forward.
Firmly attach the safety wire to the attachment hole on
the Plasma Display. Anchor it firmly to the wall with a
bolt that extends through the structural wall.
Safety wire
Bolt
Raise the lock bar
(either the left or the
right side).
Pull out the bottom of
the Plasma Display.
Pull out the bottom of the Plasma Display
very carefully so that the hook on the PDP
side metal fitting is not displaced.
Caution
5 Raise to remove the Plasma Display.
Decorative panel/structural wall
* Illustration depicts PDP-507CMX model.
Raise and remove the Plasma Display.
Always have at least two people manage
this task.
Caution
115
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ceiling Mount Unit: PDK-5012
[507CMX : 427CMX]
4.8 Ceiling Mount Unit: PDK-5012
4.8.1 Specifications
External dimensions................. 1222 mm (W) × 1168 mm (H) × 300 mm (D)
(48-1/8 in. (W) × 45-31/32 in. (H) × 11-13/16 in. (D))
(mounting hardware and Plasma Display <PDP-507CMX>)
1022 mm (W) × 1062 mm (H) × 300 mm (D)
(40-1/4 in. (W) × 41-13/16 in. (H) × 11-13/16 in. (D))
(mounting hardware and Plasma Display <PDP-427CMX>)
Weight ....................................... 14.5 kg (32.0 lbs.) (mounting hardware only)
50.0 kg (110.2 lbs.) (mounting hardware and Plasma Display <PDP-507CMX>)
45.0 kg (99.2 lbs.) (mounting hardware and Plasma Display <PDP-427CMX>)
Adjustable range of angles ...... Horizontal to 25 degrees below horizontal, 45 degrees left/right
Material...................................... Steel pipe for general structure (STKM-R), STK, SPHC
Finish.......................................... Semi-matte black paint (Original Pioneer color)
Package dimensions................. 1035 mm (W) × 360 mm (H) × 540 mm (D)
(40-3/4 in. (W) × 14-3/16 in. (H) × 21-1/4 in. (D))
Package weight......................... 21.5 kg (47.4 lbs.)
Layers of packing...................... 10 layers
Components
PDP bracket ........................................................ × 1
Bolts M8.............................................................. × 6
Special screws .................................................... × 4
Hole cover ........................................................... × 1
Stencil (printed on the wrapping
material that is inside) ......................................... × 1
Installer's contact information (Japan only) ......... × 1
Operating instructions ......................................... × 1
The appropriate types of screws and other mounting hardware will depend on the strength and composition of the
ceiling. Purchase them separately.
✩ Operating Temperature Restrictions
• Ambient Temperature: 0 °C to 40 °C
✩ Operating Temperature Restrictions for Upside-Down Installations (*1, *2)
• Ambient temperature: 0 °C to 40 °C
• Other factors:
Maintain sufficient clearance between the display and the wall (at least 300 mm)
✩ Operating temperature restrictions for when the speaker system (PDP-S53-LR, PDP-S56-LR) is attached.
• Ambient temperature: 0 °C to 40 °C
*1
For this installation, set the ‘FAN CONTROL’ to ‘MAX’ as shown in “5.4.3 Adjustment and Setting in the Integrator Mode 14)
Cooling Fan Control Setting” (pg. 235).
When INPUT2 has been selected, use input compatible signal up to 1280x1024 (60 Hz) at ambient temperature condition of 0 °C
*2
to 35 °C.
116
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[507CMX : 427CMX]
Ceiling Mount Unit: PDK-5012
4.8.2 External Dimensions
7 When using Plasma Display PDP-507CMX
(Unit: mm)
4-ø13.5 x 22
241
ø70
ø60.5
216
131
145
67
Attachment holes
(six locations)
Center of
the display
98
Center of
the display
496
(530)
1222
This circle shows the path that the outermost part of
the Plasma Display follows when it is rotated on a
vertical axis after having been titled sideways by 25°.
This circle shows the path that the outermost part of
the Plasma Display follows when it is rotated on a
vertical axis after having been titled sideways by 25°.
117
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ceiling Mount Unit: PDK-5012
[507CMX : 427CMX]
7 When using Plasma Display PDP-427CMX
(Unit: mm)
φ240.5
4-φ13.5X22
φ
70
φ60.5
211
129
110
67
Attachment
holes
(6 locations)
98
496
(530)
1022
This circle shows the path that the outermost
part of the Plasma Display follows when it is
rotated on a vertical axis after having been
titled sideways by 25°.
This circle shows the path that the outermost
part of the Plasma Display follows when it is
rotated on a vertical axis after having been titled
sideways by 25°.
118
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ceiling Mount Unit: PDK-5012
[507CMX : 427CMX]
4.8.3 Installing the mounting hardware
1) Preparations
You will need the following tools. Make sure you have them at hand before beginning work.
• Phillips Head Screwdriver
• Hexagonal wrench (subtense 5 mm, for M6 bolts)
• Hexagonal wrench (subtense 6 mm, for M8 bolts)
You'll also need tools for ceiling work.
2) Install the mounting hardware
Select the installation site. Apply the supplied pattern to the ceiling, drill the holes, then mount the ceiling suspension
hardware. The appropriate types of screws and other display/mounting hardware depends upon the strength and
composition of the particular ceiling.
• Firmly tight all bolts.
• After attaching the mounting hardware but before mounting the Plasma Display, confirm the strength of the
mount portion of the ceiling.
• For additional safety, use the holes in the ceiling suspension hardware as shown.
[Use parts strong enough to support the weight of the display]
Anchor
Foundation ceiling
Hole
Ceiling suspension hardware
Bolt
Safety wire
(NOTE) Safety wires serve as important backups in keeping the unit securely
mounted.
1 Firmly attach the safety wire to the Plasma Display attachment
hole and pass it through the supporting column.
2 Push the safety wire out of the hole on the ceiling mounting
hardware then anchor it firmly to the foundation ceiling with a bolt.
119
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ceiling Mount Unit: PDK-5012
[507CMX : 427CMX]
4.8.4 Attach the Plasma Display
1 Attach the PDP bracket to the Plasma Display.
3 Attach the Plasma Display to the hanger.
Note
• Place a sheet or protective cover to protect the dis-
play from scratches or damage.
• Be sure to work on top of a flat table or similar sur-
face.
• Be careful that the PDP bracket is not upside down.
PDP bracket
Top side of Plasma Display
Hanger
4 Screw the Plasma Display to the hanger (at four
locations).
Plasma Display
2 Fix the Plasma Display to the PDP bracket with screws
(six locations).
Hexagonal bolts
([50] display, holes at six
locations)
Top side of Plasma Display
120
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ceiling Mount Unit: PDK-5012
[507CMX : 427CMX]
4.8.5 Angle setup
Left-right Adjustment
Vertical Adjustment
You can adjust it 45° to the left or right by loosening the
top screw.
You can adjust its vertical angle by loosening the screws
on the left and right sides (maximum adjustment of 25°
downwards from the vertical position).
Set the desired angle then tighten the screw.
Set it to the desired angle while supporting the Plasma Display. Retighten the loosened screws on the left and right
sides. The hole on the side indicates the angle (5° units).
Connecting cable
Detailed Angle Standard Diagram
(when coming out of the top
of the supporting column)
°
5
Connecting cable
(when coming out of
the hole)
°
10
°
Hole
15
°
20
To the connector on the Plasma Display
121
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[507CMX : 427CMX]
Mobile Cart: PDK-5014
4.9 Mobile Cart: PDK-5014
4.9.1 Specifications
External dimensions................. 1 1222 mm (W) × 1718 mm (H) × 710 mm (D)
(48-1/8 in. (W) × 67-5/8 in. (H) × 27-15/16 in. (D))
(when using the Plasma Display <PDP-507CMX>)
1 1022 mm (W) × 1655 mm (H) × 710 mm (D)
(40-1/4 in. (W) × 65-5/32 in. (H) × 27-15/16 in. (D))
(when using the Plasma Display <PDP-427CMX>)
2 1222 mm (W) × 1718 mm (H) × 730 mm (D)
(48-1/8 in. (W) × 67-5/8 in. (H) × 28-3/4 in. (D))
(when using the Plasma Display <PDP-507CMX>)
2 1022 mm (W) × 1655 mm (H) × 730 mm (D)
(40-1/4 in. (W) × 65-5/32 in. (H) × 28-3/4 in. (D))
(when using the Plasma Display <PDP-427CMX>)
Note) 1 : External dimensions of Serial No. 1 to 510 of PDK-5014
2 : External dimensions of Serial No. 511 and higher of PDK-5014
Weight ....................................... 43.0 kg (94.8 lbs.) (stand only)
78.5 kg (173.1 lbs.) (stand and Plasma Display <PDP-507CMX>)
73.5 kg (162 lbs.) (stand and Plasma Display <PDP-427CMX>)
Materials .................................... STKM (steel pipe) SPCC and SS41
Finish.......................................... Melamine baking finish (silver metallic)
Dimensions of packaging......... 1465 mm (W) × 200 mm (H) × 790 mm (D)
(57-11/16 in. (W) × 7-7/8 in. (H) × 31-3/32 in. (D))
(bracket, display stand section)
810 mm (W) × 295 mm (H) × 810 mm (D)
(31-7/8 in. (W) × 11-5/8 in. (H) × 31-7/8 in. (D))
(stand shelf, leg section)
Package weight......................... 38 kg (83.8 lbs.) (bracket, display stand section)
21 kg (46.3 lbs.) (stand shelf, leg section)
Layers of packing...................... 10 layers
Components
Display stand ....................................................... × 1
Rear cover ........................................................... × 1
Leg base.............................................................. × 1
Bracket ................................................................ × 1
Stand shelf .......................................................... × 1
Hexagonal bored bolts (M8 × 20 mm)............... × 10
Hexagonal bored bolts (M8 × 60 mm)................. × 4
Hexagonal wrench .............................................. × 1
Washers .............................................................. × 4
Plate spring washers ........................................... × 4
✩ Operating Temperature Restrictions
• Ambient Temperature: 0 °C to 40 °C
✩ Operating temperature restrictions for when the speaker system (PDP-S53-LR, PDP-S56-LR) is attached.
• Ambient temperature: 0 °C to 40 °C
122
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[507CMX : 427CMX]
Mobile Cart: PDK-5014
4.9.2 External Dimensions
7 When using Plasma Display PDP-507CMX
(Units: mm)
(673)
660
600
30
630 (Stand shelf)
(723)
1222
667
32
100
496
313
35
Note: Dimensions
720
1 : Compatible with Serial Nos. 1 to 510 of PDK-5014
1 440
2 430
1 220
2 230
60
2 : Compatible with Serial No. 511 and higher of PDK-5014
406
ø60
1 650
2 670
1 710
2 730
123
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Mobile Cart: PDK-5014
[507CMX : 427CMX]
7 When using Plasma Display PDP-427CMX
(Units: mm)
(673)
660
600
30
630
(Stand shelf)
(723)
1022
667
100
32
496
(Tilt angle)
313
35
720
Note: Dimensions
1 440
2 430
1 220
2 230
60
1 : Compatible with Serial Nos. 1 to 510 of PDK-5014
2 : Compatible with Serial No. 511 and higher of PDK-5014
406
ø60
1 650
2 670
1 710
2 730
124
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Mobile Cart: PDK-5014
[507CMX : 427CMX]
4.9.3 Disassembling the display stand
1 Remove the screws (four locations on the left and right
sides) then take off the bracket. For packing reasons,
the bracket is mounted at a different location then the
final installation location.
2 Remove the rear cover.
Screws
Do not take out the screws.
Bracket
Loosen the
finger screws.
Screws
Rear cover
4.9.4 How to install
In order to ensure safety during installation, always be sure to work with more than two people.
1 Assemble the unit
Attach the leg base to the display stand using the hexagonal bored bolts (M8 × 60 mm) so that the rear label faces
towards the back casters (shown in the figure below).
Note
For safety, alternately tighten each bolt two times or more until they are firmly fixed in place.
Label
Display stand
Leg base
Washer
Plate spring washer
Hexagonal bored bolts
(M8 × 60 mm)
Back casters
Support caster
125
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Mobile Cart: PDK-5014
[507CMX : 427CMX]
2 Attach bracket bolts to display stand
Attach the hexagonal bored bolts (M8 × 20 mm) to the display stand, being sure to leave a space of 5 to 6 millimeters
when doing so. These bolts may be attached at two different levels to allow a distance of 1350 mm or 1170 mm
from the floor to the center of the display panel.
Note
Do not place bracket bolts in the third set of screw holes from the top. These screw holes are used in Step 4 below.
Display stand
Hexagonal bored
bolts (M8 × 20 mm)
5 mm to 6 mm
3 Attach bracket to Plasma Display
Using the hexagonal bored bolts (M8 × 20 mm), attach the bracket to the rear of the Plasma Display by screwing the
bolts into the screw holes as the figure.
Note
• The Plasma Display should be placed on a blanket or other soft surface to avoid scratching or otherwise damaging
the surface of the display.
• For safety, alternately tighten each bolt two times or more until they are firmly fixed in place.
Hexagonal bored bolts
(M8 × 20 mm)
Bracket
Top side of Plasma Display
Plasma Display
126
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Mobile Cart: PDK-5014
[507CMX : 427CMX]
4 Mount a panel on the stand once the bracket has been attached
1. Align the holes on the protruding portion of the bracket onto the left and right bolts attached to the display stand.
2. Using two hexagonal bored bolts (M8 x 20 mm), attach the bracket to the left and right sides of the display stand.
Insert and screw the bolts into the screw holes located at the bottom of the protruding part of the bracket and the
screw holes of the display stand.
3. Screw the bolts of the protruding portion of the bracket firmly into place.
Note
For safety, alternately tighten each bolt two times or more until they are firmly fixed in place.
[Adjusting the angle of the Plasma Display
screen]
1,3
For easier viewing, angle it forwards by altering
the bracket attachment locations (5°).
1,3
2
To safely attach the brackets to the support columns,
be sure to always have two people do this task as
Caution shown in the drawing.
0°
5°
5 Attach the stand shelf to the display stand
Hold the stand shelf at a diagonal to the display stand and insert the upper portion of the hooked end of the shelf
brackets into the slits located on the display stand. Return the shelf to a horizontal position to fix it into place (shelf
withstand load: 20 kg).
Display stand
Hook
Insert the hook securely
into the slit.
Slits
127
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Mobile Cart: PDK-5014
[507CMX : 427CMX]
6 Adjust the support caster. When the mobile cart has
been placed into position, be sure to adjust the support
caster to fix into place.
8 Attach the rear cover. Attach the rear cover and fix it in
place by tightening the finger screws.
Be careful not to catch or pinch the cable with the rear
cover.
1. Turn the support caster in the direction indicated by
the arrow until the bottom of the caster touches
the mounting surface.
2. Turn the nut at the top of the caster in the direction
indicated by the arrow to fix the caster into place.
Support caster nut
Rear cover
Bottom of support
caster
Finger screw
7 Hang the cords from the hooks on the back of the
support columns.
Hook
128
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[507CMX : 427CMX]
Mobile Cart: PDK-5014
129
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PDP Bracket: PDK-5005
[507CMX]
4.10 PDP Bracket: PDK-5005
(Can be used only with the PDP-507CMX)
4.10.1 Specifications
External Dimensions .......... 1222 mm (W) × 736 mm (H) × 148 mm (D)
(48-1/8 in. (W) × 28-31/32 in. (H) × 5-13/16 in. (D))
(when mounted to the Plasma Display <PDP-507CMX>)
Weight ................................. 4.1 kg (9.0 lbs.) (mounting hardware only)
39.6 kg (87.3 lbs.) (mounting hardware and Plasma Display <PDP-507CMX>)
Material................................ steel pipe for general structure (STKM-R), SPHC
Finish.................................... Semi-matte black paint (Original Pioneer color)
Package dimensions........... 850 mm (W) × 110 mm (H) × 130 mm (D)
(33-15/32 in. (W) × 4-11/32 in. (H) × 5-1/8 in. (D))
Package weight................... 5.0 kg (11.0 lbs.)
Accessories
Vertical frames ...................................................... × 2
Horizontal frames .................................................. × 2
Monitor mount bolts ............................................. × 4
Plus/minus screw with washers (M5 x 50 mm).... × 8
Special eye bolts (M8 × 70 mm) ........................... × 4
Spring washer nuts for M8 ................................... × 8
Hexagonal nuts for M8.......................................... × 8
Large flat washers for M8 ..................................... × 8
Small washers for M8 ........................................... × 4
Operating instructions ........................................... × 1
Mount contractor contract form ............................ × 1
The appropriate types of screws and other mounting hardware will depend on the strength and composition of the
ceiling and walls. Prepare them separately.
For the operating temperature restrictions of the unit please refer to the “3.5 Special Installation (PDP-507CMX)
(pg. 35)” section
130
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PDP Bracket: PDK-5005
[507CMX]
4.10.2 External Dimensions
(Units: mm)
The mounting format is symmetrical from left to right and from top to bottom.
828
1222
83
798
63
34
608 (Special eye bolt mounting pitch)
455
20
8-ø9
148
131
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PDP Bracket: PDK-5005
[507CMX]
4.10.3 Assembly Procedure
1 Temporarily fasten the vertical a and horizontal b frames using all of the M5 plus/minus screws with washers e.
a
c
h
c
e
b
h
j
a
g
g
e
g
g
e
j
h
b
e
c
h
c
2 Attach the special eye bolts c to the spring washers h, and insert them into the appropriate holes. Secure the small
flat washers j and nuts g (For additional safety, use double nuts).
c
h
Spring washer
g
hexagonal nut (× 4)
Insofar as possible,
insert the bolt so that
the nut goes all the
way to its base.
j
g
View from below
1. Attach the special
eye bolts together
with the M8 nuts to
the main unit.
2. After passing the bolt
3. Tighten the nuts with
spanners.
4. For additional safety,
use double
through, secure it with
the small flat washer
and nut.
nuts(Tighten the two
nuts against each
other).
Never use special eye bolts except in the designated locations.
If they are used on the Plasma Display itself, internal damage may result.
Caution
132
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PDP Bracket: PDK-5005
[507CMX]
3 Place the bracket on a level table or platform for the final tightening of the bolts.
The tightening the screws on the vertical and
horizontal frames should be performed on a
level table, as illustrated, and after the
positions of the holes have been aligned.
Caution
<Wrong>
Table, etc.
If placed in this position, it will be difficult to align
the holes.
4 Place the Plasma Display face down on a secure table, as shown in the illustration, in such a way as to prevent it
from falling or getting scratched.
Warning
Place a sheet or protective cover to protect the display from scratches or damage.
PDP bracket
h
h
f
f
i
i
5 Place a large flat washer i on each of the designated holes. Tighten well the monitor mounting bolts f from above.
6 Place another large flat washer of each monitor mounting bolts. On top of these, mount the assembled PDP bracket.
Washers must be used. If the number and location of washers is incorrect, warping of the display
unit may result.
Caution
7 As the last step secure the M8 spring nuts h.
4.10.4 An example of use
The unit can be mounted to any of Pioneer's mounting
hardware while it is attached to the PDP bracket.
As illustrated, the bracket can be used as a handle for
moving and installation.
133
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PDP Bracket: PDK-5005
[507CMX]
4.10.5 Wire hanging
Note
When hanging by wires using eyebolts (Plasma Display facing sideways), the display will tilt forward by approximately
20 degrees due to its weight distribution. Therefore, take this into consideration in advance when hanging it by
wires.
20˚
Wire
Attach wires to the bolts, as indicated in the figure.
To attach the wires to the ceiling, secure two wires at
two independent points for safety.
Special eye
bolt
• To keep the Plasma Display main body from vibrating,
PDP bracket
fix the main body by attaching wire to the bottom bolt.
• Use wires strong enough to withstand a weight of
46.4 kg that is the total of the 35.5 kg of the Plasma
Display, the 4.1 kg of the PDP bracket, and the 3.4 kg
x 2 of the optional speakers.
Wire
During installation, strictly observe the related operating conditions in “3.5 Special installation (PDP-507CMX)
(pg. 35)”.
Use the Special eye bolt only at the specified locations.
Improper use of Special eye bolts within the Plasma Display main body may
damage the display's blind nut.
Caution
When hanging by wires etc., do not add any devices other than the Plasma Display, PDP
bracket, and the optional speakers nor hang it with a single wire, because there is a danger
that excessive load will be applied, damaging the equipment.
Caution
Do not attempt to correct tilt by applying downward load with the wires. Doing so may apply
excessive load upon and damage the wire connections and metal mounting fixture.
Caution
When installing the Plasma Display, do not use the handles as means of hanging the display.
NO!
134
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PDP Bracket: PDK-5005
[507CMX]
135
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Speaker System: PDP-S53-LR
[507CMX]
4.11 Speaker System: PDP-S53-LR
(Can be used only with the PDP-507CMX)
4.11.1 Specifications
External dimensions................. 90 mm (W) × 736 mm (H) × 96 mm (D) (Not including attachment plates; Qty: 1)
(3-17/32 in. (W) × 28-31/32 in. (H) × 3-25/32 in. (D))
When mounted to the Plasma Display <PDP-507CMX>:
1403 mm (W) × 736 mm (H) × 99 mm (D)
(55-1/4 in. (W) × 28-31/32 in. (H) × 3-29/32 in. (D))
Weight ....................................... 5.8 kg (12.8 lbs.)
41.3 kg (91.1 lbs.) (when mounted to the Plasma Display <PDP-507CMX>)
Dimensions of packaging......... 793 mm (W) × 276 mm (H) × 358 mm (D)
(31-7/32 in. (W) × 10-7/8 in. (H) × 14-3/32 in. (D))
Package weight......................... 7.9 kg (17.4 lbs.)
Model ......................................... 2-way, 3-speaker system (bass-reflection mode)
Woofer (for low tones) ....... 8 cm cone type × 2
Tweeter (for high tones) .... 5 cm cone type × 1
Nominal impedance ................. 6 Ω
Frequency Range ...................... 60 Hz to 35 000 Hz
Sensitivity.................................. 85 dB/W (at 1 m distance)
Permissible input:
Max. input............................ 60 W
Rated input .......................... 20 W
Layers of packing...................... 10 layers
Accessory parts (for two speakers)
Cushions ............................................................. × 2
Speaker cords ..................................................... × 2
Cord clampers ..................................................... × 2
Screws (M8) ........................................................ × 4
Operating instructions ......................................... × 1
Cautions
The sound may be irregular if there is a CRT type PC monitor close to the speakers. To prevent this, keep speakers
separated from the PC if you are using a CRT monitor.
136
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[507CMX]
Speaker System: PDP-S53-LR
4.11.2 External Dimensions (when mounted to the Plasma Display)
Unit: mm (inch)
99 (3-29/32) [Size of Plasma Display]
1403 (55-1/4)
90 (3-17/32)
90 (3-17/32)
58 (2-9/32)
137
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Speaker System: PDP-S53-LR
[507CMX]
(3) Fit the hooks at the top of the speakers over the
screws just inserted, then align the holes in the hooks
of the speakers over the screw holes at the bottom of
the Plasma Display and use the M8 screws to screw
loosely into place.
4.11.3 Installation on the Plasma Display
1) Installation procedure
Install the speaker system according to the steps (1)
through (4).
(1) Remove the seals from the cushions and then attach
the cushions to the sides of the speakers in the
locations indicated in the diagram below.
Cushions
Screws (M8)
(2) Screw the M8 screws loosely into the screw holes
located at the top of the Plasma Display (two locations).
(4) Tighten the screws just inserted firmly into place
(four locations).
Tighten the screws while pushing the speakers
lightly against the Plasma Display. Check to be sure
that all four screws have been screwed firmly into
place.
Screws (M8)
Warning
Never hold the speakers when speakers are
attached to the monitor to move the monitor. Doing
so might result in the monitor falling, and this in
turn might result in bodily injury.
138
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Speaker System: PDP-S53-LR
[507CMX]
2) Connect the cords
3) Care and Maintenance
(Turn off the power of all connected units before
connecting the cords.)
When the cabinet gets dirty...
• Wipe with a lit-free, soft, dry cloth.
If the cabinet is heavily soiled, soak a cloth in a neutral
detergent solution, wring well, and wipe the cabinet.
Remove any remaining moisture by wiping with a dry
colth.
If you want to use a chemical cloth for cleaning, read
any caution information provided with the chemical cloth
product.
• Do not use solvent such as thinner or benzine for
cleaning. These chemical can damage the surface finish,
deteriorating or stripping the coating.
Use the provided speaker cords to connect the
R/L speaker jacks of the monitor to the speaker jacks of
the speakers.
Once the cords have been connected, pull on the cords
lightly to make sure that they have been connected
firmly to the speaker jacks. An improper connection
might result in the sound being interrupted or the
appearance of noise in the output sound.
• To remove dust from the speaker nets, use a vacuum
cleaner’s. Avoid applying the vacuum cleaner hose
directly to the speakers without using a brush adapter
or using a nozzle adapter.
• To prevent damage to the cabinet and speaker nets, do
not scrach or hit them with hard objects. Also, do not
stab the speaker nets with sharp objects.
Do not apply volatile chemicals such as insecticide on
the cabinet. Avoid leaving a rubber or vinyl products in
contact with the cabinet for prolonged periods. The
surface finish can deteriorate or the coating may be
stripped off.
Cord clampers
Remove the seal from the rear of the cord
clampers, attach the clampers in the desired
position, and clamp the cords into place.
Note that the speaker cords have positive and
negative ends, and that you should be sure to
insert them correctly.
Black
Red
Press the button of the speaker jack and keep it pressed
down as you insert the wire of the speaker cord and then
release the button.
139
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Speaker System: PDP-S56-LR
[427CMX]
4.12 Speaker System: PDP-S56-LR
(Can be used only with the PDP-427CMX)
4.12.1 Specifications
External dimensions................. 90 mm (W) × 610 mm (H) × 94 mm (D) (Not including attachment plates; Qty: 1)
(3-17/32 in. (W) × 24-1/32 in. (H) × 3-11/16 in. (D))
When mounted to the Plasma Display <PDP-427CMX>:
1204 mm (W) × 610 mm (H) × 98 mm (D)
(47-13/32 in. (W) × 24-1/32 in. (H) × 3-27/32 in. (D))
Weight ....................................... 3.8 kg (8.4 lbs.)
34.3 kg (75.6 lbs.) (when mounted to the Plasma Display <PDP-427CMX>)
Dimensions of packaging......... 670 mm (W) × 266 mm (H) × 330 mm (D)
(26-3/8 in. (W) × 10-15/32 in. (H) × 13 in. (D))
Package weight......................... 6.2 kg (13.7 lbs.)
Model ......................................... 2-way, 3-speaker system (bass-reflection mode)
Woofer (for low tones) ....... 8 cm cone type × 1
Tweeter (for high tones) .... 5 cm cone type × 1
Nominal impedance ................. 6 Ω
Frequency Range ...................... 80 Hz to 20 000 Hz
Sensitivity.................................. 84 dB/W (at 1 m distance)
Permissible input:
Max. input............................ 30 W
Rated input .......................... 10 W
Layers of packing...................... 10 layers
Accessory parts (for 2 speakers)
Cushions ............................................................. × 2
Connection cords ................................................ × 2
Cord clampers ..................................................... × 2
Screws (M8) ........................................................ × 4
Operating instructions ......................................... × 1
Cautions
The sound may be irregular if there is a CRT type PC monitor close to the speakers. To prevent this, keep speakers
separated from the PC if you are using a CRT monitor.
140
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[427CMX]
Speaker System: PDP-S56-LR
4.12.2 External Dimensions (when mounted to the Plasma Display)
Units: mm (inch)
98 (3-27/32)
[Size of Plasma Display]
1204 (47-13/32)
90 (3-17/32)
90 (3-17/32)
54
(2-1/8)
141
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Speaker System: PDP-S56-LR
[427CMX]
(3)Fit the hooks at the top of the speakers over the screws
just inserted, then align the holes in the hooks of the
speakers over the screw holes at the bottom of the
Plasma Display and use the M8 screws to screw
loosely into place.
4.12.3 Installation on the Plasma Display
1) Installation procedure
Install the speaker system according to the steps (1)
through (4).
Notes
• The speakers are designed specifically for the left
(L) and right (R) sides of the Plasma Display. When
mounting them on the display, refer to the letters
(“L” and “R”) indicated on the speakers’ hooks.
• This speaker is of an antimagnetic design; however,
depending on its placement such as bringing the
speaker into the vicinity of a monitor other than a
Plasma Display, the speaker may cause irregular
noise or other effects. Should this occur, please move
the speaker away from the monitor.
(1)Remove the seals from the cushions and then attach
the cushions to the sides of the speakers in the
locations indicated in the diagram below.
Screws (M8)
(4)Tighten the screws just inserted firmly into place (four
locations).
* Tighten the screws while pushing the speakers lightly
against the Plasma Display. Check to be sure that all
four screws have been screwed firmly into place.
Cushions
(2)Screw the M8 screws loosely into the screw holes
located at the top of the Plasma Display (two locations).
Warning
Never hold the speakers when speakers are
attached to the monitor to move the monitor. Doing
so might result in the monitor falling, and this in
turn might result in bodily injury.
Screws (M8)
142
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[427CMX]
Speaker System: PDP-S56-LR
2) Connect the cords
3) Care and Maintenance
(Turn off the power of all connected units before
connecting the cords.)
When the cabinet gets dirty...
• Wipe with a lit-free, soft, dry cloth.
Connect the display’s SPEAKER R and L terminals with
the speakers’ terminals using the included connection
cords.
If the cabinet is heavily soiled, soak a cloth in a neutral
detergent solution, wring well, and wipe the cabinet.
Remove any remaining moisture by wiping with a dry
colth.
If you want to use a chemical cloth for cleaning, read
any caution information provided with the chemical cloth
product.
• Do not use solvent such as thinner or benzine for
cleaning. These chemical can damage the surface finish,
deteriorating or stripping the coating.
• To remove dust from the speaker nets, use a vacuum
cleaner’s. Avoid applying the vacuum cleaner hose
directly to the speakers without using a brush adapter
or using a nozzle adapter.
• To prevent damage to the cabinet and speaker nets, do
not scrach or hit them with hard objects. Also, do not
stab the speaker nets with sharp objects.
Cord Clamper
Do not apply volatile chemicals such as insecticide on
the cabinet. Avoid leaving a rubber or vinyl products in
contact with the cabinet for prolonged periods. The
surface finish can deteriorate or the coating may be
stripped off.
Remove the seal from the rear of the cord
clampers, attach the clampers in the desired
position, and clamp the cords into place.
After connecting the speaker terminals with the connec-
tion cords, confirm that the cords are connected at the
terminal securely by tugging on the cords. A loose con-
nection may cause sound dropouts or noise.
There is polarity ª · with the conductor of each
connection cord.
Connect each conductor to the correct terminal.
While holding the button of each speaker terminal,
insertaconductor of the connection cord.
143
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before Beginning Adjustment/Setting
5.1 Before Beginning Adjustment
There are three methods for adjusting this display:
• Main control panel
• Remote control
• Personal computer (RS-232C control)
Carefully read and gain a good understanding of this section before beginning adjustment.
Items that apply only when a PDA-5003 or PDA-5004 is installed, are indicated with a ‘#’.
5.1.1 Operation Mode
This display is divided into the following four operating modes.
(Note 2)
Power management
Power standby state
standby state
ON indicator flashes
No input
STANDBY/ON
<PON>
<POF>
INPUT1 to INPUT5
Normal operation mode
MENU
1
Press for three
seconds or more.
(Note 1)
MENU
DISPLAY
DISPLAY
MENU
Menu Mode
4
RS-232C Adjustment
2
3
Integrator Mode
indicates the operation modes and states
indicates button controls on the remote control or main-control panel
indicates controls by RS-232C commands
<
>
(Note 1) Refer to section 5.4.1, “About the Integrator Mode” (pg. 214).
(Note 2) Power management standby state exists only when power management is set.
1 Normal Operation Mode
This mode is for displaying signals.
In this mode the following basic controls are available:
• Switching to the power standby state
• Switching the input
• Switching the screen
• Adjusting the volume
• Muting the sound (remote control only)
• Setting the AUTO SET UP
• Applying the POINT ZOOM (remote control only)
• Accessing Multi screens (remote control only)
• Activating the menu mode or the integrator mode
In addition, some control via RS-232C commands is possible (Refer to section 5.5.5, “List of RS-232C Commands”
(pg. 267)).
2 Menu Mode
This mode is for adjusting the image quality, changing the screen position, and assigning various settings.
For details, refer to section 5.3, “Menu Mode” (pg. 173).
In this mode, it is possible to change adjustment data within a limited range. These adjustments are based on
values set in the integrator mode or RS-232C commands (to be described later).
144 For details, refer to section 5.3, “Menu Mode” (pg. 173).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before Beginning Adjustments
3 Integrator Mode
This mode provides an adjustment function for integrator options.
This mode has white-balance adjustment and various detailed settings in addition to the items in the menu mode.
For details, refer to section 5.4, “Integrator Mode” (pg. 214).
4 RS-232C Adjustment
In this mode, a personal computer is used to perform various adjustments and settings.
There are some items that can only be configured in this mode.
Note
When connecting multiple sets and in this mode, assign an ID before making adjustments or settings.
For details, refer to section 5.5, “RS-232C Adjustment” (pg. 262).
5.1.2 Combined Use of the Remote Control, Main-control Panel, and RS-232C Commands
• The remote control and main-control panel can be operated together.
(Example) It is possible to access the Menu Mode using the main-control panel then perform an adjustment
using the remote control.
• With the remote-control (or main-control panel) buttons and RS-232C commands, the most resent control has priority.
145
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before Beginning Adjustments
5.1.3 List of Input Correspondence Signals
1) Input correspondence signals (personal computer signals)
INPUT1
[PDP-507CMX]
: Not available.
Remarks
Refresh rate
Screen size (Dot x line)
Resolution
(Dot x Line)
Vertical
Horizontal
DOT BY DOT
4:3
FULL
640x400
720x400
70.1 Hz
31.5 kHz
NEC PC-9800
NEC PC-9800
640x400
720x400
1365x768
1365x768
70.1 Hz
31.5 kHz
85.1 Hz
59.9 Hz
37.9 kHz
31.5 kHz
640x480
640x480
1024x768
1365x768
66.7 Hz
72.8 Hz
75 Hz
35.0 kHz
37.9 kHz
37.5 kHz
43.3 kHz
51.1 kHz
61.3 kHz
31.0 kHz
Apple Macintosh 13”
85 Hz
100.4 Hz
120.4 Hz
60 Hz
I/O DATA
I/O DATA
848x480
852x480
800x600
848x480
852x480
800x600
1365x768
1365x768
1365x768
60 Hz
31.7 kHz
35.2 kHz
I/O DATA
56.3 Hz
1024x768
1024x768
60.3 Hz
72.2 Hz
75 Hz
85.1 Hz
99.8 Hz
120 Hz
74.6 Hz
37.9 kHz
48.1 kHz
46.9 kHz
53.7 kHz
63.0 kHz
75.7 kHz
49.7 kHz
I/O DATA
I/O DATA
Apple Macintosh 16”
832x624
832x624
1365x768
1365x768
1024x768
60 Hz
48.4 kHz
1024x768
60 Hz
70.1 Hz
49.7 kHz
56.5 kHz
Work station (SGI)
75 Hz
(74.9 Hz)
85 Hz
100.6 Hz
119.4 Hz
56.2 Hz
60.0 kHz
(60.2 kHz)
68.7 kHz
80.5 kHz
95.5 kHz
45.1 kHz
( ) indicates
Apple Macintosh 19”
I/O DATA
1280x768
1280x768
1360x768
1365x768
59.8 Hz
69.8 Hz
60 Hz
48 kH z
56 kH z
47.7 kHz
1360x768
1376x768
1280x800
1280x854
1152x864
I/O DATA
I/O DATA
CVT
1365x768
1365x768
1365x768
1365x768
1365x768
59.9 Hz
59.8 Hz
60 Hz
48.3 kHz
49.7 kHz
53.1 kHz
53.7 kHz
PC
60 Hz
1024x768
72 Hz
75 Hz
75.1 Hz
64.9 kHz
67.5 kHz
68.7 kHz
1152x870
1152x900
Apple Macintosh 21”
Sun Microsystems LO
Sun Microsystems HI
1024x768
1024x768
1365x768
1365x768
66 Hz
76 Hz
61.8 kHz
71.7 kHz
146
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before Beginning Adjustments
Screen size (Dot x line)
Refresh rate
Resolution
(Dot x Line)
Remarks
Vertical
Horizontal
DOT BY DOT
4:3
FULL
1440x900
59.9 Hz
55.9 kHz
Apple Macintosh 17”
1365x768
1365x768
1280x960
60 Hz
60.0 kHz
1024x768
1024x768
85 Hz
60 Hz
85.9 kHz
63.9 kHz
1280x1024
Work station (SGI)
1365x768
64.0 kHz
64.6 kHz
75.1 kHz
78.1 kHz
80.0 kHz
81.1 kHz
91.1 kHz
108.5 kHz
65.3 kHz
60 Hz
60 Hz
71.2 Hz
72 Hz
75 Hz
76.1 Hz
85 Hz
Work station (EWS4800)
Work station (EWS4800)
Work station (HP)
Work station (SUN)
I/O DATA
100.1 Hz
60 Hz
1400x1050
1024x768
1024x768
1365x768
74.9 Hz
85 Hz
60 Hz
82.3 kHz
93.9 kHz
65.3 kHz
1680x1050
1600x1200
1365x768
1365x768
60 Hz
75.0 kHz
65 Hz
70 Hz
75 Hz
85 Hz
59.9 Hz
81.3 kHz
87.5 kHz
93.8 kHz
106.3 kHz
74.6 kHz
1920x1200
CVT
CVT
1365x768
1365x768
1920x1200RB*
60 Hz
74.0 kHz
: Optimal picture. Adjustment of picture position, refresh rate, phase etc., may be necessary
: Picture will be enlarged but some fine detail will be hard to see.
: Simple reproduction. Fine detail will not be reproduced.
RB*: Abbreviation for Reduce Blanking that is set by CVT.
INPUT2
[PDP-507CMX]
: Not available.
Screen size (Dot x line)
Refresh rate
Resolution
(Dot x Line)
Remarks
Vertical
Horizontal
DOT BY DOT
4:3
FULL
720x400
70.1 Hz
31.5 kHz
NEC PC-9800
720x400
640x480
1365x768
85.1 Hz
59.9 Hz
37.9 kHz
31.5 kHz
640x480
1024x768
1365x768
72.8 Hz
75 Hz
85 Hz
100.4 Hz
120.4 Hz
37.9 kHz
37.5 kHz
43.3 kHz
51.1 kHz
61.3 kHz
848x480
852x480
800x600
60 Hz
31.0 kHz
31.7 kHz
35.2 kHz
848x480
852x480
800x600
1365x768
1365x768
1365x768
60 Hz
56.3 Hz
1024x768
60.3 Hz
72.2 Hz
75 Hz
85.1 Hz
99.8 Hz
120 Hz
37.9 kHz
48.1 kHz
46.9 kHz
53.7 kHz
63.0 kHz
75.7 kHz
147
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before Beginning Adjustments
: Not available.
Remarks
Refresh rate
Screen size (Dot x line)
Resolution
(Dot x Line)
Vertical
Horizontal
DOT BY DOT
4:3
FULL
1024x768
60 Hz
48.4 kHz
1024x768
1280x768
1360x768
1365x768
60 Hz
70.1 Hz
75 Hz
49.7 kHz
56.5 kHz
60.0 kHz
68.7 kHz
80.5 kHz
95.5 kHz
Work station (SGI)
85 Hz
100.6 Hz
119.4 Hz
56.2 Hz
1280x768
45.1 kHz
1365x768
48 kH z
56 kH z
59.8 Hz
69.8 Hz
59.8 Hz
1280x800
1280x854
1360x768
1376x768
1152x864
49.7 kHz
1365x768
1365x768
1365x768
1365x768
1365x768
53.1 kHz
60 Hz
60 Hz
47.7 kHz
48.3 kHz
53.7 kHz
I/O DATA
I/O DATA
59.9 Hz
60 Hz
1024x768
1024x768
64.9 kHz
67.5 kHz
72 Hz
75 Hz
66 Hz
1152x900
Sun Microsystems LO
61.8 kHz
1365x768
Sun Microsystems HI
Apple Macintosh17”
71.7 kHz
55.9 kHz
76 Hz
59.9 Hz
1440x900
1280x960
1365x768
1365x768
60 Hz
60.0 kHz
1024x768
1024x768
85 Hz
60 Hz
85.9 kHz
63.9 kHz
1280x1024
Work station (SGI)
1365x768
60 Hz
60 Hz
71.2 Hz
72 Hz
64.0 kHz
64.6 kHz
75.1 kHz
78.1 kHz
80.0 kHz
Work station (EWS4800)
Work station (EWS4800)
Work station (HP)
75 Hz
76.1 Hz
85 Hz
60 Hz
Work station (SUN)
81.1 kHz
91.1 kHz
65.3 kHz
1400x1050
1024x768
1024x768
1365x768
74.9 Hz
60 Hz
82.3 kHz
65.3 kHz
1680x1050
1920x1080
1365x768
1365x768
50 Hz
56.2 kHz
60 Hz
60 Hz
67.5 kHz
75.0 kHz
1600x1200
CVT
1365x768
1365x768
1920x1200RB*
60 Hz
74.0 kHz
: Optimal picture. Adjustment of picture position, refresh rate, phase etc., may be necessary.
: Picture will be enlarged but some fine detail will be hard to see.
: Simple reproduction. Fine detail will not be reproduced.
RB*: Abbreviation for Reduce Blanking that is set by CVT.
Note
In rare cases, the picture may not translate properly when switching between compatible signal formats on the output device (PC, etc.).
Should this happen, turn off the power and then turn it back on again.
148
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before Beginning Adjustments
INPUT1
[PDP-427CMX]
: Not available.
Refresh rate
Screen size (Dot x line)
Resolution
(Dot x Line)
Remarks
Vertical
Horizontal
DOT BY DOT
4:3
FULL
640x400
70.1 Hz
31.5 kHz
NEC PC-9800
1024x768
1024x768
720x400
70.1 Hz
31.5 kHz
NEC PC-9800
85.1 Hz
59.9 Hz
37.9 kHz
31.5 kHz
640x480
768x768
1024x768
Apple Macintosh 13”
66.7 Hz
72.8 Hz
75 Hz
35.0 kHz
37.9 kHz
37.5 kHz
43.3 kHz
51.1 kHz
61.3 kHz
31.0 kHz
85 Hz
100.4 Hz
120.4 Hz
60 Hz
I/O DATA
I/O DATA
848x480
852x480
800x600
1024x768
1024x768
1024x768
60 Hz
31.7 kHz
35.2 kHz
I/O DATA
56.3 Hz
768x768
60.3 Hz
72.2 Hz
75 Hz
85.1 Hz
99.8 Hz
120 Hz
74.6 Hz
37.9 kHz
48.1 kHz
46.9 kHz
53.7 kHz
63.0 kHz
75.7 kHz
49.7kHz
I/O DATA
I/O DATA
832x624
Apple Macintosh 16”
768x768
768x768
1024x768
1024x768
60 Hz
48.4 kHz
1024x768
60 Hz
70.1 Hz
49.7 kHz
56.5 kHz
Work station (SGI)
75 Hz
(74.9 Hz)
85 Hz
100.6 Hz
119.4 Hz
56.2 Hz
60.0 kHz
(60.2 kHz)
68.7 kHz
80.5 kHz
95.5 kHz
45.1 kHz
( ) indicates
Apple Macintosh 19”
I/O DATA
1280x768
1024x768
59.8 Hz
69.8 Hz
60 Hz
48 kHz
56 kHz
47.7 kHz
1360x768
1376x768
1280x800
1280x854
1152x864
I/O DATA
I/O DATA
CVT
1024x768
1024x768
1024x768
1024x768
1024x768
59.9 Hz
59.8 Hz
60 Hz
48.3 kHz
49.7 kHz
53.1 kHz
53.7 kHz
PC
60 Hz
768x768
72 Hz
75 Hz
75.1 Hz
64.9 kHz
67.5 kHz
68.7 kHz
1152x870
1152x900
Apple Macintosh 21”
Sun Microsystems LO
Sun Microsystems HI
768x768
768x768
1024x768
1024x768
66 Hz
76 Hz
61.8 kHz
71.7 kHz
149
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before Beginning Adjustments
Refresh rate
Resolution
Screen size (Dot x line)
4:3
Remarks
(Dot x Line)
FULL
Vertical
DOT BY DOT
Horizontal
1440x900
59.9 Hz
55.9 kHz
Apple Macintosh 17”
1024x768
1024x768
1280x960
60 Hz
60.0 kHz
768x768
720x768
85 Hz
60 Hz
85.9 kHz
64.0 kHz
1280x1024
Work station (SGI)
1024x768
60 Hz
71.2 Hz
72 Hz
75 Hz
76.1 Hz
85 Hz
64.6 kHz
75.1 kHz
78.1 kHz
80.0 kHz
81.1 kHz
91.1 kHz
108.5 kHz
65.3 kHz
Work station (EWS4800)
Work station (EWS4800)
Work station (HP)
Work station (SUN)
I/O DATA
100.1 Hz
60 Hz
1400x1050
768x768
768x768
1024x768
75 Hz
85 Hz
60 Hz
82.3 kHz
93.9 kHz
65.3 kHz
1680x1050
1600x1200
1024x768
1024x768
60 Hz
75.0 kHz
65 Hz
70 Hz
75 Hz
85 Hz
59.9 Hz
81.3 kHz
87.5 kHz
93.8 kHz
106.3 kHz
74.6 kHz
1920x1200
CVT
CVT
1024x768
1024x768
1920x1200RB*
60 Hz
74.0 kHz
: Optimal picture. Adjustment of picture position, refresh rate, phase etc., may be necessary
: Picture will be enlarged but some fine detail will be hard to see.
: Simple reproduction. Fine detail will not be reproduced.
RB*: Abbreviation for Reduce Blanking that is set by CVT.
INPUT2
[PDP-427CMX]
: Not available.
Refresh rate
Screen size (Dot x line)
4:3
Resolution
(Dot x Line)
Remarks
FULL
Vertical
DOT BY DOT
Horizontal
640x480
59.9 Hz
31.5 kHz
768x768
1024x768
72.8 Hz
75 Hz
85 Hz
100.4 Hz
120.4 Hz
70.1 Hz
37.9 kHz
37.5 kHz
43.3 kHz
51.1 kHz
61.3 kHz
31.5 kHz
720x400
NEC PC-9800
1024x768
85.1 Hz
60 Hz
37.9 kHz
31.0 kHz
848x480
852x480
800x600
1024x768
1024x768
1024x768
60 Hz
31.7 kHz
35.2 kHz
56.3 Hz
768x768
60.3 Hz
72.2 Hz
75 Hz
85.1 Hz
99.8 Hz
120 Hz
37.9 kHz
48.1 kHz
46.9 kHz
53.7 kHz
63.0 kHz
75.7 kHz
150
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before Beginning Adjustments
: Not available.
Refresh rate
Screen size (Dot x line)
Resolution
(Dot x Line)
Remarks
Vertical
Horizontal
DOT BY DOT
4:3
FULL
1024x768
60 Hz
48.4 kHz
1024x768
768x768
60 Hz
70.1 Hz
75 Hz
85 Hz
100.6 Hz
56.2 Hz
49.7 kHz
56.5 kHz
60.0 kHz
68.7 kHz
80.5 kHz
45.1 kHz
Work station (SGI)
1280x768
1024x768
59.8 Hz
69.8 Hz
59.8 Hz
48 kHz
56 kHz
49.7 kHz
1280x800
1280x854
1360x768
1376x768
1152x864
1024x768
1024x768
1024x768
1024x768
1024x768
60 Hz
60 Hz
53.1 kHz
47.7 kHz
48.3 kHz
53.7 kHz
I/O DATA
I/O DATA
59.9 Hz
60 Hz
768x768
768x768
72 Hz
75 Hz
66 Hz
64.9 kHz
67.5 kHz
61.8 kHz
1152x900
Work station (SUN)
1024x768
76 Hz
59.9 Hz
71.7 kHz
55.9 kHz
Work station (SUN)
Apple Macintosh17”
1440x900
1280x960
1024x768
1024x768
60 Hz
60.0 kHz
768x768
720x768
85 Hz
60 Hz
85.9 kHz
64.0 kHz
1280x1024
Work station (SGI)
1024x768
60 Hz
71.2 Hz
72 Hz
76.1 Hz
75 Hz
64.6 kHz
75.1 kHz
78.1 kHz
81.1 kHz
80.0 kHz
91.1 kHz
65.3 kHz
Work station (EWS4800)
Work station (EWS4800)
Work station (HP)
Work station (SUN)
85 Hz
60 Hz
1400x1050
1680x1050
1920x1080
768x768
768x768
1024x768
1024x768
1024x768
60 Hz
50 Hz
65.3 kHz
56.2 kHz
60 Hz
60 Hz
67.5 kHz
75.0 kHz
1600x1200
1024x768
1024x768
1920x1200RB*
60 Hz
74.0 kHz
CVT
: Optimal picture. Adjustment of picture position, refresh rate, phase etc., may be necessary.
: Picture will be enlarged but some fine detail will be hard to see.
: Simple reproduction. Fine detail will not be reproduced.
RB*: Abbreviation for Reduce Blanking that is set by CVT.
Note
In rare cases, the picture may not translate properly when switching between compatible signal formats on the output device (PC, etc.).
Should this happen, turn off the power and then turn it back on again.
151
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before Beginning Adjustments
2) Screen size
Screen size
Unit: % (percent)
Remarks
Personal computer signal
DOT BY DOT
This screen size exists for a personal
computer signal when the input signals a
less than the pixels of the plasma display.
For details, refer to the correspondence
signal table.
100
The input signal corresponds 1:1 with the
pixels of the Plasma Display for an accurate
reproduction.
100
PDP-427CMX:
100
100
This unit is designed with horizontally oblong
elements, with the result that the image
displayed will appear more oblong than the
original input signal.
4:3
100
For a 4:3 source, roundness can be accurately
reproduced (In order to prevent burning of the
screen, this screen size should not be used
unless required).
100
100
100
100
FULL
This is for wide-screen video (squeeze) (For a
16:9 source, roundness is nearly accurate).
100
100
100
• The screen size settings are stored in memory for each function and for each input signal. Up to eight (8) sizes can be stored in
memory for each function.
152
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before Beginning Adjustments
3) Input correspondence signals (video signals) # (Applicable only when a PDA-5003/PDA-5004 is installed.)
INPUT1, INPUT5 #
: Not available.
Refresh rate
Horizontal
Screen size
ZOOM WIDE
Remarks
Signal format
Vertical
14:9
2.35:1
4:3
FULL
fV
(Hz)
fH
(kHz)
Component
RGB
625i (576i)/SDTV
1125i (1080i)/HDTV
625p (576p)/SDTV
750p (720p)/HDTV
1125p (1080p)/HDTV
1250p/HDTV
15.625
28.13
31.25
37.50
56.20
62.50
15.734
31.5
Component
RGB
Component
RGB
50
Component
RGB
*1
*1
*1
*1
Component
RGB
Component
RGB
Component
RGB
525i (480i)/SDTV
525p (480p)/SDTV
Component
RGB
1125i (1080i)/HDTV
1125i (1035i)/HDTV
Component
RGB
33.75
45.0
60
Component
RGB
750p (720p)/HDTV
*1
*1
Component
RGB
1125p (1080p)/HDTV
67.5
*1: Some visual distortion may occur depending on the combination of connected components.
INPUT2 #
: Not available.
Remarks
1125i(1080i)/HDTV
Screen size
Vertical
Horizontal
(kHz)
Signal
format
fV
(Hz)
fH
14:9
2.35:1
4:3
FULL
ZOOM
WIDE
28.13
31.25
37.50
31.5
33.75
45.0
RGB
RGB
RGB
RGB
RGB
RGB
625p(576p)/SDTV
750p(720p)/HDTV
525p(480p)/SDTV
1125i(1080i)/HDTV
750p(720p)/HDTV
50
60
The following signals are not formally supported but can be displayed (not recorded in EDID data).
Screen size
Horizontal
(kHz)
Signal
format
Vertical
Remarks
625i(576i)/SDTV
fH
fV
(Hz)
4:3
14:9
2.35:1
FULL
ZOOM
WIDE
15.6
RGB
RGB
RGB
RGB
RGB
RGB
1125p(1080p)/HDTV
525i(480i)/SDTV
525p(480p)x640 dot/SDTV
1125p(1080p)/HDTV
1250p/HDTV
50
56.25
15.8
31.5
67.5
62.5
60
50
*May not be displayed accurately depending on the connected device
153
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before Beginning Adjustments
INPUT3 #
Screen size
Signal Format
Remark
4 : 3
FULL
‡
ZOOM
WIDE
CINEMA
14:9
‡
2.35:1
NTSC
PAL
S-Video (Y/C)
S-Video (Y/C)
S-Video (Y/C)
S-Video (Y/C)
S-Video (Y/C)
S-Video (Y/C)
‡
‡
‡
‡
‡
‡
‡
‡
‡
‡
‡
‡
‡
‡
‡
‡
‡
‡
‡
‡
‡
‡
‡
‡
‡
‡
‡
‡
‡
‡
‡
‡
SECAM
4.43 NTSC
PAL M
PAL N
‡
‡
‡
‡
‡
‡
‡
‡
INPUT4 #
Screen size
Signal Format
Remark
4 : 3
FULL
ZOOM
WIDE
CINEMA
14:9
2.35:1
NTSC
PAL
Composite
Composite
Composite
Composite
Composite
Composite
‡
‡
‡
‡
‡
‡
‡
‡
‡
‡
‡
‡
‡
‡
‡
‡
‡
‡
‡
‡
‡
‡
‡
‡
‡
‡
‡
‡
‡
‡
‡
‡
‡
‡
‡
‡
‡
‡
‡
‡
‡
‡
SECAM
4.43 NTSC
PAL M
PAL N
• ‘UNDERSCAN’ is for display-screen sizes other than those given in the table above. This size can be set using ‘PRO
USE’ in the integrator mode.
154
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before Beginning Adjustments
4) Input correspondence signals (personal computer signals)
INPUT1, INPUT5 # (Applicable only when a PDA-5003/PDA-5004 is installed.)
[PDP-507CMX]
: Not available.
Remarks
Refresh rate
Screen size (Dot x line)
Resolution
(Dot x Line)
Vertical
Horizontal
DOT BY DOT
4:3
FULL
640x400
720x400
70.1 Hz
31.5 kHz
NEC PC-9800
NEC PC-9800
640x400
720x400
1365x768
1365x768
70.1 Hz
31.5 kHz
85.1 Hz
59.9 Hz
37.9 kHz
31.5 kHz
640x480
640x480
1024x768
1365x768
66.7 Hz
72.8 Hz
75 Hz
35.0 kHz
37.9 kHz
37.5 kHz
43.3 kHz
51.1 kHz
61.3 kHz
31.0 kHz
Apple Macintosh 13”
85 Hz
100.4 Hz
120.4 Hz
60 Hz
I/O DATA
I/O DATA
848x480
852x480
800x600
848x480
852x480
800x600
1365x768
1365x768
1365x768
60 Hz
31.7 kHz
35.2 kHz
I/O DATA
56.3 Hz
1024x768
1024x768
60.3 Hz
72.2 Hz
75 Hz
85.1 Hz
99.8 Hz
120 Hz
74.6 Hz
37.9 kHz
48.1 kHz
46.9 kHz
53.7 kHz
63.0 kHz
75.7 kHz
49.7 kHz
I/O DATA
I/O DATA
Apple Macintosh 16”
832x624
832x624
1365x768
1365x768
1024x768
60 Hz
48.4 kHz
1024x768
60 Hz
70.1 Hz
49.7 kHz
56.5 kHz
Work station (SGI)
75 Hz
(74.9 Hz)
85 Hz
100.6 Hz
119.4 Hz
56.2 Hz
60.0 kHz
(60.2 kHz)
68.7 kHz
80.5 kHz
95.5 kHz
45.1 kHz
( ) indicates
Apple Macintosh 19”
I/O DATA
1280x768
1280x768
1360x768
1365x768
59.8 Hz
69.8 Hz
60 Hz
48 kH z
56 kH z
47.7 kHz
1360x768
1376x768
1280x800
1280x854
1152x864
I/O DATA
I/O DATA
CVT
1365x768
1365x768
1365x768
1365x768
1365x768
59.9 Hz
59.8 Hz
60 Hz
48.3 kHz
49.7 kHz
53.1 kHz
53.7 kHz
PC
60 Hz
1024x768
72 Hz
75 Hz
75.1 Hz
64.9 kHz
67.5 kHz
68.7 kHz
1152x870
1152x900
Apple Macintosh 21”
Sun Microsystems LO
Sun Microsystems HI
1024x768
1024x768
1365x768
1365x768
66 Hz
76 Hz
61.8 kHz
71.7 kHz
155
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before Beginning Adjustments
Screen size (Dot x line)
Refresh rate
Resolution
(Dot x Line)
Remarks
Vertical
Horizontal
DOT BY DOT
4:3
FULL
1440x900
59.9 Hz
55.9 kHz
Apple Macintosh 17”
1365x768
1365x768
1280x960
60 Hz
60.0 kHz
1024x768
1024x768
85 Hz
60 Hz
85.9 kHz
63.9 kHz
1280x1024
Work station (SGI)
1365x768
64.0 kHz
64.6 kHz
75.1 kHz
78.1 kHz
80.0 kHz
81.1 kHz
91.1 kHz
108.5 kHz
65.3 kHz
60 Hz
60 Hz
71.2 Hz
72 Hz
75 Hz
76.1 Hz
85 Hz
Work station (EWS4800)
Work station (EWS4800)
Work station (HP)
Work station (SUN)
I/O DATA
100.1 Hz
60 Hz
1400x1050
1024x768
1024x768
1365x768
74.9 Hz
85 Hz
60 Hz
82.3 kHz
93.9 kHz
65.3 kHz
1680x1050
1600x1200
1365x768
1365x768
60 Hz
75.0 kHz
65 Hz
70 Hz
75 Hz
85 Hz
59.9 Hz
81.3 kHz
87.5 kHz
93.8 kHz
106.3 kHz
74.6 kHz
1920x1200
CVT
CVT
1365x768
1365x768
1920x1200RB*
60 Hz
74.0 kHz
: Optimal picture. Adjustment of picture position, refresh rate, phase etc., may be necessary
: Picture will be enlarged but some fine detail will be hard to see.
: Simple reproduction. Fine detail will not be reproduced.
RB*: Abbreviation for Reduce Blanking that is set by CVT.
INPUT2
[PDP-507CMX]
: Not available.
Screen size (Dot x line)
Refresh rate
Resolution
(Dot x Line)
Remarks
Vertical
Horizontal
DOT BY DOT
4:3
FULL
720x400
70.1 Hz
31.5 kHz
NEC PC-9800
720x400
640x480
1365x768
85.1 Hz
59.9 Hz
37.9 kHz
31.5 kHz
640x480
1024x768
1365x768
72.8 Hz
75 Hz
85 Hz
100.4 Hz
120.4 Hz
37.9 kHz
37.5 kHz
43.3 kHz
51.1 kHz
61.3 kHz
848x480
852x480
800x600
60 Hz
31.0 kHz
31.7 kHz
35.2 kHz
848x480
852x480
800x600
1365x768
1365x768
1365x768
60 Hz
56.3 Hz
1024x768
60.3 Hz
72.2 Hz
75 Hz
85.1 Hz
99.8 Hz
120 Hz
37.9 kHz
48.1 kHz
46.9 kHz
53.7 kHz
63.0 kHz
75.7 kHz
156
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before Beginning Adjustments
: Not available.
Refresh rate
Screen size (Dot x line)
Resolution
(Dot x Line)
Remarks
Vertical
Horizontal
DOT BY DOT
4:3
FULL
1024x768
60 Hz
48.4 kHz
1024x768
1365x768
60 Hz
70.1 Hz
75 Hz
49.7 kHz
56.5 kHz
60.0 kHz
68.7 kHz
80.5 kHz
95.5 kHz
Work station (SGI)
85 Hz
100.6 Hz
119.4 Hz
56.2 Hz
1280x768
45.1 kHz
1280x768
1360x768
1365x768
48 kH z
56 kH z
59.8 Hz
69.8 Hz
59.8 Hz
1280x800
1280x854
1360x768
1376x768
1152x864
49.7 kHz
1365x768
1365x768
1365x768
1365x768
1365x768
53.1 kHz
60 Hz
60 Hz
47.7 kHz
48.3 kHz
53.7 kHz
I/O DATA
I/O DATA
59.9 Hz
60 Hz
1024x768
1024x768
64.9 kHz
67.5 kHz
72 Hz
75 Hz
66 Hz
1152x900
Sun Microsystems LO
61.8 kHz
1365x768
Sun Microsystems HI
Apple Macintosh17”
71.7 kHz
55.9 kHz
76 Hz
59.9 Hz
1440x900
1280x960
1365x768
1365x768
60 Hz
60.0 kHz
1024x768
1024x768
85 Hz
60 Hz
85.9 kHz
63.9 kHz
1280x1024
Work station (SGI)
1365x768
60 Hz
60 Hz
71.2 Hz
72 Hz
64.0 kHz
64.6 kHz
75.1 kHz
78.1 kHz
80.0 kHz
Work station (EWS4800)
Work station (EWS4800)
Work station (HP)
75 Hz
76.1 Hz
85 Hz
60 Hz
Work station (SUN)
81.1 kHz
91.1 kHz
65.3 kHz
1400x1050
1024x768
1024x768
1365x768
74.9 Hz
60 Hz
82.3 kHz
65.3 kHz
1680x1050
1920x1080
1365x768
1365x768
50 Hz
56.2 kHz
60 Hz
60 Hz
67.5 kHz
75.0 kHz
1600x1200
CVT
1365x768
1365x768
1920x1200RB*
60 Hz
74.0 kHz
: Optimal picture. Adjustment of picture position, refresh rate, phase etc., may be necessary.
: Picture will be enlarged but some fine detail will be hard to see.
: Simple reproduction. Fine detail will not be reproduced.
RB*: Abbreviation for Reduce Blanking that is set by CVT.
Note
In rare cases, the picture may not translate properly when switching between compatible signal formats on the output device (PC, etc.).
Should this happen, turn off the power and then turn it back on again.
157
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before Beginning Adjustments
INPUT1
[PDP-427CMX]
: Not available.
Remarks
Refresh rate
Resolution
(Dot x Line)
Screen size (Dot x line)
Vertical
Horizontal
DOT BY DOT
4:3
FULL
640x400
70.1 Hz
31.5 kHz
NEC PC-9800
NEC PC-9800
1024x768
1024x768
720x400
640x480
70.1 Hz
31.5 kHz
85.1 Hz
59.9 Hz
37.9 kHz
31.5 kHz
768x768
1024x768
Apple Macintosh 13”
66.7 Hz
72.8 Hz
75 Hz
35.0 kHz
37.9 kHz
37.5 kHz
43.3 kHz
51.1 kHz
61.3 kHz
31.0 kHz
85 Hz
100.4 Hz
120.4 Hz
60 Hz
I/O DATA
I/O DATA
848x480
852x480
800x600
1024x768
1024x768
1024x768
60 Hz
31.7 kHz
35.2 kHz
I/O DATA
56.3 Hz
768x768
60.3 Hz
72.2 Hz
75 Hz
85.1 Hz
99.8 Hz
120 Hz
74.6 Hz
37.9 kHz
48.1 kHz
46.9 kHz
53.7 kHz
63.0 kHz
75.7 kHz
49.7kHz
I/O DATA
I/O DATA
832x624
Apple Macintosh 16”
768x768
768x768
1024x768
1024x768
60 Hz
48.4 kHz
1024x768
60 Hz
70.1 Hz
49.7 kHz
56.5 kHz
Work station (SGI)
75 Hz
(74.9 Hz)
85 Hz
100.6 Hz
119.4 Hz
56.2 Hz
60.0 kHz
(60.2 kHz)
68.7 kHz
80.5 kHz
95.5 kHz
45.1 kHz
( ) indicates
Apple Macintosh 19”
I/O DATA
1280x768
1024x768
59.8 Hz
69.8 Hz
60 Hz
48 kHz
56 kHz
47.7 kHz
1360x768
1376x768
1280x800
1280x854
1152x864
I/O DATA
I/O DATA
CVT
1024x768
1024x768
1024x768
1024x768
1024x768
59.9 Hz
59.8 Hz
60 Hz
48.3 kHz
49.7 kHz
53.1 kHz
53.7 kHz
PC
60 Hz
768x768
72 Hz
75 Hz
75.1 Hz
64.9 kHz
67.5 kHz
68.7 kHz
1152x870
1152x900
Apple Macintosh 21”
Sun Microsystems LO
Sun Microsystems HI
768x768
768x768
1024x768
1024x768
66 Hz
76 Hz
61.8 kHz
71.7 kHz
158
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before Beginning Adjustments
Refresh rate
Screen size (Dot x line)
Resolution
(Dot x Line)
Remarks
4:3
FULL
Vertical
DOT BY DOT
Horizontal
1440x900
59.9 Hz
55.9 kHz
Apple Macintosh 17”
1024x768
1024x768
1280x960
60 Hz
60.0 kHz
768x768
720x768
85 Hz
60 Hz
85.9 kHz
64.0 kHz
1280x1024
Work station (SGI)
1024x768
60 Hz
71.2 Hz
72 Hz
75 Hz
76.1 Hz
85 Hz
64.6 kHz
75.1 kHz
78.1 kHz
80.0 kHz
81.1 kHz
91.1 kHz
108.5 kHz
65.3 kHz
Work station (EWS4800)
Work station (EWS4800)
Work station (HP)
Work station (SUN)
I/O DATA
100.1 Hz
60 Hz
1400x1050
768x768
768x768
1024x768
75 Hz
85 Hz
60 Hz
82.3 kHz
93.9 kHz
65.3 kHz
1680x1050
1600x1200
1024x768
1024x768
60 Hz
75.0 kHz
65 Hz
70 Hz
75 Hz
85 Hz
59.9 Hz
81.3 kHz
87.5 kHz
93.8 kHz
106.3 kHz
74.6 kHz
1920x1200
CVT
CVT
1024x768
1024x768
1920x1200RB*
60 Hz
74.0 kHz
: Optimal picture. Adjustment of picture position, refresh rate, phase etc., may be necessary
: Picture will be enlarged but some fine detail will be hard to see.
: Simple reproduction. Fine detail will not be reproduced.
RB*: Abbreviation for Reduce Blanking that is set by CVT.
INPUT2
: Not available.
[PDP-427CMX]
Refresh rate
Screen size (Dot x line)
4:3
Resolution
(Dot x Line)
Remarks
FULL
Vertical
DOT BY DOT
Horizontal
640x480
59.9 Hz
31.5 kHz
768x768
1024x768
72.8 Hz
75 Hz
85 Hz
100.4 Hz
120.4 Hz
70.1 Hz
37.9 kHz
37.5 kHz
43.3 kHz
51.1 kHz
61.3 kHz
31.5 kHz
720x400
NEC PC-9800
1024x768
85.1 Hz
60 Hz
37.9 kHz
31.0 kHz
848x480
852x480
800x600
1024x768
1024x768
1024x768
60 Hz
31.7 kHz
35.2 kHz
56.3 Hz
768x768
60.3 Hz
72.2 Hz
75 Hz
85.1 Hz
99.8 Hz
120 Hz
37.9 kHz
48.1 kHz
46.9 kHz
53.7 kHz
63.0 kHz
75.7 kHz
159
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before Beginning Adjustments
: Not available.
Remarks
Refresh rate
Resolution
Screen size (Dot x line)
(Dot x Line)
Vertical
Horizontal
DOT BY DOT
4:3
FULL
1024x768
60 Hz
48.4 kHz
1024x768
768x768
60 Hz
70.1 Hz
75 Hz
85 Hz
100.6 Hz
56.2 Hz
49.7 kHz
56.5 kHz
60.0 kHz
68.7 kHz
80.5 kHz
45.1 kHz
Work station (SGI)
1280x768
1024x768
59.8 Hz
69.8 Hz
59.8 Hz
48 kHz
56 kHz
49.7 kHz
1280x800
1280x854
1360x768
1376x768
1152x864
1024x768
1024x768
1024x768
1024x768
1024x768
60 Hz
60 Hz
53.1 kHz
47.7 kHz
48.3 kHz
53.7 kHz
I/O DATA
I/O DATA
59.9 Hz
60 Hz
768x768
768x768
72 Hz
75 Hz
66 Hz
64.9 kHz
67.5 kHz
61.8 kHz
1152x900
Work station (SUN)
1024x768
76 Hz
59.9 Hz
71.7 kHz
55.9 kHz
Work station (SUN)
Apple Macintosh17”
1440x900
1280x960
1024x768
1024x768
60 Hz
60.0 kHz
768x768
720x768
85 Hz
60 Hz
85.9 kHz
64.0 kHz
1280x1024
Work station (SGI)
1024x768
60 Hz
71.2 Hz
72 Hz
76.1 Hz
75 Hz
64.6 kHz
75.1 kHz
78.1 kHz
81.1 kHz
80.0 kHz
91.1 kHz
65.3 kHz
Work station (EWS4800)
Work station (EWS4800)
Work station (HP)
Work station (SUN)
85 Hz
60 Hz
1400x1050
1680x1050
1920x1080
768x768
768x768
1024x768
1024x768
1024x768
60 Hz
50 Hz
65.3 kHz
56.2 kHz
60 Hz
60 Hz
67.5 kHz
75.0 kHz
1600x1200
1024x768
1024x768
1920x1200RB*
60 Hz
74.0 kHz
CVT
: Optimal picture. Adjustment of picture position, refresh rate, phase etc., may be necessary.
: Picture will be enlarged but some fine detail will be hard to see.
: Simple reproduction. Fine detail will not be reproduced.
RB*: Abbreviation for Reduce Blanking that is set by CVT.
Note
In rare cases, the picture may not translate properly when switching between compatible signal formats on the output device (PC, etc.).
Should this happen, turn off the power and then turn it back on again.
160
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before Beginning Adjustments
5) Screen size
Unit: % (percent)
When a video card is installed
Personal computer
signal
Screen size
Remarks
Video signal 4:3 source Video signal 16:9 source
(NTSC, 625i, etc.)
(750p, 1080i, etc.)
This screen size exists for a personal computer
signal when the input signals a less than the pixels
of the plasma display. For details, refer to the
correspondence signal table.
DOT BY DOT
100
100
The input signal corresponds 1:1
with the pixels of the Plasma
Display for an accurate
reproduction.
100
100
PDP-427CMX:
This unit is designed with
horizontally oblong elements, with
the result that the image
displayed will appear more oblong
than the original input signal.
4:3
95
100
For a 4:3 source, roundness can
be accurately reproduced (In order
to prevent burning of the screen,
this screen size should not be
used when possible).
95
95
100
100
100
100
95
95
FULL
95
95
This is for wide-screen video
(squeeze) (For a 16:9 source,
roundness is nearly accurate).
100
100
95
73
95
95
95
95
95
100
ZOOM
For a video signal, this is for a
cinesco (cinema scope) size video.
73
90
95
WIDE
90
90
This is for reproducing the 4:3
portion of a 4:3 source or 16:9
source on the entire screen
(roundness near the center is
nearly accurate).
90
95
95
72
72
UNDERSCAN
When selecting the underscan by switching the
screen size, please set to UNDERSCAN: ON using
PRO USE of the integrator mode.
100
100
This is used by a broadcast
station and the like for viewing
the portion outside the normal
effective display range.
100
74
100
100
100
100
100
74
74
2.35:1
Displays 2.35:1 squeezed image
full-screen without black border.
However, portions of image at
right and left edges are cut.
74
84
74
74
74
74
14:9
Displays expanded 4:3 screen
image without distortion.
84
95
95
• The screen size settings are stored in memory for each function and for each input signal. Up to eight (8) sizes can be stored in
memory for each function.
161
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before Beginning Adjustments
5.1.4 List of Adjustable and Settable Items
1) Menu Mode
7 PDP-507CMX/PDP-427CMX
*1: INPUT1 case
*2: INPUT2 case
(Note 1) The OPTION settings are common settings for all inputs.
162
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before Beginning Adjustments
7 PDP-507CMX/PDP-427CMX#
#: Applicable only when a PDA-5003/PDA-5004 is installed.
: Cannot be set according to the signal.
*1: INPUT1 case
*2: INPUT2 case
(Note 1) The OPTION settings are common settings for all inputs.
163
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before Beginning Adjustments
7 PDA-5003/PDA-5004
#: Applicable only when a PDA-5003/PDA-5004 is installed.
: Cannot be set according to the signal.
*1: INPUT5 case
*2: INPUT3 or INPUT4 cases
(Note 1) The OPTION settings are common settings for all inputs.
164
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before Beginning Adjustments
7 Slot card other than PDA-5003/PDA-5004
#: Applicable only when a video card is installed.
: Cannot be set according to the signal.
*1: INPUT3 to INPUT5 analog signal cases
*2: INPUT3 to INPUT5 digital signal cases
(Note 1) The OPTION settings are common settings for all inputs.
165
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before Beginning Adjustments
2) Integrator mode
7 PDP-507CMX/PDP-427CMX
(Note) The OPTION settings are common settings for all inputs.
166
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before Beginning Adjustments
7 PDP-507CMX/PDP-427CMX#
ꢀ: Applicable only when a PDA-5003/PDA-5004 is installed.
(Note) The OPTION settings are common settings for all inputs.
167
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before Beginning Adjustments
7 PDA-5003/PDA-5004
ꢀ: INPUT3 to INPUT5 are applicable only when the PDA-5003 or the PDA-5004 is installed.
(Note) The OPTION settings are common settings for all inputs.
168
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before Beginning Adjustments
7 Slot card other than PDA-5003/PDA-5004
ꢀ: INPUT3 to INPUT5 are applicable only when the PDA-5003 or the PDA-5004 is installed.
(Note) The OPTION settings are common settings for all inputs.
169
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before Beginning Adjustments
5.1.5 Last Memory
The timing for the last memory is listed below.
When one of the following operations is performed before the timing is complete, the last memory function may not
perform.
• MAIN POWER switch is turned OFF
• Power cord is removed from the power outlet
• The breaker to the power outlet is turned OFF
Item
Saving to Memory
Operation in the normal-
operation mode
• Power ON/OFF
• Three seconds after an operation
• When the standby mode is designated by a remote-control, main-control panel or <POF>
command
• Switching input
• When the format of the displayed signal changes
• Switching screen size
• Volume adjustment
• FUNCTIONAL LOCK setting
(NOTE) Of the RS-232C commands that can be used in the normal-operation mode, there are
some that cannot be saved in the last memory when using the normal-operation mode.
For details, refer to section 5.5, “RS-232C Adjustment (pg. 262)”.
Adjustments and settings in the
menu mode
• Three seconds after an operation
• When the standby mode is designated by a remote-control, main-control panel or <POF>
command
• When the format of the displayed signal changes
Adjustments and settings in the
integrator mode
• Three seconds after an operation
• When the standby mode is designated by a remote-control, main-control panel or <POF>
command
• When the format of the displayed signal changes
Adjustments and settings in the
RS-232C adjustment
• Three seconds after a command is sent, or when the next command is sent within four
seconds
• When the standby mode is designated by a remote-control, main-control panel or <POF>
command
• When an adjustment or setting is changed using a command
• When the format of the displayed signal changes
Note
If the system is started or stopped by turned ON/OFF from a circuit breaker, use the system only after first saving
adjustments and settings in the last memory according to the timing described above. Also, with this operating method,
count errors may occur in the hour meter.
5.1.6 Aging
After the power has been turned ON, input a white 100 % signal to age thus stabilize the unit (about 30 minutes). When
adjustments are made after aging is performed, it possible to perform more precise adjustments.
Note
When a still screen is displayed for a long period, the image may possibly be burned in to the screen.
170
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Normal Operating Mode
5.2 Normal Operation Mode
5.2.1 About normal operation mode
The following controls are possible in the normal operation mode.
1 Switching input
• Pressing the [INPUT1] to [INPUT5] buttons on the remote control changes the input that setting.
• Pressing the [INPUT] button on the main-control panel changes the input each time the button is pressed.
Note
When a PDA-5003 or a PDA-5004 is not installed, the input switches only between INPUT1 and INPUT2.
2 Switching the screen size
• Each time the [SCREEN SIZE] button on the remote control or main-control panel is pressed, the display screen
size changes.
When reproducing a PC signal
3
3
3
DOT BY DOT
FULL
4: 3
When reproducing a video signal (signal other than a PC signal) # (Applicable only when a PDA-5003 or a PDA-
5004 is installed.)
3
4:3
3
3
WIDE
FULL
14:9 2
2.35:1 2
ZOOM 2
Note
• The reproducible screen size changes according to the input signal.
Refer to the section 5.1.3, “List of Input Correspondence Signals” (pg. 146).
• To select ‘Underscan’, set the PRO USE option in the integrator mode.
When this display is to be used for commercial use or for public viewing, such as in a coffee shop or hotel,
reducing or enlarging the screen by using the screen-size-switching function could infringe on the copyright of
the creator according to copyright laws.
2 Display call
A Pressing the [DISPLAY] button on the remote control or main-control panel displays the current input function,
horizontal and vertical frequency of the input signal, the type of signal, and the screen size (DISPLAY CALL 1).
Note
The displayed horizontal and vertical frequencies are measured values. Measurement errors are possible.
B Pressing the [DISPLAY] button on the remote control or main-control panel again for three seconds or more when
the display described in A above is displayed, cause various settings and internal temperature to be displayed as
shown below (DISPLAY CALL 2).
SERIAL NO.: Displays the serial number of the product
PDP-507CMX
SERIAL NO.
LOT
LOT/DATE: Displays the manufacturing control number
:****************
:001A001K
:001A001X
:00239H
HOUR METER: Displays the conduction time for the product
TEMPERATURE: Displays the outside air temperature that is
measured by a temperature sensor located in
the product
DATE
HOUR METER
TEMPERATURE
OSD
BAUD RATE
FAN CONTROL
ID NO. SET
COLOR MODE
INFORMATION
:ABCDEFGHIJKLMN
:+25
:ON
:9600BPS
:AUTO
:ALL
Other items: Displays the settings in the integrator mode
:NORMAL
* Illustration depicts PDP-507CMX model.
Note
When the displayed temperature is high, the panel shuts down. However, the display itself should always be
used as an indicator.
171
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Normal Operating Mode
4 Volume Adjustment/Muting
• Pressing the [VOLUME+] button on the remote control or main-control panel raises the volume.
• Pressing the [VOLUME-] button on the remote control or main-control panel lowers the volume.
• Pressing the [MUTING] button on the remote control switches between no sound (muting ON) and sound (muting
OFF) each time the button is pressed.
Note
Muting is cleared when the power is turn OFF.
5 Auto screen adjustment
• Pressing the [AUTO SET UP] button on the remote control or main-control panel during PC signal input causes the
‘SCREEN’ in the menu mode to adjust automatically. If a multi screen is being used, only the main screen can be
adjusted.
Note
• Adjustment cannot be performed from INPUT2.
• Adjustment cannot be performed well when the input signal is a low brightness signal such as black, or is showing
movement.
• Automatic SCREEN adjustment values are reflected under ‘SCREEN’ in the menu mode.
6 Point Zoom (only when using the remote control)
• Pressing the [POINT ZOOM] button on the remote control designates the POINT ZOOM screen. Each time the
button is pressed, the magnification rate changes as shown below.
3 LEVEL1
3 LEVEL2
LEVEL4 2
LEVEL3 2
• During magnification, it is possible to scroll the display position using the [5/∞/2/3] buttons on the remote
control.
7 Multi screen (only when using the remote control)
• Pressing the [SPLIT] button on the remote control designates a multi screen. Each time the button is pressed, the
screen changes as shown below.
3 Side-by-side
OFF 2
Picture-in-picture 2
• When input is switched during a multi-screen display, input of the main screen is switched.
• When the [SUB INPUT] button on the remote control is pressed during a multi-screen display, the input of the sub
screen is switched.
• When the [SWAP] button on the remote control is pressed during a multi-screen display, the main screen and sub
screen are switched.
• Press the [2/3] buttons on the remote control during multi-screen mode to change the sound on the main screen
and the subscreen. This overrides last memory.
• When the [PIP SHIFT] button on the remote control is pressed during a PinP screen display, the display position of
the sub screen changes as shown below.
3 Lower right
3 Upper right
Lower left 2
Upper left 2
Note
For the setting of size and layout for Side-by-side and for the size of Picture-in-picture, refer to “Integrator Mode”
(pg. 250 to 251).
8 Some other RS-232C commands besides those described above are also effective.
For details, refer to section 5.5, “RS-232C Adjustment” (pg. 262).
Note
• Same function display is possible for main input and sub input. However, during circuit processing, since the high-
image quality circuit is used for the main input, the screen looks different on the sub screen.
• While the video wall is set, multi-screen display is unavailable.
• When the video wall is set or during multi-screen display, point zoom is unavailable.
172
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Menu Mode
5.3 Menu Mode
5.3.1 About menu mode
1) Entering/leaving the menu mode
• Pressing the [MENU] button on the remote control or main-control panel in the normal-operation mode causes the
menu screen to appear.
Pressing the [MENU] button while in the menu mode causes the menu to close.
2) When performing adjustment in the menu mode...
• The signal and screen adjustment values are saved in memory for each input function and input signal. For details,
refer to section 5.4.4, “PICTURE, White Balance and SCREEN Position Adjustment Values Memory Area Tables”
(pg. 257).
3) Precautions
(1) In the following cases, the menu closes automatically:
• Input is switched
• No operation for approximately three minutes
(2) For details about menu adjustments, refer to the Operating Instructions.
(3) It is recommended that adjustment and settings be performed with signal that will actually be input.
(4) The items that can be adjusted and set differ according to the input signal. Also, changing settings is only
possible when no video signal is input.
5.3.2 Concerning the display of the OSD of each item
Example of Menu Display:
MENU
INPUT1
OPTION
PICTURE
CONTRAST
BRIGHTNESS
H.ENHANCE
V.ENHANCE
SCREEN
SETUP
:
0
0
0
0
:
:
:
PICTURE RESET
SET
MENU
ENTER
EXIT
Images shown here may differ from the actual display image.
173
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Menu Mode
1 Press the MENU button to display the menu
5.3.3 Example of a Menu Mode Operation
screen.
The basic operation in the menu mode will be explained
using brightness adjustment as an example.
MENU
INPUT1
OPTION
PICTURE
CONTRAST
SCREEN
SETUP
:
0
0
0
0
BRIGHTNESS
H.ENHANCE
V.ENHANCE
:
:
:
PICTURE RESET
SET
MENU
ENTER
EXIT
2 Use the 5/∞ buttons to select the adjustment
MENU
2/3
item then press the SET button.
SET
5/∞
MENU
INPUT1
OPTION
PICTURE
SCREEN
SETUP
CONTRAST
:
0
0
0
0
BRIGHTNESS
H.ENHANCE
V.ENHANCE
:
Remote control unit
:
:
PICTURE RESET
DISPLAY
/ SET
INPUT SCREEN SIZE
– VOL +
STANDBY/ON
MENU
ꢀ
SET
MENU
ENTER
EXIT
3 Use the 2/3 buttons to adjust the picture
MENU SET
5/∞
2/3
quality as desired.
Main-control panel
5
∞
BRIGHTNESS
:
0
SET
MENU
SET
EXIT
It is possible to move to other adjustment items
with the 5/∞ buttons.
4 Press the SET button.
Pressing the SET button writes the value into
memory and returns the display to the step 2
screen.
5 When the setup is finished, press the MENU
button to exit the menu screen.
174
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Menu Mode
5.3.4 Adjustment and setting in the Menu Mode
1) Power Management Setting
When no video signal (synchronizing signal) is detected, this function automatically sets the energy saving state to
save power.
• To disable the energy saving function, set to [OFF].
• When there is PC signal input:
To switch between the normal-operation state and the energy saving state is depended upon the presence of an
input signal, set ‘POWER MANAGEMENT’ to [ON].
Factory setting: OFF
1 Select ‘SETUP‘.
MENU
INPUT1
OPTION
PICTURE
POWER MGT.
SIGNAL FORMAT
SCREEN
SETUP
:OFF
2 Place the cursor over ‘POWER MANAGEMENT’ and
change the setting with the [SET] button.
Each time the [SET] button is pressed, the setting is
changed as shown below.
3 OFF
ON 2
SET
MENU
CHANGE
EXIT
Note
• To return from the energy saving state (by power management) to the normal operation state, operate the PC or
press the [INPUT] button on the remote control or main-control panel.
However, during SYNC ON G or composite SYNC input, operation does not return by simply operating the personal
computer. After operating the personal computer, press the [INPUT] button.
• The power consumption during power standby.
PDP-507CMX: 0.6 W
PDP-427CMX: 1.2 W
175
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Menu Mode
2) Signal Format Setting
This display automatically identifies PC signals and video signals such as from a DVD player by the frequency of the
input signal. The panel is equipped with a function for identifying the resolution of a PC signal.
Factory setting: AUTO
1 Select ‘SETUP’.
Screen 2
2 Place the cursor over ‘SIGNAL FORMAT’ then press the
[SET] button.
MENU
INPUT1
OPTION
PICTURE
SCREEN
SETUP
COLOR TEMP.
AUTO POWER OFF
DNR
:MIDDLE
:DISABLE
:MIDDLE
:LOW
MPEG NR
CTI
:ON
PURECINEMA
COLOR DECODING
COLOR SYSTEM
SIGNAL FORMAT
:OFF
:RGB
:AUTO
SET
MENU
ENTER
EXIT
Screen 3
3 Press the [2/3] buttons to change the setting.
Each time a [2/3] button is pressed, the signal format
changes as shown below.
3 AUTO 2
3 Others 2
• AUTO ........ It is distinguished as in “5.1.3 List of
Input Correspondence Signals 1) Input
correspondence signals personal
SIGNAL FORMAT
AUTO
:
SET
MENU
SET
EXIT
computer signals” (pg. 146 to 151)
• Others ....... Selectable resolutions are displayed
Note
The display method and selectable screen size differs for each setting. In order to obtain a proper reproduction
method and screen size, check the signal format setting when the signal is input then change the setting as necessary.
If it is not displayed correctly when “AUTO” has been set, change the setting of the signal format with reference to
the following table.
7 PC signal
Menu mode
Signal format
Set values
RS232C
Signal format
Set values
V
H
Resolution
720x400
V [Hz] H [kHz]
Remarks
polarity polarity
-
-
70.0
60.0
60.0
60.0
56.0
60.0
60.0
70.0
75.0
56.0
59.8
60.0
70.0
31.5
31.5
31.0
31.7
35.2
48.4
49.7
56.5
60.0
45.1
48.0
47.8
56.1
720x400
640x480
848x480
852x480
TYPE 1
TYPE 1
TYPE 3
TYPE 2
TYPE 1
TYPE 1
TYPE 1
TYPE 1
TYPE 1
TYPE 1
TYPE 5
TYPE 4
TYPE 3
640x480
848x480
852x480
800x600
1024x768
1024x768
1024x768
1024x768
1280x768
1280x768
1280x768
1280x768
Neg.
Pos.
-
-
Neg.
-
-
-
-
Neg.
Pos.
-
-
Neg.
-
-
-
-
800x600
1024x768-1
1024x768
1024x768-1
1024x768
1280x768
1280x768-1
1280x768-2
1280x768-1
Neg.
Pos.
Pos.
Pos.
Neg.
Neg.
176
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Menu Mode
Menu mode
Signal format
Set values
RS232C
Signal format
Set values
V
H
Resolution
V [Hz] H [kHz]
Remarks
polarity polarity
1360x768
Pos.
Pos.
60.0
47.7
1360x768
TYPE 2
1376x768
1280x800
Pos.
-
Neg.
-
59.9
60.0
48.3
49.7
1376x768
1280x800
TYPE 3
TYPE 2
1280x854
-
-
60.0
53.1
1280x854
TYPE 3
1152x864
1152x864
1280x1024
1400x1050
-
-
-
-
60.0
75.0
60.0
59.9
53.7
67.5
63.9
64.1
1152x864
1152x864
1280x1024
1400x1050-1
TYPE 4
TYPE 2
TYPE 1
TYPE 2
Pos.
Neg.
Pos.
Neg.
1680x1050
1920x1080
-
-
-
-
60.0
50.0
65.3
56.3
1680x1050
1920x1080
TYPE 7
TYPE 3
Only INPUT2 effective.
DVI SETUP is set on the PC.
1920x1080
-
-
60.0
67.5
1920x1080
TYPE 9
Only INPUT2 effective.
DVI SETUP is set on the PC.
1600x1200
1920x1200
1920x1200
-
-
-
-
-
-
60.0
59.9
60.0
75.0
74.6
74.0
1600x1200
1920x1200
1920x1200RB
TYPE 5
TYPE 3
TYPE 4
3) Menu Language Display Setting
The factory setting for the menu display language is English. To change to another language, set the selection in the
menu.
Factory setting: ENGLISH
1 Select ‘OPTION’.
Screen 2
2 Place the cursor over ‘LANGUAGE’ and press the [SET]
button.
LANGUAGE
ENGLISH
:
SET
MENU
SET
EXIT
3 Each time a [2/3] button is pressed, the language
Screen 3
changes as shown below.
3
3
ENGLISH
2
2
3
3
FRANÇAIS
ITALIANO
2
2
3
3
ESPAÑOL
DEUTSCH
2
2
With the desired language displayed, press the [SET]
button.
LANGUAGE
FRANÇAIS
:
SET
MENU
SET
EXIT
Note
Setting the display language for either INPUT1 or INPUT2 sets the language for both inputs.
177
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Menu Mode
4) Energy Saving Setting
This is a function that reduces power consumption and reduces deterioration of the panel. This setting controls the
brightness of the screen according to the input signal.
• To make the screen bright and easy to see: Set ‘ENERGY SAVE: STANDARD1, STANDARD2 (STANDARD)*’.
• To perform control according to the brightness of the room and to adjust the screen according to the surroundings:
Set ‘ENERGY SAVE: AUTO’.
• To reduce power consumption: Set ‘ENERGY SAVE: MODE1, MODE2’.
• To reduce deterioration of the panel such as burning: Set ‘ENERGY SAVE: MODE 3’.
• To temporarily turn off the present screen display: Set ‘ENERGY SAVE: MUTE‘ and press the MENU button.
Image mute starts at the same time that the menu disappears.
Factory setting: STANDARD1 (STANDARD)*
Differences in video reproduction by energy saving settings (illustration)
For this kind of input signal
(As a standard)
When the white window is displayed, the
peak brightness is decreased as shown
below.
• MODE1: Decreased about 50%
• MODE2: Decreased about 60%
• MODE3: Decreased about 75%
STANDARD1, STANDARD2 (STANDARD)*
For an overall bright video, there is no change
(Figure on the left).
For an overall dark video, the peak brightness
is reproduced even brighter (Figure on the
right).
AUTO
The brightness is automatically changed within the STANDARD (bright) to MODE2 (dark) range according
to the brightness of the room.
Power consumption is lowered by reducing
the brightness of an overall bight video
(Figure on the left).
MODE1, MODE2
Similar to in the STANDARD setting, an overall
dark video is peak brightness is reproduced
even brighter (Figure on the right).
The peak brightness in MODE2 is decreased
by a set amount with respect to that in
MODE1, however it is reproduced brighter
than in MODE3.
MODE3
Input signal graduation is not controlled but
reproduced accurately. Deterioration of the
panel due to burning is reduced since the
peak brightness of an overall dark video is
not increased.
MUTE
It temporarily shuts off the screen that is displayed.
To cancel MUTE, press the MENU button, INPUT button etc.
* PDP-427CMX
Note
The external sensor changes in stages; from an external light of 200 lux (rough value) to external light of 0 lux.
178
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Menu Mode
1 Select ‘OPTION’.
Screen 2
2 Place the cursor over ‘ENERGY SAVE’ then press the [SET]
button to change the setting.
MENU
INPUT1
Each time the [SET] button is pressed, the setting changes
as shown below.
PICTURE
LANGUAGE
ENERGY SAVE
TIMER SETTING
SCREEN MGT.
SCREEN
SETUP
OPTION
:ENGLISH
:STANDARD
3 STANDARD1 3 STANDARD2 (STANDARD)* 3 AUTO
AUTO SETUP MODE
AUTO FUNCTION
PIP DETECT
:INACTIVE
:OFF
:ACTIVE
MUTE 2
MODE3 2
MODE2 2
MODE1 2
* PDP-427CMX
SPLIT FREEZE
:OFF
SET
MENU
CHANGE
EXIT
The ‘ENERGY SAVE’ setting is common for all inputs.
179
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Menu Mode
5) Timer Setting
The present day of the week, time, and daylight savings time are set.
1 Select ‘OPTION’.
2 Place the cursor on ‘TIMER SETTING’ then press the [SET]
button.
3 Place the cursor on ‘PRESENT TIME’ then press the [SET]
Screen 3
button.
PRESENT TIME
4 Adjust each item by pressing the 5/∞/2/3 buttons.
DAYLIGHT
SAVING TIME
:
OFF
DAYLIGHT SAVING TIME ..... sets daylight savings time
ON: Displays time as present time + one hour
MONDAY
12:00:00
OFF: Disables [DAYLIGHT SAVING TIME] mode
Week..................................... Set current day of the week
Hour, Minute ......................... Sets to current time.
SET
RETURN
SET
MENU
–
EXIT
Note
The set time may slow by approximately one minute per
month from the actual time.
The ‘TIMER SETTING’ is set for all inputs.
6) Program/Repeat Timer Setting
It can operate the preset PROGRAM TIMER and REPEAT TIMER.
Factory setting: OFF
1 Select ‘OPTION’.
2 Place the cursor on ‘TIMER SETTING’ then press the [SET]
button.
3 Change the setting by pressing the 2/3 buttons to move
the cursor to the ‘PROGRAM/REPEAT’.
Each time a 2/3 button is pressed, the setting changes
as shown below.
Screen 3
3 OFF
TIMER SETTING
PRESENT TIME
REPEAT 2
PROGRAM 2
PROGRAM/REPEAT
RETURN
:OFF
Note
SET
MENU
–
EXIT
For the PROGRAM/REPEAT TIMER setting, refer to
“Program Timer Setting (pg. 223)” and “Repeat Timer
Setting (pg. 253)” in Integrator Mode.
180
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Menu Mode
7) Orbiter Setting
This function gradually moves the display position of the screen periodically screen position is moved at random,
horizontally or vertically).
Setting ‘MODE1’ to ‘MODE3’ is effective in reducing screen burn when a still image is displayed.
Factory setting: OFF
1 Select ‘OPTION’.
Screen 2
2 Place the cursor on ‘SCREEN MGT.’ then press the [SET]
button.
MENU
INPUT1
OPTION
PICTURE
SCREEN
SETUP
LANGUAGE
:ENGLISH
ENERGY SAVE
TIMER SETTING
SCREEN MGT.
:STANDARD
AUTO SETUP MODE
AUTO FUNCTION
PIP DETECT
:INACTIVE
:OFF
:ACTIVE
SPLIT FREEZE
:OFF
SET
MENU
ENTER
EXIT
Screen 3
2 Place the cursor on ‘ORBITER’ then press the [2/3]
buttons to change the settings.
Each time a [2/3] button is pressed, the setting changes
as shown below.
3 OFF 2
3 MODE1 2
SCREEN MANAGEMENT
3 MODE2 2
3 MODE3 2
ORBITER
SOFT FOCUS
:
:
OFF
OFF
MODE1 ....... The size is reduced so the picture is
completely in the display area.
SET
MENU
SET
EXIT
MODE2 ....... The size is increased so there are no black
bands in the display area.
MODE3 ....... It is displayed at the same size.
Note
• When ‘MODE1’ or ‘MODE2’ has been set, it moves smoothly.
• In ‘MODE3’, it moves in dot increments. The entire screen moves one dot horizontally or vertically approximately
every minute. The maximum movement is four dots.
• When it is set to ‘OFF’, the orbiter of the PIP subscreen is still ON.
The ‘ORBITER’ setting is common for all inputs.
181
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Menu Mode
8) Soft Focus Setting
Images are softened by suppressing the edge contrast.
Factory setting: OFF
1 Select ‘OPTION’.
Screen 2
2 Place the cursor on ‘SCREEN MGT.’ then press the [SET]
button.
MENU
INPUT1
OPTION
PICTURE
SCREEN
SETUP
LANGUAGE
:ENGLISH
ENERGY SAVE
TIMER SETTING
SCREEN MGT.
:STANDARD
AUTO SETUP MODE
AUTO FUNCTION
PIP DETECT
:INACTIVE
:OFF
:ACTIVE
SPLIT FREEZE
:OFF
SET
MENU
ENTER
EXIT
Screen 3
2 Place the cursor on ‘SOFT FOCUS’ then press the [2/3]
buttons to change the settings.
Each time a [2/3] button is pressed, the setting changes
as shown below.
3 OFF 2
3 1
2
SCREEN MANAGEMENT
3 4 2 3 3 2 3 2 2
ORBITER
SOFT FOCUS
:
:
OFF
OFF
SET
MENU
SET
EXIT
The ‘SOFT FOCUS’ setting is common for all inputs.
182
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Menu Mode
9) Auto Set Up Mode Setting
This function automatically adjusts the signal when the power is turned ON, when the input is changed, and when
the type of input signal is changed.
Factory setting: INACTIVE
Screen 2
1 Select ‘OPTION’.
MENU
INPUT1
OPTION
2 Place the cursor on ‘AUTO SETUP MODE’ then press
the [SET] button to change the setting.
Each time the [SET] button is pressed, the setting changes
as shown below.
PICTURE
SCREEN
SETUP
LANGUAGE
:ENGLISH
ENERGY SAVE
TIMER SETTING
SCREEN MGT.
AUTO SETUP MODE
AUTO FUNCTION
PIP DETECT
:STANDARD
:INACTIVE
:OFF
:ACTIVE
3 INACTIVE
ACTIVE 2
SPLIT FREEZE
:OFF
SET
MENU
CHANGE
EXIT
Note
• Items one and three are adjusted automatically.
‘SCREEN’ Adjustment inside the menu: 1. ‘POSITION’
2. ‘CLOCK’
3. ‘PHASE’
• The adjustment items are the same as when the ‘AUTO SET UP’ button is pressed on the remote control; however,
precision may be a little inferior. This difference in precision is due to short processing time in the menu settings
AUTO SET UP MODE.
• It may not be possible to precisely adjust an input signal such as when the signal has low brightness. Set the
AUTO SET UP MODE to INACTIVE, and make adjustments as explained in the following section, ‘SCREEN, CLOCK,
PHASE’.
• When the AUTO SET UP MODE is set to ACTIVE and ‘SCREEN’ is manually adjusted, ‘AUTO SETUP MODE:
ACTIVE’ is displayed.
This is to warn you that although adjustment is manual, when the input changes or when the type of signal changes
on the outside, the AUTO SET UP MODE functions and the adjusted values will be written over.
183
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Menu Mode
10) Screen Position, Clock Frequency and Clock Phase Adjustment
In AUTO SET UP, the position and clock are optimally set. However, depending on the type of signal, adjustment
may be off. If this should occur, refer to the procedure below and make the adjustment manually.
Example) When a PC signal is input to INPUT1 (1024 x 768)
1 Set the screen size to ‘DOT BY DOT’.
Screen 2
2 Select ‘SCREEN’.
MENU
INPUT1
OPTION
3 Place the cursor on ‘POSITION’ then press the [SET]
PICTURE
POSITION
CLOCK
SCREEN
SETUP
:
0/ 0
0
0
button.
:
:
PHASE
SCREEN RESET
SET
MENU
ENTER
EXIT
Screen 4
4 Use the [5/∞] and [2/3] buttons to adjust the screen
position.
Here, the top and left side of the video display are properly
set.
POSITION
1. With the [∞] button, lower the display until the mask
(black portion) protrudes into the top of the image.
2. With the [5] button, move the display to the point
where the mask at the top disappears.
H
V
+88
+88
3. With the [3] button, move the display until the mask
(black portion) protrudes into the left side of the image.
4. With the [2] button, move the display to the point
where the mask on the left side disappears.
SET
MENU
SET
EXIT
Screen 5
5 Place the cursor on ‘CLOCK’ then press the [SET] button.
MENU
INPUT1
OPTION
PICTURE
POSITION
CLOCK
PHASE
SCREEN
SETUP
:
0/ 0
0
0
:
SCREEN RESET
SET
MENU
ENTER
EXIT
184
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Menu Mode
6 Use the [2/3] buttons to adjust the click frequency.
In step 4, the left side was aligned while here the right
side is aligned.
Screen 6
1. With the [3] button, move the display until the mask
(black portion) protrudes into the right side of the image.
2. With the [2] button, move the display to the point
where the mask on the right side disappears.
CLOCK
:
0
SET
MENU
SET
EXIT
7 In the adjustment in steps 5 and 6, the left side of the screen moves. With ‘POSITION’, accurately adjust the left
side of the video display again.
As in step 4, used the [2/3] buttons to align the left side.
8 In the adjustment in step 7, the right side of the screen moves. With ‘CLOCK’, adjust the right side again.
As in step 6, use the [2/3] buttons to align the left side.
Repeat steps 7 and 8 until the adjustment value converges, then adjust the ‘PHASE’.
There are vertical lines so it is easier to adjust the screen if a signal having edges is input.
9 Place the cursor on ‘PHASE’ then press the [SET] button.
0 Using the [2/3] buttons adjust the clock phase.
Move the vertical edge of the image to the point where it becomes bold.
Adjustment is now complete.
185
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Menu Mode
11) Auto Function Mode Setting
With the Auto Function mode it is possible to automatically change the input when a signal is detected.
Factory setting: OFF
1 Select ‘OPTION’.
Screen 2
2 Place the cursor over ‘AUTO FUNCTION’ then press the
[SET] button to change the setting.
Each time the [SET] button is pressed, the setting changes
as shown below.
MENU
INPUT1
OPTION
PICTURE
LANGUAGE
SCREEN
SETUP
:ENGLISH
ENERGY SAVE
TIMER SETTING
SCREEN MGT.
AUTO SETUP MODE
AUTO FUNCTION
PIP DETECT
:STANDARD
3 OFF
INPUT1 2
:INACTIVE
:OFF
:ACTIVE
• When INPUT1 is selected, this function automatically
switches to that input when the signal is detected. Also,
in the Auto Function mode, after the input switches and
the signal input stops, the Auto Function returns to the
input that was used before the switch.
SPLIT FREEZE
:OFF
SET
MENU
CHANGE
EXIT
Note
• The Auto Function mode is unavailable when ‘OFF’ is selected.
• When SYNC ON G or a component signal is input to INPUT1, the Auto Function is unavailable does not function.
• After the input has been switched in the Auto Function mode, press the [INPUT] button and select a different
input. The Auto Function mode activates when it detects a change in the selected input signal (from a no-input
state to an input state).
• When the power is turned OFF/ON, the Auto Function mode activates when the signal is input to the selected
input.
• The Auto Function mode is unavailable when the Menu displays, during POINT ZOOM, or during multi-screen
display.
• When the Auto Function mode is set to ‘INPUT1’ or ‘INPUT4’, ‘AUTO’ appears under the option that displays the
selected input (INPUT1 to INPUT5).
186
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Menu Mode
12) PIP DETECT Setting
During picture-in-picture display, if no subscreen input signal is detected then the black borders of the subscreen are
automatically turned off.
The subscreen mode function is disabled during side-by-side display.
* The lack of a subscreen input signal means there is no video signal or sync signal.
Factory setting: ACTIVE
Screen 2
1 Select ‘OPTION’.
MENU
INPUT1
OPTION
2 Place the cursor on ‘PIP DETECT’ then press the [SET]
button to change the setting.
PICTURE
SCREEN
SETUP
LANGUAGE
:ENGLISH
ENERGY SAVE
TIMER SETTING
SCREEN MGT.
AUTO SETUP MODE
AUTO FUNCTION
PIP DETECT
:STANDARD
Each time the [SET] button is pressed, the setting changes
as shown below.
:INACTIVE
:OFF
3 ACTIVE
:ACTIVE
INACTIVE 2
SPLIT FREEZE
:OFF
SET
MENU
CHANGE
EXIT
• ACTIVE ...... When no subscreen input signal is input,
no subscreen is displayed. When the
subscreen input is later restored, the
subscreen is displayed again.
• INACTIVE .. When no subscreen signal is input, the
black border is visible.
The ‘PIP DETECT’ setting is common for all inputs.
187
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Menu Mode
13) SPLIT FREEZE Setting
For setting other than [OFF], the image displayed when the FREEZE button is pressed is displayed in a subscreen as
a freeze-frame image.
Factory setting: OFF
1 Select ‘OPTION’.
Screen 2
2 Place the cursor on ‘SPLIT FREEZE’ then press the [SET]
button to change the setting.
MENU
INPUT1
OPTION
Each time the [SET] button is pressed, the setting changes
as shown below.
PICTURE
LANGUAGE
SCREEN
SETUP
:ENGLISH
ENERGY SAVE
TIMER SETTING
SCREEN MGT.
AUTO SETUP MODE
AUTO FUNCTION
PIP DETECT
:STANDARD
3 OFF
3 S BY S
3 PIP
:INACTIVE
:OFF
:ACTIVE
• OFF ........... The still picture displayed at the time the
FREEZE button was pressed is displayed
as a single fullscreen image
SPLIT FREEZE
:OFF
SET
MENU
CHANGE
EXIT
• S BY S ....... When the FREEZE button is pressed, the
freeze-frame image is displayed in the side-
by-side subscreen
• PIP ............. When the FREEZE button is pressed, the
freeze-frame image is displayed in the
picture-in-picture (left-bottom to left-top)
subscreen.
The ‘SPLIT FREEZE’ setting is common for all inputs.
188
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[Applicable only when a PDA-5003/PDA-5004 is installed]
Menu Mode
1 Press the MENU button to display the menu
5.3.5 Concerning the display of the OSD of each
item (Applicable only when a PDA-5003/
PDA-5004 is installed.)
screen.
MENU
INPUT1
PICTURE
CONTRAST
SCREEN
SETUP
:
OPTION
0
Example of Menu Display:
BRIGHTNESS
COLOR
TINT
:
:
:
:
0
0
0
0
MENU
INPUT1
OPTION
PICTURE
CONTRAST
SCREEN
SETUP
:
SHARPNESS
0
BRIGHTNESS
COLOR
TINT
:
:
:
:
0
0
0
0
PICTURE RESET
SET
MENU
ENTER
EXIT
SHARPNESS
PICTURE RESET
2 Use the 5/∞ buttons to select the adjustment
SET
MENU
ENTER
EXIT
item then press the SET button.
Images shown here may differ from the actual
display image.
MENU
INPUT1
OPTION
PICTURE
CONTRAST
SCREEN
SETUP
:
0
BRIGHTNESS
COLOR
TINT
:
:
:
:
0
0
0
0
5.3.6 Example of a Menu Mode Operation
(Applicable only when a PDA-5003/PDA-
5004 is installed.)
SHARPNESS
PICTURE RESET
The basic operation in the menu mode is explained using
brightness adjustment as an example.
SET
MENU
ENTER
EXIT
3 Use the 2/3 buttons to adjust the picture
quality as desired.
MENU
2/3
5
∞
BRIGHTNESS
:
0
SET
SET
MENU
SET
EXIT
5/∞
It is possible to move to other adjustment items
with the 5/∞ buttons.
Remote control unit
4 Press the SET button.
DISPLAY
/ SET
INPUT SCREEN SIZE
– VOL +
STANDBY/ON
MENU
ꢀ
Pressing the SET button writes the value into the
memory and returns the display to the step 2
screen.
5 When the setup is finished, press the MENU
MENU SET
5/∞
2/3
button to exit the menu screen.
Main-control panel
189
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Menu Mode
[Applicable only when a PDA-5003/PDA-5004 is installed]
5.3.7 Adjustment and setting in the Menu Mode
(Applicable only when a PDA-5003/PDA-5004 is installed.)
1) Color Temperature Setting
The color temperature of the video signal input can be set.
Setting should be performed for INPUT1 to INPUT5 in accordance with the following:
• LOW:
Corresponds to – 2000 k
• MID LOW: Corresponds to – 1000 k
• MIDDLE: Corresponds to 0k (standard)
• MID HIGH: Corresponds to + 1000 k
• HIGH:
Corresponds to + 2000 k
Settable condition: When there is video signal input
Factory setting:
MIDDLE
1 Select ‘SETUP’.
Screen 2
2 Place the cursor over ‘COLOR TEMP.’ then press the [SET]
button.
MENU
INPUT1
OPTION
PICTURE
SCREEN
SETUP
COLOR TEMP.
:MIDDLE
AUTO POWER OFF
DNR
MPEG NR
:DISABLE
:MIDDLE
:LOW
CTI
:ON
PURECINEMA
COLOR DECODING
COLOR SYSTEM
SIGNAL FORMAT
:OFF
:RGB
:AUTO
SET
MENU
ENTER
EXIT
Screen 3
3 Each time a [2/3] button is pressed, the setting changes
as shown below.
3 MIDDLE 2
3 MID HIGH 2
3 HIGH 2
3 MID LOW 2
3 LOW 2
COLOR TEMP.
MIDDLE
:
SET
MENU
SET
EXIT
190
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[Applicable only when a PDA-5003/PDA-5004 is installed]
Menu Mode
2) Power Management and Auto Power OFF Setting
When no video signal (synchronizing signal) is detected, this function automatically sets the energy saving state in
order to save power.
• To disable the energy saving function, set to [OFF/DISABLE].
• When there is video signal input:
To set the power standby state when the input signal is not detected within eight minutes, set ‘AUTO POWER
OFF’ to [ENABLE].
• When there is PC signal input:
To switch between the normal-operation state and the energy saving state depending on whether or not there is
an input signal, set ‘POWER MANAGEMENT’ to [ON].
Settable condition : Power management: INPUT1, INPUT2 (PC signal), INPUT5
Auto power OFF: Conditions other than those above
Factory setting
: OFF/DISABLE
1 Select ‘SETUP‘.
MENU
INPUT1
OPTION
PICTURE
POWER MGT.
SIGNAL FORMAT
SCREEN
SETUP
:OFF
2 Place the cursor over ‘POWER MANAGEMENT (AUTO
POWER OFF)’ and change the setting with the [SET]
button.
Each time the [SET] button is pressed, the setting is
changed as shown below.
3 OFF/DISABLE
SET
MENU
CHANGE
EXIT
ON/ENABLE 2
Note
• During video signal input:
To return to normal operation, press the power button on the remote control or the main control panel.
Even if the video signal is input, it will not return.
• During personal computer signal input:
To return to normal operation, press the power button on the remote control or the main control panel. It can not
be returned by operating the personal computer or by pressing the [INPUT] button on the remote control or the
main operating panel. But during G ON SYNC input, only operating the personal computer will not cause it to
return. After operating the personal computer, press the [INPUT] button.
• The power consumption during power standby.
PDP-507CMX: 0.6 W
PDP-427CMX: 1.2 W
191
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Menu Mode
[Applicable only when a PDA-5003/PDA-5004 is installed]
3) DNR (digital noise reduction) Setting
The DNR (digital noise reduction) setting can be changed to improve the S/N ratio when a video signal is input. The
setting should be performed for each input (INPUT1 to INPUT 5) and each signal.
Settable conditions: When there is video signal input
Factory setting:
MIDDLE
1 Select ‘SETUP’.
Screen 2
2 Place the cursor over ‘DNR’ then press the [SET] button.
MENU
INPUT1
OPTION
PICTURE
SCREEN
SETUP
COLOR TEMP.
:MIDDLE
AUTO POWER OFF
DNR
MPEG NR
:DISABLE
:MIDDLE
:LOW
CTI
:ON
PURECINEMA
COLOR DECODING
COLOR SYSTEM
SIGNAL FORMAT
:OFF
:RGB
:AUTO
SET
MENU
ENTER
EXIT
Screen 3
3 Each time a [2/3] button is pressed, the setting changes
as shown below.
3 OFF 2
3 HIGH 2
3 MIDDLE 2
3 LOW 2
Note
DNR is unavailable during 1080p signal or multi screen
display.
DNR
MIDDLE
:
SET
MENU
SET
EXIT
192
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[Applicable only when a PDA-5003/PDA-5004 is installed]
Menu Mode
4) MPEG NR Setting
This is set when the noise (mosquito noise) of the video such as in a digital broadcast or DVD is disturbing.
The setting should be performed for each input (INPUT1 to INPUT5) and each signal.
Settable condition: When there is video signal input
Factory setting:
LOW
1 Select ‘SETUP’.
Screen 2
2 Place the cursor over ‘MPEG NR’ then press the [SET]
button.
MENU
INPUT1
OPTION
PICTURE
SCREEN
SETUP
COLOR TEMP.
:MIDDLE
AUTO POWER OFF
DNR
MPEG NR
:DISABLE
:MIDDLE
:LOW
CTI
:ON
PURECINEMA
COLOR DECODING
COLOR SYSTEM
SIGNAL FORMAT
:OFF
:RGB
:AUTO
SET
MENU
ENTER
EXIT
3 Each time a [2/3] button is pressed, the setting changes
Screen 3
as shown below.
3 OFF 2
3 HIGH 2
3 MIDDLE 2
3 LOW 2
MPEG NR
LOW
:
SET
MENU
SET
EXIT
193
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Menu Mode
[Applicable only when a PDA-5003/PDA-5004 is installed]
5) CTI Setting
This setting sharpens the color contours as desired.
The setting should be performed for each input (INPUT1 to INPUT5) and each signal.
Settable condition: When there is video signal input
Factory setting:
ON
1 Select ‘SETUP’.
Screen 2
2 Place the cursor over ‘CTI’ then press the [SET] button.
MENU
INPUT1
OPTION
PICTURE
SCREEN
SETUP
COLOR TEMP.
:MIDDLE
AUTO POWER OFF
DNR
MPEG NR
:DISABLE
:MIDDLE
:LOW
CTI
:ON
PURECINEMA
COLOR DECODING
COLOR SYSTEM
SIGNAL FORMAT
:OFF
:RGB
:AUTO
SET
MENU
ENTER
EXIT
Screen 3
3 Each time a [2/3] button is pressed, the setting changes
as shown below.
3 OFF 2
3 ON 2
CTI
ON
:
SET
MENU
SET
EXIT
194
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[Applicable only when a PDA-5003/PDA-5004 is installed]
Menu Mode
6) PURECINEMA Setting
The PURECINEMA function automatically detects video signals such as movies that are filmed at 24 frames per
second then converts them to a progressive video signal by a 2-3 pull-down process. Normally, when the PURECINEMA
function is used, the ‘ON’ setting should be used.
The PURECINEMA setting should be performed for each input (INPUT1 to INPUT5) and each signal.
Settable condition: When there is video signal input
Factory setting:
ON
1 Select ‘SETUP’.
2 Place the cursor over ‘PURECINEMA’ then press the [SET]
Screen 2
button.
MENU
INPUT1
OPTION
PICTURE
SCREEN
SETUP
COLOR TEMP.
:MIDDLE
AUTO POWER OFF
DNR
MPEG NR
:DISABLE
:MIDDLE
:LOW
CTI
:ON
PURECINEMA
COLOR DECODING
COLOR SYSTEM
SIGNAL FORMAT
:OFF
:RGB
:AUTO
SET
MENU
ENTER
EXIT
Screen 3
3 Each time a [2/3] button is pressed, the setting changes
as shown below.
3 OFF 2
3 ON 2
• OFF .................. I/P conversion is performed without
detecting the signal of the film source
• ON .................... The film source signal is detected then
the I/P is converted
PURECINEMA
OFF
EXIT
:
SET
MENU
SET
Note
The modes that can be selected differ. Specific information is available on the next page.
195
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Menu Mode
[Applicable only when a PDA-5003/PDA-5004 is installed]
Input Correspondence Signal
INPUT1, INPUT5
Refresh rate
: Not available.
PURECINEMA
Signal format
Types of display call signals
Vertical
Horizontal
(kHz)
OFF
ON
fV
(Hz)
fH
Component
RGB
625i (576i)/SDTV
15.625
28.13
31.25
37.50
56.25
62.50
15.734
31.5
Component
RGB
1125i (1080i)/HDTV
625p (576p)/SDTV
750p (720p)/HDTV
1125p (1080p)/HDTV
1250p/HDTV
Component
RGB
50
Component
RGB
Component
RGB
Component
RGB
Component
RGB
525i (480i)/SDTV
525p (480p)/SDTV
Component
RGB
1125i (1080i)/HDTV
1125i (1035i)/HDTV
Component
RGB
60
33.75
45.0
Component
RGB
750p (720p)/HDTV
Component
RGB
1125p (1080p)/HDTV
67.5
: Not available.
INPUT2
Refresh rate
Horizontal
(kHz)
PURECINEMA
Types of display call signals
Signal format
Vertical
OFF
ON
fV
(Hz)
fH
28.13
31.25
37.50
31.5
33.75
45.0
RGB
RGB
RGB
RGB
RGB
RGB
1125i (1080i)/HDT
V
50
625p (575p)/SDTV
750p (720p)/HDTV
525p (480p)/SDTV
1125i (1080i)/HDTV
750p (720p)/HDTV
60
: Not available.
INPUT3, INPUT4
Refresh rate
PURECINEMA
Types of display call signals
Signal format
Vertical
Horizontal
OFF
ON
fV
(Hz)
fH
(kHz)
Composite
S Video
PAL, SECAM, PAL-N
(black & white 50 Hz)
15.625
15.734
50
Composite
S Video
NTSC, 4.43 NTSC, PAL-M
(black & white 60 Hz)
60
196
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[Applicable only when a PDA-5003/PDA-5004 is installed]
Menu Mode
7) Color Decoding Setting
When a video signal is input at INPUT1, INPUT2 and INPUT5, it corresponds to an RGB and component video signal.
This setting must comply with the connected device.
The setting should be performed as shown below for INPUT1, INPUT2, and INPUT5.
(Example)
• When reproducing an RGB signal: Set to ‘COLOR DECODING: RGB’.
• For reproduction from a DVD player: Set to ‘COLOR DECODING: COMPONENT1’.
Settable condition: INPUT1, INPUT2, INPUT5
When a video signal (signal other than a PC signal) is input
Factory setting:
For 525i, 525p, 625i, 625p signal input: COMPONENT1
For 750p, 1125i, 1125p, 1250p signal input: COMPONENT2
1 Select ‘SETUP’.
Screen 2
2 Place the cursor over ‘COLOR DECODING’ then press
the [SET] button to change the setting.
MENU
INPUT1
OPTION
Each time the [SET] button is pressed, the setting changes
as shown below.
PICTURE
COLOR TEMP.
AUTO POWER OFF
DNR
MPEG NR
SCREEN
SETUP
:MIDDLE
:DISABLE
:MIDDLE
:LOW
3 RGB
3 COMPONENT1
COMPONENT22
CTI
:ON
PURECINEMA
COLOR DECODING
COLOR SYSTEM
SIGNAL FORMAT
:OFF
:RGB
:AUTO
Set ‘COLOR DECODING‘ as follows.
Please take care when assigning settings. Incorrect
settings can adversely affect the Plasma Display.
SET
MENU
CHANGE
EXIT
SETUP
COLOR DECODING
Connected
component
Component video output of
Y/Cb/Cr format.
COMP.1
For example, DVD player, etc.
Component video output of
Y/Pb/Pr format.
COMP.2
For example, digital tuner, etc.
RGB video output of a video deck RGB
etc., with RGB output
DVI video output of an AV
RGB
component with DVI output port
RGB video output of a PC
Not supported
197
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Menu Mode
[Applicable only when a PDA-5003/PDA-5004 is installed]
8) Color System Setting
INPUT3 and INPUT4 correspond to and automatically determine the various TV systems used in countries around
the world.
Normally, this setting is set to ‘COLOR SYSTEM: AUTO (Auto detection)’, however, in the case of VTR signals with
repeated dubbings, proper reproduction of the signal may not be possible (no color, etc.).
In this case, the setting needs to correspond to the input signal as follows.
The setting should be performed for INPUT3 and INPUT4.
• For NTSC signal input:
Set ‘COLOR SYSTEM: NTSC’.
• For PAL signal input:
Set ‘COLOR SYSTEM: PAL’.
• For SECAM signal input: Set ‘COLOR SYSTEM: SECAM’.
• For 4.43NTSC signal input: Set ‘COLOR SYSTEM: 4.43NTSC’.
• For PAL-M signal input:
Set ‘COLOR SYSTEM: PAL M’.
• For PAL-N signal input:
Set ‘COLOR SYSTEM: PAL N’.
By fixing the settings when the input signal is already known in advanced, it is possible to perform smooth image
processing and to prevent signal confusion.
Settable condition: INPUT3, INPUT4
Factory setting:
INPUT3: AUTO
INPUT4: AUTO
1 Select ‘SETUP’.
Screen 2
2 Place the cursor over ‘COLOR SYSTEM’ then press the
[SET] button to change the setting.
MENU
INPUT1
OPTION
Each time the [SET] button is pressed, the setting changes
as shown below.
PICTURE
COLOR TEMP.
AUTO POWER OFF
DNR
MPEG NR
SCREEN
SETUP
:MIDDLE
:DISABLE
:MIDDLE
:LOW
3
3
3
3
AUTO
NTSC
4.43NTSC
PAL
CTI
:ON
:OFF
:RGB
:AUTO
SECAM 2
PAL M 2
PAL N 2
PURECINEMA
COLOR DECODING
COLOR SYSTEM
SIGNAL FORMAT
SET
MENU
ENTER
EXIT
198
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[Applicable only when a PDA-5003/PDA-5004 is installed]
Menu Mode
9) Signal Format Setting
This display automatically identifies PC signals and video signals such as from a DVD player by the frequency of the
input signal. The panel is equipped with a function for identifying the resolution of a PC signal.
Factory setting: AUTO
1 Select ‘SETUP’.
Screen 2
2 Place the cursor over ‘SIGNAL FORMAT’ then press the
[SET] button.
MENU
INPUT1
OPTION
PICTURE
SCREEN
SETUP
COLOR TEMP.
:MIDDLE
AUTO POWER OFF
DNR
MPEG NR
:DISABLE
:MIDDLE
:LOW
CTI
:ON
PURECINEMA
COLOR DECODING
COLOR SYSTEM
SIGNAL FORMAT
:OFF
:RGB
:AUTO
SET
MENU
ENTER
EXIT
Screen 3
3 Press the [2/3] buttons to change the setting.
Each time a [2/3] button is pressed, the signal format
changes as shown below.
3 AUTO 2
3 Others 2
• AUTO ........ It is distinguished as in “5.1.3 List of
Input Correspondence Signals 1) Input
correspondence signals personal
SIGNAL FORMAT
AUTO
:
SET
MENU
SET
EXIT
computer signals” (pg. 146 to 151)
• Others ....... Selectable resolutions are displayed
Note
The display method and selectable screen size differs for each setting. In order to obtain a proper reproduction
method and screen size, check the signal format setting when the signal is input. Change the setting as necessary.
199
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Menu Mode
[Applicable only when a PDA-5003/PDA-5004 is installed]
If it is not displayed correctly when “AUTO” has been set, change the setting of the signal format with reference to
the following table.
7 PC signal
Menu mode
Signal format
Set values
RS232C
Signal format
Set values
V
H
Resolution
720x400
V [Hz] H [kHz]
Remarks
polarity polarity
-
-
70.0
60.0
60.0
60.0
56.0
60.0
60.0
70.0
75.0
56.0
59.8
60.0
70.0
60.0
59.9
60.0
60.0
60.0
75.0
60.0
59.9
60.0
50.0
31.5
31.5
31.0
31.7
35.2
48.4
49.7
56.5
60.0
45.1
48.0
47.8
56.1
47.7
48.3
49.7
53.1
53.7
67.5
63.9
64.1
65.3
56.3
720x400
TYPE 1
TYPE 1
TYPE 3
TYPE 2
TYPE 1
TYPE 1
TYPE 1
TYPE 1
TYPE 1
TYPE 1
TYPE 5
TYPE 4
TYPE 3
TYPE 2
TYPE 3
TYPE 2
TYPE 3
TYPE 4
TYPE 2
TYPE 1
TYPE 2
TYPE 7
TYPE 3
640x480
848x480
852x480
800x600
Neg.
Pos.
-
-
Neg.
-
-
-
Neg.
Pos.
-
-
Neg.
-
-
-
640x480
848x480
852x480
800x600
1024x768
1024x768
1024x768
1024x768
1280x768
1280x768
1280x768
1280x768
1360x768
1376x768
1280x800
1280x854
1152x864
1152x864
1280x1024
1400x1050
1680x1050
1920x1080
1024x768-1
1024x768
1024x768-1
1024x768
1280x768
1280x768-1
1280x768-2
1280x768-1
1360x768
1376x768
1280x800
1280x854
1152x864
1152x864
1280x1024
1400x1050-1
1680x1050
1920x1080
-
-
Neg.
Pos.
Pos.
Pos.
Pos.
-
Pos.
Neg.
Neg.
Pos.
Neg.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Pos.
Neg.
Pos.
Neg.
-
-
-
-
Only INPUT2 effective.
DVI SETUP is set on the PC.
1920x1080
-
-
60.0
67.5
1920x1080
TYPE 9
Only INPUT2 effective.
DVI SETUP is set on the PC.
1600x1200
1920x1200
1920x1200
-
-
-
-
-
-
60.0
59.9
60.0
75.0
74.6
74.0
1600x1200
1920x1200
1920x1200RB
TYPE 5
TYPE 3
TYPE 4
7 Video signal
Menu mode
Signal format
Set values
RS232C
Signal format
Set values
V
H
Resolution
V [Hz] H [kHz]
Remarks
polarity polarity
525p
576p
750p
1125i (1080i)
1125i (1035i)
1125i (1080i)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
60
50
60
50
60
60
31.5
31.25
45
28.13
33.75
33.75
525p
576p
750p
1125i (1080i)
1125i (1035i)
1125i (1080i)
TYPE 4
TYPE 1
TYPE 3
TYPE 2
TYPE 3
TYPE 2
1080p
1125p
1250p
-
-
-
-
-
-
50
60
50
56.25
67.5
62.5
1080p
1125p
1250p
TYPE 1
TYPE 8
TYPE 2
200
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[Applicable only when a PDA-5003/PDA-5004 is installed]
Menu Mode
10) DVI Setting
Choose the component type (either [PC] or [VIDEO]) that is connected to INPUT2.
Settable condition: INPUT2
Factory setting:
PLUG/PLAY: PC
BLACK LEVEL: LOW
1 Select ‘SETUP’.
Screen 2
2 Place the cursor on ‘DVI SET UP’ then press the [SET]
button.
MENU
INPUT1
PICTURE
POWER MGT.
SCREEN
SETUP
:OFF
OPTION
SIGNAL FORMAT
DVI SET UP
SET
MENU
ENTER
EXIT
Screen 3
3 Place the cursor over ‘PLUG/PLAY’ and press the [2/3]
button to change the setting.
Each time a [2/3] button is pressed, the setting changes
as shown below.
3 PC 2
DVI SET UP
3 VIDEO*2
PLUG/PLAY
BLACK LEVEL
:
:
PC
LOW
* Applicable only when the video card is installed.
SET
MENU
SET
EXIT
Screen 4
4 Place the cursor over ‘BLACK LEVEL’ then press the [2/3]
button to change the setting.
Each time the [2/3] button is pressed, the setting
changes as shown below.
3
LOW (0 to 255) 2
DVI SET UP
3
2
HIGH (16 to 235)
PLUG/PLAY
BLACK LEVEL
:
:
PC
LOW
SET
MENU
SET
EXIT
Note
When ‘PLUG/PLAY’ is set to ‘VIDEO’ then ‘BLACK LEVEL’ is set to ‘HIGH’. However, there are devices that can
adjust BLACK LEVEL so confirm the setting on the device.
201
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Menu Mode
[Applicable only when a PDA-5003/PDA-5004 is installed]
11) Menu Language Display Setting
The factory setting for the menu display language is English. To change to another language it is necessary to
change the setting.
Factory setting: ENGLISH
1 Select ‘OPTION’.
Screen 2
2 Place the cursor over ‘LANGUAGE’ then press the [SET]
button.
LANGUAGE
ENGLISH
:
SET
MENU
SET
EXIT
3 Each time a [2/3] button is pressed, the language
Screen 3
changes as shown below.
3
3
ENGLISH
2
2
3
3
FRANÇAIS
ITALIANO
2
2
3
3
ESPAÑOL
DEUTSCH
2
2
With the desired language displayed, press the [SET]
button.
LANGUAGE
FRANÇAIS
:
SET
MENU
SET
EXIT
Note
When the screen display language is set for either INPUT1 to INPUT5, the same display language is set for both
inputs.
202
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[Applicable only when a PDA-5003/PDA-5004 is installed]
Menu Mode
12) Energy Saving Setting
This is a function that reduces power consumption and reduces deterioration of the panel. This setting controls the
brightness of the screen according to the input signal.
• To make the screen bright and easy to see: Set ‘ENERGY SAVE: STANDARD1, STANDARD2 (STANDARD)*’.
• To perform control according to the brightness of the room and to adjust the screen according to the surroundings:
Set ‘ENERGY SAVE: AUTO’.
• To reduce power consumption: Set ‘ENERGY SAVE: MODE1, MODE2’.
• To reduce deterioration of the panel such as burning: Set ‘ENERGY SAVE: MODE 3’.
• To temporarily turn off the present screen display: Set ‘ENERGY SAVE: MUTE‘ and press the MENU button.
Image mute starts at the same time that the menu disappears.
Factory setting: STANDARD1 (STANDARD)*
Differences in video reproduction by energy saving settings (illustration)
For this kind of input signal
(As a standard)
When the white window is displayed, the
peak brightness is decreased as shown
below.
• MODE1: Decreased about 50%
• MODE2: Decreased about 60%
• MODE3: Decreased about 75%
STANDARD1, STANDARD2 (STANDARD)*
For an overall bright video, there is no change
(Figure on the left).
For an overall dark video, the peak brightness
is reproduced even brighter (Figure on the
right).
AUTO
The brightness is automatically changed within the STANDARD (bright) to MODE2 (dark) range according
to the brightness of the room.
Power consumption is lowered by reducing
the brightness of an overall bight video
(Figure on the left).
MODE1, MODE2
Similar to in the STANDARD setting, an overall
dark video is peak brightness is reproduced
even brighter (Figure on the right).
The peak brightness in MODE2 is decreased
by a set amount with respect to that in
MODE1, however it is reproduced brighter
than in MODE3.
MODE3
Input signal graduation is not controlled but
reproduced accurately. Deterioration of the
panel due to burning is reduced since the
peak brightness of an overall dark video is
not increased.
MUTE
It temporarily shuts off the screen that is displayed.
To cancel MUTE, press the MENU button, INPUT button etc.
* PDP-427CMX
Note
The external sensor changes in stages; from an external light of 200 lux (rough value) to external light of 0 lux.
203
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Menu Mode
[Applicable only when a PDA-5003/PDA-5004 is installed]
1 Select ‘OPTION’.
Screen 2
2 Place the cursor over ‘ENERGY SAVE’ then press the [SET]
button to change the setting.
MENU
INPUT1
OPTION
Each time the [SET] button is pressed, the setting changes
as shown below.
PICTURE
LANGUAGE
ENERGY SAVE
TIMER SETTING
SCREEN MGT.
SCREEN
SETUP
:ENGLISH
:STANDARD
3 STANDARD1 3 STANDARD2 (STANDARD)* 3 AUTO
AUTO SETUP MODE
AUTO FUNCTION
PIP DETECT
:INACTIVE
:OFF
:ACTIVE
MUTE 2
MODE3 2
MODE2 2
MODE1 2
* PDP-427CMX
SPLIT FREEZE
:OFF
SET
MENU
CHANGE
EXIT
The ‘ENERGY SAVE’ setting is common for all inputs.
204
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[Applicable only when a PDA-5003/PDA-5004 is installed]
Menu Mode
13) Timer Setting
The present day of the week, time, and daylight savings time are set.
1 Select ‘OPTION’.
2 Place the cursor on ‘TIMER SETTING’ then press the [SET]
button.
3 Place the cursor on ‘PRESENT TIME’ then press the [SET]
button.
4 Adjust each item by pressing the 5/∞/2/3 buttons.
Screen 4
DAYLIGHT SAVING TIME ..... sets daylight savings time
ON: Displays time as present time + one hour
PRESENT TIME
OFF: Disables [DAYLIGHT SAVING TIME] mode
Week..................................... Set current day of the week
Hour, Minute ......................... Sets to current time.
DAYLIGHT
SAVING TIME
:
OFF
MONDAY
12:00:00
SET
RETURN
Note
The set time may slow by approximately one minute per
month from the actual time.
SET
MENU
–
EXIT
The ‘TIMER SETTING’ is set for all inputs.
14) Program/Repeat Timer Setting
It can operate the preset PROGRAM TIMER and REPEAT TIMER.
Factory setting: OFF
1 Select ‘OPTION’.
2 Place the cursor on ‘TIMER SETTING’ then press the [SET]
button.
3 Change the setting by pressing the 2/3 buttons to move
the cursor to the ‘PROGRAM/REPEAT’.
Each time a 2/3 button is pressed, the setting changes
as shown below.
Screen 3
3 OFF
TIMER SETTING
PRESENT TIME
REPEAT 2
PROGRAM 2
PROGRAM/REPEAT
RETURN
:OFF
Note
SET
MENU
–
EXIT
For the PROGRAM/REPEAT TIMER setting, refer to
“Program Timer Setting (pg. 223)” and “Repeat Timer
Setting (pg. 253)” in Integrator Mode.
205
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Menu Mode
[Applicable only when a PDA-5003/PDA-5004 is installed]
15) Orbiter Setting
This function gradually moves the display position of the screen periodically screen position is moved at random,
horizontally or vertically).
Setting ‘MODE1’ to ‘MODE3’ is effective in reducing screen burn when a still image is displayed.
Factory setting: OFF
1 Select ‘OPTION’.
Screen 2
2 Place the cursor on ‘SCREEN MGT.’ then press the [SET]
button.
MENU
INPUT1
OPTION
PICTURE
SCREEN
SETUP
LANGUAGE
:ENGLISH
ENERGY SAVE
TIMER SETTING
SCREEN MGT.
:STANDARD
AUTO SETUP MODE
AUTO FUNCTION
PIP DETECT
:INACTIVE
:OFF
:ACTIVE
SPLIT FREEZE
:OFF
SET
MENU
ENTER
EXIT
Screen 3
2 Place the cursor on ‘ORBITER’ then press the [2/3]
buttons to change the settings.
Each time a [2/3] button is pressed, the setting changes
as shown below.
3 OFF 2
3 MODE1 2
SCREEN MANAGEMENT
3 MODE2 2
3 MODE3 2
ORBITER
SOFT FOCUS
:
:
OFF
OFF
MODE1 ....... The size is reduced so the picture is
completely in the display area.
SET
MENU
SET
EXIT
MODE2 ....... The size is increased so there are no black
bands in the display area.
MODE3 ....... It is displayed at the same size.
Note
• When ‘MODE1’ or ‘MODE2’ has been set, it moves smoothly.
• In ‘MODE3’, it moves in dot units. The entire screen moves one dot horizontally or vertically approximately every
minute. The maximum movement is four dots.
• When it is set to ‘OFF’, the orbiter of the PIP subscreen is ON.
The ‘ORBITER’ setting is common for all inputs.
206
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[Applicable only when a PDA-5003/PDA-5004 is installed]
Menu Mode
16) Soft Focus Setting
Images are softened by suppressing the edge contrast.
Factory setting: OFF
1 Select ‘OPTION’.
Screen 2
2 Place the cursor on ‘SCREEN MGT.’ then press the [SET]
button.
MENU
INPUT1
PICTURE
SCREEN
SETUP
OPTION
LANGUAGE
:ENGLISH
ENERGY SAVE
TIMER SETTING
SCREEN MGT.
:STANDARD
AUTO SETUP MODE
AUTO FUNCTION
PIP DETECT
:INACTIVE
:OFF
:ACTIVE
SPLIT FREEZE
:OFF
SET
MENU
ENTER
EXIT
Screen 3
2 Place the cursor on ‘SOFT FOCUS’ then press the [2/3]
buttons to change the settings.
Each time a [2/3] button is pressed, the setting changes
as shown below.
3 OFF 2
3 1
2
SCREEN MANAGEMENT
3 4 2 3 3 2 3 2 2
ORBITER
SOFT FOCUS
:
:
OFF
OFF
SET
MENU
SET
EXIT
The ‘SOFT FOCUS’ setting is common for all inputs.
207
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Menu Mode
[Applicable only when a PDA-5003/PDA-5004 is installed]
17) Auto Set Up Mode Setting
This function automatically adjusts the signal when the power is turned ON, when input is changed, and when the
type of input signal is changed.
Factory setting: INACTIVE
1 Select ‘OPTION’.
Screen 2
MENU
INPUT1
OPTION
2 Place the cursor on ‘AUTO SETUP MODE’ then press
the [SET] button to change the setting.
PICTURE
SCREEN
SETUP
LANGUAGE
:ENGLISH
ENERGY SAVE
TIMER SETTING
SCREEN MGT.
AUTO SETUP MODE
AUTO FUNCTION
PIP DETECT
:STANDARD
Each time the [SET] button is pressed, the setting changes
as shown below.
:INACTIVE
:OFF
:ACTIVE
3 INACTIVE
ACTIVE 2
SPLIT FREEZE
:OFF
SET
MENU
CHANGE
EXIT
Note
• This setting is only effective when a PC signal is input to INPUT1 or INPUT5.
• Items one and three below are adjusted automatically.
‘SCREEN’ Adjustment inside the menu: 1. ‘POSITION’
2. ‘CLOCK’
3. ‘PHASE’
• The adjustment items are the same as when the ‘AUTO SET UP’ button is pressed on the remote control. However,
the screen may be less precise. This difference in precision is due to short processing time in the AUTO SET UP
MODE.
• It may not be possible to precisely adjust an input signal such as when the signal has low brightness. Set the
AUTO SET UP MODE to INACTIVE then adjust as explained in the following section, ‘SCREEN, CLOCK, PHASE’.
• When the AUTO SET UP MODE is set to ACTIVE and the ‘SCREEN’ is adjusted manually, ‘AUTO SETUP MODE:
ACTIVE’ is displayed.
This is to warn you that although adjustment is manual, when the input changes, or when the type of signal
changes on the outside, the AUTO SET UP MODE functions and the adjusted values are overwritten.
208
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[Applicable only when a PDA-5003/PDA-5004 is installed]
Menu Mode
18) Screen Position, Clock Frequency and Clock Phase Adjustment
In AUTO SET UP, the position and clock are optimally set. However, depending on the type of signal, adjustment
may be off. In this situation, manually adjust the setting.
Example) When a PC signal is input to INPUT1 (1024 x 768)
1 Set the screen size to ‘DOT BY DOT’.
Screen 2
2 Select ‘SCREEN’.
MENU
INPUT1
OPTION
3 Place the cursor on ‘POSITION’ then press the [SET]
PICTURE
POSITION
CLOCK
SCREEN
SETUP
:
0/ 0
0
0
button.
:
:
PHASE
SCREEN RESET
SET
MENU
ENTER
EXIT
Screen 4
4 Use the [5/∞] and [2/3] buttons to adjust the screen
position.
Here, the top and left side of the video display are properly
set.
POSITION
1. With the [∞] button, lower the display until the mask
(black portion) protrudes into the top of the image.
2. With the [5] button, move the display to the point
where the mask at the top disappears.
H
V
+88
+88
3. With the [3] button, move the display until the mask
(black portion) protrudes into the left side of the image.
4. With the [2] button, move the display to the point
where the mask on the left side disappears.
SET
MENU
SET
EXIT
5 Place the cursor on ‘CLOCK’ then press the [SET] button.
Screen 5
MENU
INPUT1
OPTION
PICTURE
POSITION
CLOCK
PHASE
SCREEN
SETUP
:
0/ 0
0
0
:
SCREEN RESET
SET
MENU
ENTER
EXIT
209
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Menu Mode
[Applicable only when a PDA-5003/PDA-5004 is installed]
Screen 6
6 Use the [2/3] buttons to adjust the click frequency.
In step 4, the left side was aligned. Here the right side is
aligned.
1. With the [3] button, move the display until the mask
(black portion) protrudes into the right side of the image.
2. With the [2] button, move the display to the point
where the mask on the right side disappears.
CLOCK
:
0
SET
MENU
SET
EXIT
7 In the adjustment in steps 5 and 6, the left side of the screen moves. With ‘POSITION’, accurately adjust the left
side of the video display again.
As in step 4, used the [2/3] buttons to align the left side.
8 In the adjustment in step 7, the right side of the screen moves. With ‘CLOCK’, adjust the right side again.
As in step 6, use the [2/3] buttons to align the left side.
Repeat steps 7 and 8 until the adjustment value converges then adjust the ‘PHASE’.
There are vertical lines, so it is easier to adjust the screen if the input signal has edges.
9 Place the cursor on ‘PHASE’ then press the [SET] button.
0 Using the [2/3] buttons to adjust the clock phase.
Move the vertical edge of the image to the point where it becomes bold.
Adjustment is now complete.
210
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[Applicable only when a PDA-5003/PDA-5004 is installed]
Menu Mode
19) Auto Function Mode Setting
With the Auto Function mode it is possible to automatically change the input when a signal is detected.
Factory setting: OFF
1 Select ‘OPTION’.
Screen 2
2 Place the cursor over ‘AUTO FUNCTION’ then press the
[SET] button to change the setting.
MENU
INPUT1
OPTION
Each time the [SET] button is pressed, the setting changes
as shown below.
PICTURE
LANGUAGE
SCREEN
SETUP
:ENGLISH
ENERGY SAVE
TIMER SETTING
SCREEN MGT.
AUTO SETUP MODE
AUTO FUNCTION
PIP DETECT
:STANDARD
3 INPUT1
3 OFF
INPUT4 2
:INACTIVE
:OFF
:ACTIVE
• When INPUT1 or INPUT4 is selected, this function
automatically switches to that input when the signal is
detected. Also, in the Auto Function mode, after the input
switches and the signal input stops, the Auto Function
returns to the input that was used before the switch.
SPLIT FREEZE
:OFF
SET
MENU
CHANGE
EXIT
Note
• The Auto Function mode is unavailable when ‘OFF’ is selected.
• When SYNC ON G or a component signal is input to INPUT1, the Auto Function is unavailable.
• After the input has been switched in the Auto Function mode, press the [INPUT] button and select a different
input. The Auto Function mode activates when it detects a change in the selected input signal (from a no-input
state to an input state).
• When the power is turned OFF/ON, the Auto Function mode activates when the signal is input to the selected
input.
• The Auto Function mode is unavailable when the Menu displays, during POINT ZOOM, or during multi-screen
display.
• When the Auto Function mode is set to ‘INPUT1’ or ‘INPUT4’, ‘AUTO’ appears under the option that displays the
selected input (INPUT1 to INPUT5).
• When a video card other than a PDA-5003/PDA-5004 is installed, the Auto Function mode does not function even
when set to ‘INPUT4’.
211
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Menu Mode
[Applicable only when a PDA-5003/PDA-5004 is installed]
20) PIP DETECT Setting
During picture-in-picture display, if no subscreen input signal is detected then the black borders of the subscreen are
automatically turned off.
The subscreen mode function is disabled during side-by-side display.
* The lack of a subscreen input signal means there is no video signal or sync signal.
Factory setting: ACTIVE
Screen 2
1 Select ‘OPTION’.
MENU
INPUT1
OPTION
2 Place the cursor on ‘PIP DETECT’ then press the [SET]
button to change the setting.
PICTURE
SCREEN
SETUP
LANGUAGE
:ENGLISH
ENERGY SAVE
TIMER SETTING
SCREEN MGT.
AUTO SETUP MODE
AUTO FUNCTION
PIP DETECT
:STANDARD
Each time the [SET] button is pressed, the setting changes
as shown below.
:INACTIVE
:OFF
3 ACTIVE
:ACTIVE
INACTIVE 2
SPLIT FREEZE
:OFF
SET
MENU
CHANGE
EXIT
• ACTIVE ...... When no subscreen input signal is input,
no subscreen is displayed. When the
subscreen input is later restored, the
subscreen is displayed again.
• INACTIVE .. When no subscreen signal is input, the
black border is visible.
The ‘PIP DETECT’ setting is common for all inputs.
212
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[Applicable only when a PDA-5003/PDA-5004 is installed]
Menu Mode
21) SPLIT FREEZE Setting
For setting other than [OFF], the image displayed when the FREEZE button is pressed is displayed in a subscreen as
a freeze-frame image.
Factory setting: OFF
1 Select ‘OPTION’.
Screen 2
2 Place the cursor on ‘SPLIT FREEZE’ then press the [SET]
button to change the setting.
MENU
INPUT1
OPTION
Each time the [SET] button is pressed, the setting changes
as shown below.
PICTURE
LANGUAGE
SCREEN
SETUP
:ENGLISH
ENERGY SAVE
TIMER SETTING
SCREEN MGT.
AUTO SETUP MODE
AUTO FUNCTION
PIP DETECT
:STANDARD
3 OFF
3 S BY S
3 PIP
:INACTIVE
:OFF
:ACTIVE
• OFF ........... The still picture displayed at the time the
FREEZE button was pressed is displayed
as a single fullscreen image
SPLIT FREEZE
:OFF
SET
MENU
CHANGE
EXIT
• S BY S ....... When the FREEZE button is pressed, the
freeze-frame image is displayed in the side-
by-side subscreen
• PIP ............. When the FREEZE button is pressed, the
freeze-frame image is displayed in the
picture-in-picture (left-bottom to left-top)
subscreen.
The ‘SPLIT FREEZE’ setting is common for all inputs.
213
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Integrator Mode
5.4 Integrator Mode
5.4.1 About the Integrator Mode
1) Entering the Integrator Mode
• It is possible to set the integrator mode by the following procedure.
1 Press the [DISPLAY] button to display ‘DISPLAY CALL 1’.
2 When ‘DISPLAY CALL 1’ is displayed, press the [DISPLAY] button again (for three seconds or more) to display
‘DISPLAY CALL 2’.
3 It is possible to enter the integrator mode by pressing the [MENU] button when ‘DISPLAY CALL 2’ is displayed.
At this time, press the [MENU] button briefly (the integrator mode cannot be entered if the [MENU] button is held
down for a longer period of time).
2) After entering the integrator mode...
• The adjustment values for COLOR TEMP, DNR, MPEG NR, CTI and PURECINEMA for the PICTURE, SCREEN and
SETUP are all set to their initial values.
The other SETUP and OPTION settings retain their set values.
3) Making adjustment in the integrator mode
• The adjusted values (see section 5.4.3, “Adjustment and Setting in the Integrator Mode 1) to 3)” (pg. 216 to 218))
for PICTURE and SCREEN can be stored in memory for 8 types of input signals (input frequency) for each function.
When a new ninth type of input signal is adjusted, the adjustment data for the oldest input signal is deleted.
• For details, refer to section 5.4.4, “PICTURE, White Balance and SCREEN Position Adjustment Values Memory
Area Tables” (pg. 257).
4) Exiting the integrator mode
• Press the [MENU] button on the remote control or main-control panel to designate to the normal-operation mode.
5) Precautions
(1) In the following cases the integrator mode is automatically cancelled and operation returns to the normal-operation
mode:
• When the input is switched
• When there is no operation for three minutes
(2) Adjustment and settings should be performed on the actual video signal to be used or on an adjustment signal
having the same frequency.
(3) The method for entering the integrator mode for PDP-503CMX (pressing the [MENU] button in standby and then
pressing the [POWER] button) is not supported.
(4) Only English is supported in the integrator mode.
(5) During Point Zoom operation or multi-screen display, ‘DISPLAY CALL 1’ is unavailable even if the [DISPLAY]
button is pressed. After disengaging Point Zoom or multi-screen display, follow the instructions under 1) Entering
the Integrator Mode.
214
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Integrator Mode
4 Press the [MENU] button on the remote control
unit or the main-control panel when ‘DISPLAY
CALL 2’ is displayed to open up the integrator
mode screen.
5.4.2 Example of Integrator Mode Operation
The basic operation in the menu mode is explained using
brightness adjustment as an example.
INTEGRATOR
I N P U T 1
OPTION
PICTURE SCREEN SETUP
DISPLAY
CONT RA ST
:
:
:
:
1 2 8
1 2 8
B R I GHT N E S S
H . ENHANCE
V . ENHANCE
WH I T E BALANCE
C OLOR DET A I L
G AMMA
0
0
MENU
2/3
:
2.0
P I CT URE RESET
SET ENTER
MENU EXIT
SET
5/∞
5 Press the [5/∞] buttons on the remote control
unit or the main-control panel to select
Remote control unit
‘BRIGHTNESS’ then press the [SET] button.
DISPLAY
/ SET
INPUT SCREEN SIZE
– VOL +
STANDBY/ON
MENU
ꢀ
INTEGRATOR
I N P U T 1
OPTION
PICTURE SCREEN SETUP
CONT RA ST
:
:
:
:
1 2 8
1 2 8
B R I GHT N E S S
H . ENHANCE
V . ENHANCE
WH I T E BALANCE
C OLOR DET A I L
G AMMA
MENU DISPLAY 5/∞
2/3
0
0
/ SET
Main-control panel
:
2.0
1 Set the device to normal operation then press
the [INPUT] button to switch to the input to be
adjusted.
P I CT URE RESET
SET ENTER
MENU EXIT
2 Press the [DISPLAY] button on the remote
control unit or the main-control panel to display
‘DISPLAY CALL 1’.
6 Press the [2/3] buttons on the remote control
unit or the main-control panel to adjust to the
desired picture.
INPUT1
FH : 31.5kHz
FV : 60.0Hz
640 480
X
POL.H : NEGA
POL.V : POSI
:
BRIGHTNESS
SET
0
SET
MENU EXIT
FULL
It is possible to move to other adjustment items
with the 5/∞ buttons.
3 Press the [DISPLAY] button on the remote
control unit or the main-control panel (three
seconds or more) when ‘DISPLAY CALL 1’ is
displayed to display ‘DISPLAY CALL 2’.
7 Press the [SET] button on the remote control
unit or the main-control panel.
The adjusted value is saved in memory then
operation returns to the screen in step 5.
To continue with adjusting another item, repeat
steps 5 to 6.
PDP-507CMX
SERIAL NO.
LOT
:****************
:001A001K
:001A001X
:00239H
DATE
HOUR METER
TEMPERATURE
OSD
8 When adjustment is complete, press the [MENU]
button on the remote control unit or the main-
control panel button to return to the normal
screen.
:+25
:ON
BAUD RATE
FAN CONTROL
ID NO. SET
COLOR MODE
INFORMATION
:ABCDEFGHIJKLMN
:9600BPS
:AUTO
:ALL
:NORMAL
215
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Integrator Mode
5.4.3 Adjustment and Setting in the Integrator Mode
For details about button controls, refer to section 5.4.2, “Example of Integrator Mode Operation” (pg. 215).
1) PICTURE Adjustment
The adjustable items shown below are a little different than in the menu mode’s PICTURE adjustment (refer to the
instruction manual).
• PC input
CONTRAST, BRIGHTNESS, H. ENHANCE, V. ENHANCE, etc.
• Video input # (Applicable only when a PDA-5003 or PDA-5004 is installed.)
CONTRAST, BRIGHTNESS, COLOR, TINT, SHARPNESS, etc.
For details, refer to section 5.1.4, “List of Adjustable and Settable Items” (pg. 162).
Screen 1-1
For PC signal input
1 After switching to the input (INPUT1 to INPUT5) to be
adjusted, enter the integrator mode.
INTEGRATOR
I N P U T 1
OPTION
Select ‘PICTURE’.
PICTURE SCREEN SETUP
CONT RA ST
:
:
:
:
1 2 8
1 2 8
B R I GHT N E S S
H . ENHANCE
V . ENHANCE
WH I T E BALANCE
C OLOR DET A I L
G AMMA
0
0
:
2.0
P I CT URE RESET
SET
ENTER
MENU EXIT
For video signal input
(Applicable only when a PDA-5003/PDA-5004 is installed.)
INTEGRATOR
I N P U T 1
OPTION
PICTURE SCREEN SETUP
:
:
:
:
:
CONTRAST
0
0
0
0
2 3
B R I GHTNESS
C OLOR
T I NT
S HARPNESS
WH I T E BALANCE
C OLOR DET A I L
G AMMA
:
2.0
P I C T UR E RESET
SET
ENTER
MENU EXIT
2 Perform adjustment.
Screen 2
Note
When there is PC signal input at INPUT1, 2, and 5,
‘COLOR’, ‘TINT’ and ‘SHARPNESS’ are unavailable.
When there is video input, ‘H. ENHANCE’ and ‘V.
ENHANCE’ are unavailable.
Use the [5/∞] buttons on the remote control or the main-
:
BRIGHTNESS
SET
0
control panel.
SET
MENU EXIT
Perform adjustment using the [2/3] buttons on the remote
control or the main-control panel to change settings.
It is possible to move to another item for adjustment using
the [5/∞] buttons.
The value adjusted here becomes the center value for adjustment in the menu mode.
Press the [SET] button to return to screen 1-1 or screen 2-2.
For details about the adjustable range, refer to section 5.1.4, “List of Adjustable and Settable Items” (pg. 162).
216
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Integrator Mode
2) WHITE BALANCE Adjustment
The adjustable items are R. HIGH, G. HIGH, B. HIGH, R. LOW, G. LOW and B. LOW.
1 Enter the integrator mode.
(Refer to section 5.4.1, “About the Integrator Mode” (pg. 214).)
Select ‘PICTURE’.
Screen 1
INTEGRATOR
PICTURE SCREEN SETUP
2 Place the cursor on ‘WHITE BALANCE’ then press the
[SET] button.
I N P U T 1
OPTION
CONT RA ST
:
:
:
:
1 2 8
1 2 8
0
B R I GHT N E S S
H . ENHANCE
V . ENHANCE
WH I T E BALANCE
C OLOR DET A I L
G AMMA
0
:
2.0
P I CT URE RESET
SET ENTER
MENU EXIT
Screen 3
3 Use the [5/∞] buttons to switch between items.
In screen 3, when ‘YES’ is selected for ‘WHITE BAL.
RESET’, all of the WHITE BALANCE adjustment values
return to the factory settings.
WHITE BALANCE
:
:
:
:
:
:
R. H I G H
G. H I G H
B. H I G H
R. LOW
G. LOW
B. LOW
1 2 8
1 2 8
1 2 8
1 2 8
1 2 8
1 2 8
WH I T E BAL. RESET
RET URN
SET ENTER
MENU EXIT
Screen 3
4 Use the [2/3] buttons to change a setting.
It is possible to move to another item for adjustment using
the [5/∞] buttons.
Press the [SET] button to return to screen 3.
<Adjustable range> Each item: 0 to 255
:
R. HIGH
SET
128
MENU EXIT
SET
217
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Integrator Mode
3) COLOR DETAIL setting
1 Enter the integrator mode.
(Refer to section 5.4.1, “About the Integrator Mode” (pg. 214).)
2 Select ‘PICTURE’.
Screen 3
3 Place the cursor on ‘COLOR DETAIL’ then press the [SET]
button.
INTEGRATOR
PICTURE SCREEN SETUP
I N P U T 1
OPTION
CONT RA ST
:
:
:
:
128
128
0
B R I GHT N E S S
H . ENHANCE
V . ENHANCE
WH I T E BALANCE
C OLOR DET A I L
G AMMA
0
:
2.0
P I CT URE RESET
SET
ENTER
MENU EXIT
Screen 4
4 Use the [5/∞] buttons to switch between items.
COLOR DETAI L
:
:
:
:
:
:
R E D
3 0
3 0
3 0
3 0
3 0
3 0
Y E L LOW
GREEN
C YAN
B L UE
MAGENTA
C . DE TA I L RESET
RE TURN
SET
ENTER
MENU EXIT
Screen 5
5 Adjustment is performed using the [2/3] buttons.
C. DETAIL can be adjusted for each color.
• C. DETAIL RED: The + side approaches magenta, and
the – side approaches yellow.
• C. DETAIL YELLOW: The + side approaches red, and
the – side approaches green.
• C. DETAIL GREEN: The + side approaches yellow, and
the – side approaches cyan.
:
RED
2 9
MENU EXIT
SET
SET
• C. DETAIL CYAN: The + side approaches green, and
the – side approaches blue.
• C. DETAIL BLUE: The + side approaches cyan, and the
– side approaches magenta.
• C. DETAIL MAGENTA: The + side approaches blue, and
the – side approaches red.
It is possible to move to another item for adjustment using
the [5/∞] buttons.
Press the [SET] button to return to screen 3.
218
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Integrator Mode
4) GAMMA Setting
This function sets the GAMMA characteristics for the video.
Factory setting: GAMMA 2.2
1 Enter the integrator mode.
(Refer to section 5.4.1, “About the Integrator Mode” (pg. 214).)
2 Select ‘PICTURE’.
Screen 3
INTEGRATOR
PICTURE SCREEN SETUP
3 Place the cursor on ‘GAMMA’ then press the [SET] button.
I N P U T 1
OPTION
CONTRAST
:
:
:
:
128
128
0
B R I GHTNESS
H. ENHANCE
V . ENHANCE
WHI T E BALANCE
COLOR DET A I L
GAMMA
0
:
2.0
P I CT URE RESET
SET ENTER
MENU EXIT
Screen 4
4 Press the [2/3] buttons to change the setting.
Each time a [2/3] button is pressed, the setting changes
as shown below.
3
2
1.8
3
3
2
2
3
3
2
3
3
2
1.9
2.0
2.1
:
GAMMA
SET
2.0
MENU EXIT
2
2
2.4
2.2
SET
Press the [SET] button to return to screen 3.
Note
• The GAMMA value is set based on Pioneer’s measurement standards.
• After adjusting the WHITE BALANCE, the WHITE BALANCE is not lost even when the GAMMA setting is changed.
219
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Integrator Mode
5) SCREEN (Screen Position) Adjustment
The adjustable items are H. POSITION, V. POSITION, CLOCK, PHASE, H. SIZE and V. SIZE.
Screen 2
1 Enter the integrator mode then switch to the input
For PC signal input
(INPUT1 to INPUT5) to be adjusted.
INTEGRATOR
I N P U T 1
OPTION
2 Select ‘SCREEN’ then select the item to adjust.
PICTURE SCREEN SETUP
H. POSITOIN
V . POSITOIN
CLOCK
PHASE
H. SIZE
:
:
:
:
:
:
1 2 8
In screen 2, when ‘YES’ is selected for the ‘SCREEN
1 2 8
1 2 8
1 6
32
32
RESET’, all SCREEN values return to the factory settings.
V . SIZE
SCREEN RESET
SET
ENTER
MENU EXIT
For video signal input
(Applicable only when a PDA-5003/PDA-5004 is
installed.)
INTEGRATOR
I N P U T 1
OPTION
PICTURE SCREEN SETUP
H. POSITOIN
V . POSITOIN
H. SIZE
V . SIZE
SCREEN RESET
:
:
:
:
1 2 8
1 2 8
32
32
SET
ENTER
MENU EXIT
Screen 3
3 Perform the adjustment.
Note
‘CLOCK’ and ‘PHASE’ can be adjusted when there is PC
signal input.
Use the [5/∞] buttons on the remote control or the main-
control panel to select a different item.
Use the [2/3] buttons on the remote control or the main-
:
H. POSITION
SET
128
MENU EXIT
SET
control panel to change settings.
The values adjusted here become the menu mode’s initial
values.
Press the [SET] button to return to screen 2.
<Adjustable Range>
H. POSITION, V. POSITION when there is PC signal input: 0 to 255 (initial value: 128)
H. POSITION, V. POSITION when there is video signal input: 0 to 127 (initial value: 64) (When a PDA-5003/PDA-
5004 is used.)
H. SIZE, V. SIZE: 0 to 63 (initial value: 0)
CLOCK: 0 to 255 (initial value: 128)
PHASE: 0 to 31 (initial value: 16)
<Adjustment Order>
Performing adjustment in the following order is effective.
V. POSITION ꢀ H. POSITION ꢀ CLOCK ꢀ H. POSITION ꢀ CLOCK ꢀ PHASE
220
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Integrator Mode
6) Brightness Enhancement (BRT. ENHANCE) Setting at the Center of the Screen
This function improves and enhances the brightness of the center of the screen.
• When emphasizing the brightness of the screen: Set to ON.
• When emphasizing uniformity of the screen: Set to OFF.
Factory setting: OFF
1 Enter the integrator mode.
(Refer to section 5.4.1, “About the Integrator Mode” (pg. 214).)
2 Select ‘SETUP’.
Screen 3
INTEGRATOR
PICTURE SCREEN SETUP
3 Place the cursor on ‘BRT. ENHANCE’ then press the [SET]
button.
I N P U T 1
OPTION
:
:
BRT. ENHANCE
SUB VOLUME
OFF
20
SET ENTER
MENU EXIT
Screen 4
4 Each time a [2/3] button is pressed, the setting changes
as shown below.
3 ON 2
3 OFF 2
Perform the BRT. ENHANCE setting for each input
(INPUT1 to INPUT5).
Also, perform the setting for both PC and video signals.
:
BRT. ENHANCE
SET
OFF
MENU EXIT
SET
After setting is complete, press the [SET] button to return
to screen 3.
Note
During video wall, the BRT. ENHANCE function is unavailable,
however, settings can still be changed.
221
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Integrator Mode
7) SUB VOLUME Setting
This item is for adjusting the audio input level for each input.
This is useful when adjusting the level between different sources, for example a DVD player and a PC.
After muting the audio before hand, enter the integrator mode and perform the adjustment.
1 Enter the integrator mode.
(Refer to section 5.4.1, “About the Integrator Mode” (pg. 214).)
2 Select ‘SETUP’.
Screen 3
3 Place the cursor on ‘SUB VOLUME’ then press the [SET]
button.
INTEGRATOR
I N P U T 1
OPTION
PICTURE SCREEN SETUP
:
BRT. ENHANCE
SUB VOLUME
OFF
20
:
SET
ENTER
MENU EXIT
Screen 4
4 Perform the adjustment.
Use the [2/3] buttons on the remote control or the main-
control panel to change settings.
Press the [SET] button to return to screen 3.
<Adjustable Range>
Each item: 0 to 20 (initial value: 20)
:
SUB VOLUME
SET
20
MENU EXIT
SET
<Adjustment Order>
Performing adjustment in the following order is effective.
1. VOLUME (normal-operation mode): Raise the volume to the actual operating condition.
2. SUB VOLUME (integrator mode): Adjust the input with high volume to match the input with low volume.
1 AUDIO INPUT
(INPUT1)
INPUT1
Stereo mini jack
SUB VOLUME
2 AUDIO INPUT
(INPUT2)
Stereo mini jack
INPUT2
SUB VOLUME
INPUT
POWER
SELECTOR
AMPLIFIER
3 AUDIO INPUT
(INPUT3/4) #1
(INPUT3) #2
Pin jack
INPUT3
SUB VOLUME
VOLUME
INPUT4
SUB VOLUME
4 AUDIO INPUT
(INPUT4) #2
Pin jack
Audio block diagram
(concept diagram)
INPUT5
SUB VOLUME
5 AUDIO INPUT
(INPUT5) #
Pin jack
# : Applicable only when a PDA-5003/PDA-5004 is installed.
#1: Applicable only when a PDA-5003 is installed.
#2: Applicable only when a PDA-5004 is installed.
222
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Integrator Mode
8) Program Timer Setting
This option can set the day of the week, time, input, and function desired when the power is turned ON/OFF.
1 Enter the integrator mode.
(Refer to section 5.4.1, “About the Integrator Mode” (pg. 214).)
2 Select ‘OPTION’.
3 Place the cursor on ‘PROGRAM TIMER’ then press the
Screen 3
INTEGRATOR
[SET] button.
I N P U T 1
OPTION
Note
PICTURE SCREEN SETUP
PROGRAM T I MER
To set REP.1 to REP.3, press the [3] button. For the
setting method, see “REPEAT TIMER Setting (pg. 253)”.
The contents of the setting are reflected individually in
REP. 1 to 3 in this page and in REPEAT TIMER in pg. 253,
so be careful about this point.
:
SCR E E N MASK
S I D E M ASK
V I D E O WAL L
BAU D R AT E
I D NO. SE T
GREEN
:
:
3 8 4 0 0 BPS
0 1 H
SET ENTER
MENU EXIT
Screen 4
4 Select the item to be set with the [5/∞/2/3] buttons
then press the [SET] button.
PROGRAM T I MER
OFF INPUT
INPUT4 I NVE RSE
2 3 0 0 INPUT1
DATE
FRI
ON
:
FUNC.
:
:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0 0 0 0
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
8
9
10
RETURN
SEL.
SET
ADJ
MENU EXIT
Screen 5
5 Change the setting with the [5/∞/2/3] buttons then press
the [SET] button.
7 Program timer settings
PROGRAM T I MER
OFF INPUT
INPUT4 I NVE RSE
2 3 0 0 INPUT1
DATE
FRI
ON
:
FUNC.
DATE ........... Sets the day of the week the program timer
will be executed. It can be set as “every
day” or as “every Friday”
ON............... Sets the power ON time
OFF ............. Sets the power OFF time
INPUT.......... Sets the input when the power is turned on.
FUNC. ......... Sets the function that will be executed when
the power is turned ON
:
:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0 0 0 0
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
8
9
10
RETURN
SEL.
SET
ADJ
MENU EXIT
ORB. ........... Sets the Orbiter
INV. ............. Displays inverted
REP.1 .......... Sets the REPEAT 1 input mode.
REP.2 .......... Sets the REPEAT 2 input mode.
REP.3 .......... Sets the REPEAT 3 input mode.
7 To reset the program;
Press the [CLEAR] button with the cursor on DATE. This resets the program.
7 To clear the set contents;
Press the [CLEAR] button with the cursor on ON, OFF, INPUT, FUNCTION. This clears the item’s contents.
223
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Integrator Mode
7 Viewing the program timer screen
• “∗” in the DATE column
This indicates “every”. When there is only “∗” in the DATE column, it means “every day”, while “*FRI” means
“every Friday”.
• ON, OFF column “–“
The hour and minute must be set for this option to function.
• INPUT, FUNCTION column “–“
It displays the “last” (state when the power is off) setting.
Example: At 8:00 AM on Monday, turn on the power and display the input from INPUT1, then at 9:00 AM, display
the input from INPUT2, at 10;00AM, display white, and turn off the power at 11:00 AM.
8:00
ON
9:00
10:00
11:00
INPUT1
Program 1
Program 2
Program 3
INPUT2
WHITE
OFF
PROGRAM T I MER
OFF
:
DATE
MON
MON
MON
ON
:
INPUT
INPUT1
INPUT2
FUNC.
WHITE
1
08 0 0
:
2
3
4
5
6
7
:
09 0 0
:
:
10 0 0 11 0 0
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
8
9
10
RETURN
SEL.
SET
ADJ
MENU EXIT
To execute the program that has continued, set the
time that you want it to turn off for only the final item.
Note
The set time may slow by approximately one minute per month.
The ‘PROGRAM TIMER’ setting is common for all inputs.
When the program timer power has been turned ON, “POWER ON MODE“ is unavailable.
224
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Integrator Mode
9) SCREEN MASK Setting
This function displays the inverse of the normal picture on the entire screen, or displays a single color such as white,
red, green, blue or yellow according to an internal signal in the Plasma Display.
When setting something other than ‘OFF’ or ‘INVERSE’ it is not possible to display a signal input.
When the screen has been burned, this function may be used as an emergency measure for relieving the problem (It
is not possible to completely remove the burning).
For details, refer to section 5.6, “Screen Burning” (pg. 283).
Factory setting: OFF
1 Enter the integrator mode.
(Refer to section 5.4.1, “About the Integrator Mode” (pg. 214).)
2 Select ‘OPTION’.
Screen 3
INTEGRATOR
3 Place the cursor on ‘SCREEN MASK’ then press the [SET]
button to change the setting.
I N P U T 1
OPTION
PICTURE SCREEN SETUP
PROGRAM T I MER
:
Each time the [SET] button is pressed, the setting changes
as shown below.
SCR E E N MASK
S I D E M ASK
V I D E O WAL L
BAU D R AT E
I D NO. SE T
GREEN
3
3
3
2
3
OFF
INVERSE
2
WHITE
RED
2
:
:
3 8 4 0 0 BPS
0 1 H
GREEN
YELLOW
BLUE
SET CHANGE
MENU EXIT
OFF: The normal display appears.
INVERSE: The RGB levels of the display are reversed with
respect to the normal display.
WHITE, RED, GREEN, BLUE, YELLOW: Only the selected color is displayed.
Note
In a mode other than OFF, operation is performed after the OSD display ends.
The ‘SCREEN MASK’ setting is common for all inputs.
225
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Integrator Mode
10) SIDE MASK Setting
This mode is for adjusting the brightness of the no-image section around the screen when the screen size is ‘4:3’ etc.
When performing adjustments, pay attention to the brightness balance between the displayed signal and that of the
adjacent sets.
Factory setting: R. LEVEL, G. LEVEL, B. LEVEL ...... 80
AUTO SIDE MASK ......................... OFF
1 Enter the integrator mode.
(Refer to section 5.4.1, “About the Integrator Mode” (pg. 214).)
2 Select ‘OPTION’.
3 Place the cursor on ‘SIDE MASK’ then press the [SET]
Screen 3
button.
INTEGRATOR
I N P U T 1
OPTION
PICTURE SCREEN SETUP
PROGRAM T I MER
:
SCR E E N MASK
S I D E M ASK
V I D E O WAL L
BAU D R AT E
I D NO. SE T
GREEN
:
:
3 8 4 0 0 BPS
0 1 H
SET
ENTER
MENU EXIT
Screen 4
4 Place the cursor on a level (R. LEVEL, G. LEVEL, B. LEVEL)
then adjust the setting using the [2/3] buttons.
SIDE MASK
<Adjustable Range>
Each item: 0 to 255 (initial value: 80)
R . LEVEL
G. LEVEL
B . LEVEL
:
:
:
8 0
8 0
8 0
AUTO SIDE MASK
DEFAULT
RETURN
:
OFF
SET
MENU EXIT
5 Change the setting by pressing the [2/3] buttons to move
the cursor to the ‘AUTO SIDE MASK’.
Screen 5
Each time a [2/3] button is pressed, the setting changes
SIDE MASK
as shown below.
3 ON
R . LEVEL
G. LEVEL
B . LEVEL
:
:
:
8 0
8 0
8 0
OFF 2
AUTO SIDE MASK
DEFAULT
RETURN
:
OFF
ON....... To reduce burning when a black band appears at
both edges of a 4:3 image displayed on a 16:9
screen, a preset side mask is displayed.
OFF ..... It does not operate.
SET
MENU EXIT
Note
• It is only effective during one screen display.
• It is only effective during INPUT2 and INPUT5 color signal.
• Compatible signals: 1080i, 720p, 1080p
• It takes about five seconds until display starts. If it is a dark image, it may take even longer.
• As the black band on a 16/9 screen disappears, the preset side mask also disappears.
226 • This function does not operate for patterned or for colored bands.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Integrator Mode
6 Place the cursor on ‘DEFAULT’ then press the [SET] button
Screen 6
to return to the factory setting.
SIDE MASK
R . LEVEL
G. LEVEL
B . LEVEL
AUTO SIDE MASK
DEFAULT
RETURN
:
8 0
8 0
8 0
:
:
:
OFF
SET
MENU EXIT
The ‘SIDE MASK’ settings are common for all inputs.
227
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Integrator Mode
11) VIDEO WALL Setting
Use this feature to configure a four panel to 25-panel video wall.
Note
This setting is adjusted when the screen size is full display.
It is not correctly displayed in other screen sizes. (See pg. 161)
Factory setting: DIVIDER .................. OFF
POSITION ............... –
TYPE ....................... NORMAL
AUTO ID.................. OFF
P.ON DELAY ........... OFF
ABL LINK ................ OFF
[Setting Method]
7 Setting the ID NO. SET
Refer to “13) Assigning an ID“ (pg. 233)
7 Setting the screen divider
1 Enter the integrator mode.
(Refer to section 5.4.1, “About the Integrator Mode” (pg. 214).)
2 Select ‘OPTION’.
Screen 3
3 Place the cursor on ‘VIDEO WALL’ then press the [SET]
button.
INTEGRATOR
I N P U T 1
OPTION
PICTURE SCREEN SETUP
PROGRAM T I MER
:
SCR E E N MASK
S I D E M ASK
V I D E O WAL L
BAU D R AT E
I D NO. SE T
GREEN
:
:
3 8 4 0 0 BPS
0 1 H
SET
ENTER
MENU EXIT
Screen 4, 5
4 Place the cursor on ‘DIVIDER’.
VIDEO WALL
:
5 Press the [2/3] buttons then press the [SET] button to
change the settings.
D I V I DER
POS I T I ON
T YPE
OFF
Each time the [2/3] buttons are pressed, the setting
changes as shown below.
:
NORMAL
AUTO I D
P. ON DELAY
ABL L I NK
RETURN
:
:
OFF
OFF
1
3OFF
3
3
3
3
3
3
3 3x3
3
3
2x2
3
5x5
3
4x4
SET
MENU EXIT
OFF, 1 ..... Screen division is not performed. Set it to ‘1‘
to set an ABL link without dividing the screen.
2x2 .......... Four panel video wall
3x3 .......... Nine panel video wall
4x4 .......... 16-panel video wall
5x5 .......... 25-panel video wall
Note
• When four to 25 screens have been selected, set POSITION.
228 • When a problem occurs while programming the video wall settings, externally power down the video wall panels.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Integrator Mode
7 Setting the position
Screen 6
The POSITION is where a particular panel resides in the video
wall.
VIDEO WALL
:
:
D I V I DER
POS I T I ON
T YPE
AUTO I D
P. ON DELAY
ABL L I NK
RETURN
OFF
6 Place the cursor on ‘POSITION’ then press the [SET]
NORMAL
button.
:
:
OFF
OFF
Note
Set ‘DIVIDER‘ at other than ‘OFF‘ and ‘1‘.
SET
MENU EXIT
ENTER
7 Use the [2/3] buttons to change the settings.
Screen 7
[Setting the POSITION]
•When the screen is divided, the Video Wall option is
unavailable.
V I DEO WALL POS I T ION
:
POS I T ION NO.
1 6
•ID positions for four panels
NO.1
NO.4
NO.2
NO.3
•ID positions for nine panels
SET
MENU
SET
EXIT
NO.1
NO.2
NO.3
NO.4
NO.7
NO.5
NO.8
NO.6
NO.9
•ID positions for 16 panels
NO.2
NO.1
NO.3
NO.4
NO.6
NO.10
NO.14
NO.7
NO.11
NO.15
NO.8
NO.12
NO.16
NO.5
NO.9
NO.13
•ID positions for 25 panels
NO.2
NO.1
NO.3
NO.4
NO.5
NO.7
NO.12
NO.17
NO.22
NO.8
NO.13
NO.18
NO.23
NO.9
NO.14
NO.19
NO.24
NO.10
NO.15
NO.20
NO.25
NO.6
NO.11
NO.16
NO.21
7 Setting the display mode
8 Place the cursor on ‘TYPE’ then press the [2/3] buttons
to change the settings.
Screen 8
VIDEO WALL
:
Each time a [2/3] button is pressed, the setting changes
as shown below.
D I V I DER
POS I T I ON
T YPE
OFF
:
3 NORMAL
3
3 ADJUSTED
3
NORMAL
AUTO I D
P. ON DELAY
ABL L I NK
RETURN
:
:
OFF
OFF
NORMAL ..... It expands the video image without
correcting the displacement of the part
where the displays are combined.
SET
MENU EXIT
ADJUSTED... It expands the video image by correcting
the displacement of the part where the
displays are combined.
229
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Integrator Mode
7 Setting AUTO ID
Screen 9
When ‘ON‘ is set, the ID for each of the multiple displays
linked by the remote control cable is set automatically.
VIDEO WALL
:
D I V I DER
POS I T I ON
T YPE
2 5
9 Place the cursor on ‘AUTO ID’ then press the [SET] button.
:
NORMAL
AUTO I D
P. ON DELAY
ABL L I NK
RETURN
:
:
OFF
OFF
SET
MENU
ENTER
EXIT
Screen 0, -
0 Press the [2/3] buttons to change the settings.
- Press the [SET] button.
AUTO I D
:
[Setting the AUTO ID]
AUTO I D
ON
ON....... The AUTO ID function operates
In the case of the four screen configuration, shown below,
Display1 = ID1 and Display 4 = ID4.
Auto ID is only available for four screen/nine screen Video
Walls.
1
4
2
3
1
8
7
2
9
6
3
4
5
SET
MENU
SET
EXIT
COMBINATION
OUT
No.1
No.1
No.2
No.2
COMBINATION
IN
COMBINATION
OUT
No.4 No.3
No.4 No.3
COMBINATION
IN
Display 2
Display 1
COMBINATION
OUT
No.1
No.1
No.2
No.2
COMBINATION
OUT
COMBINATION
IN
No.4 No.3
No.4 No.3
COMBINATION
IN
Display 3
Display 4
OFF ..... The AUTO ID function does not operate.
Note
To execute AUTO ID, be sure to set ID NO. SET in OPTION to a setting other than ALL.
7 Setting the POWER ON DELAY
This option sets the power ON timing for the panels that
make up a video wall to avoid a power surge.
Screen =
= Place the cursor on ‘P.ON DELAY’ and press the [2/3]
buttons to change the settings.
VIDEO WALL
:
D I V I DER
POS I T I ON
T YPE
OFF
[Setting the POWER ON DELAY]
:
NORMAL
(When one, four, and nine screen Video Walls)
AUTO I D
P. ON DELAY
ABL L I NK
RETURN
:
:
OFF
OFF
3 ON
2
OFF
ON........... Turns on the power approximately every
second.
SET
MENU EXIT
OFF ......... When the power is turned on, the power of all
the displays turns on at the same time.
Note
• This function is effective when the AUTO ID setting is ‘ON’. Set the AUTO ID in advance.
• After setting this function, turning on the power to the first display causes the other units to turn on in succession.
• From the second display, it is not possible to turn on the power using the remote control or control panel. To
forcibly turn a panel on, press and hold the remote control’s STANDBY/ON button for three or more seconds.
230
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Integrator Mode
(When 16 and 25 screen Video Walls)
2
3
OFF
2
MODE1
2
2
2
MODE2
OFF → MODE1 (after approx. one second)* → MODE2 (after approx. two seconds)*
* The seconds shown above are yardstick targets; errors may occur.
Shift and set the power on timing by grouping OFF, MODE1, and MODE2.
7 Setting the ABL LINK
This option synchronizes the screen brightness on the multiple displays that form a Video Wall.
Apply the AUTO ID function the select a screen divider option (other than OFF).
~ Place the cursor on ‘ABL LINK’ then press the [2/3]
buttons to change the settings.
Screen ~
VIDEO WALL
:
Each time a [2/3] button is pressed, the setting changes
as shown below.
D I V I DER
POS I T I ON
T YPE
OFF
2
3 ON
:
NORMAL
AUTO I D
P. ON DELAY
ABL L I NK
RETURN
3
OFF 2
:
:
OFF
OFF
[Setting the ABL LINK]
ON........... Brightness of each screen on the video wall is
the same (available for four panel and nine
panel video walls only).
SET
MENU EXIT
OFF ......... Brightness of the screens depends on the
setting of each display.
COMBINATION
OUT
No.1
No.1
No.2
No.2
[Connecting four displays]
COMBINATION
IN
COMBINATION
OUT
No.4 No.3
No.4 No.3
COMBINATION
IN
When this option is ‘ON’, connect the four displays
according to the POSITION sequence numbers in the
figure on the right with the combination cable (Mini-DIN,
6 pin). If the screen division or POSITION has changed,
the ABL link automatically turns off.
Display 2
Display 1
COMBINATION
OUT
No.1
No.1
No.2
No.2
COMBINATION
OUT
COMBINATION
IN
No.4 No.3
No.4 No.3
COMBINATION
IN
Display 3
Display 4
Note
• Connect in the same way for a nine panel video wall.
• In case of a 16 or 25 panel video wall, it is recommended that it be used with the power saving setting for the
entire screen changed to MODE1.
The ‘VIDEO WALL’ settings are common for all inputs.
231
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Integrator Mode
12) BAUD RATE Setting
It is possible to switch the RS-232C transmission speed (baud rate) when controlling or adjusting the display using a
PC. The baud rate can be set to 1200 bps, 2400 bps, 4800 bps, 9600 bps, 19200 bps, or 38400 bps.
Factory setting: 9600 bps
1 Enter the integrator mode.
(Refer to section 5.4.1, “About the Integrator Mode” (pg. 214).)
2 Select ‘OPTION’.
Screen 3
3 Place the cursor on ‘BAUD RATE’ then press the [SET]
button to change the setting.
INTEGRATOR
I N P U T 1
OPTION
Each time the [SET] button is pressed, the setting changes
as shown below.
PICTURE SCREEN SETUP
PROGRAM T I MER
:
SCR E E N MASK
S I D E M ASK
V I D E O WAL L
BAU D R AT E
I D NO. SE T
GREEN
3
3
3
4800BPS
9600BPS
19200BPS
:
:
3 8 4 0 0 BPS
0 1 H
2
2
2
2400BPS
1200BPS
38400BPS
SET
CHANGE
MENU EXIT
The ‘BAUD RATE’ setting is common for all inputs.
Set the baud rate of the display so that it matches the baud rate of the PC.
Also, if the RS-232C cable must extend over a long distance, lower the baud rate.
232
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Integrator Mode
13) Assigning an ID
This option assigns the ID necessary to adjust only the designated display in a video wall or to make an adjustment
using an RS-232C command. For details see “5.5 RS-232C Adjustment” (pg. 262).
Factory setting: ALL
1 Enter the integrator mode.
(Refer to section 5.4.1, “About the Integrator Mode” (pg. 214).)
2 Select ‘OPTION’.
Screen 3
INTEGRATOR
3 Place the cursor on ‘ID NO. SET’ then press the [SET]
button.
I N P U T 1
OPTION
PICTURE SCREEN SETUP
PROGRAM T I MER
:
SCR E E N MASK
S I D E M ASK
V I D E O WAL L
BAU D R AT E
I D NO. SE T
GREEN
:
:
1 2 0 0BPS
0 1 H
SET ENTER
MENU EXIT
Screen 4
4 Press the [2/3] buttons to change the settings.
Each time a [2/3] button is pressed, the setting changes
as shown below.
3 ALL 2
3 01H to FFH 2
ALL............... ID number cannot be set so the panel can
be operated from all remote controls.
01H to FFH... The ID number is set to the designated
number.
:
ID NO. SET
SET
01H
MENU EXIT
SET
Display ID numbers may match the ID number that is displayed when the remote control’s ID NO.
SET button is pressed. The remote control’s [ID NO. SET], [CLEAR] buttons are operational.
Press the [SET] button to return to screen 3.
The ‘ID NO. SET’ settings are common for all inputs.
7 The Remote Control ID
When several Plasma Displays are installed at a single location, it is possible to operate only specified Plasma
Displays with the remote control. Set the following options:
Factory setting: ALL
1 Register panel ID numbers through the integrator menu.
2 Separately register the ID numbers for remote control use
with the [ID NO. SET] button on the remote control.
Press the [ID NO. SET] button to display screen 2.
Each time a [2/3] button is pressed, the setting changes
as shown below.
Screen 2
ID SELECT
POSITION:
1
3 ALL 2
3 01H to FFH 2
:
ID NUMBER
ALL
SET
SET
MENU EXIT
233
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Integrator Mode
Note
• If the Remote Control does not work, display screen 2. Then press [CLEAR] button, the setting back ‘ALL’.
• This function does not assign an ID number to the remote control; it assigns two kinds of panel IDs (Plasma
Display use and remote control use) to control each unit by combining these two IDs.
Assigning ID to
the displays
PDP ID: 01
PDP ID: 02
PDP ID: 03
PDP ID: 04
Remote Control
ID: 01
ID matches only this PDP
Remote Control
ID: 01
Remote Control
ID: 01
Remote Control
ID: 01
To operate
only PDP 01
Remote Control
ID: 02
Remote Control
ID: 02
Remote Control
ID: 02
Remote Control
ID: 02
To operate
only PDP 02
ID matches only this PDP
234
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Integrator Mode
14) Cooling Fan Control Setting
A cooling fan is located on the rear surface of the display.
This function switches the method for controlling this fan.
For automatic control according to an internal temperature sensor, Set to ‘AUTO’.
For maximum rpm (AUTO CONTROL: OFF): Set to ‘MAX’.
Note
The ‘MAX’ setting is effective for special installations.
However, since the fan rotation noise increases, the effect on the surrounding area should be taken into consideration.
For details, refer to section 3, “Installation Site Requirements” (pg. 20).
Factory setting: AUTO
1 Enter the integrator mode.
(Refer to section 5.4.1, “About the Integrator Mode” (pg. 214).)
2 Select ‘OPTION’.
Screen 3
INTEGRATOR
PICTURE SCREEN SETUP
3 Place the cursor on ‘FAN CONTROL’ then press the [SET]
button to change the setting.
I N P U T 1
OPTION
Each time the [SET] button is pressed, the setting changes
as shown below.
:
F AN CONTROL
OS D
A U T O
:
:
F RONT I ND I CATOR
COLOR MOD E
P RO USE
ON
NORMAL
3
3
AUTO
MAX
:
F R C
ON
SET CHANGE
MENU EXIT
The ‘FAN CONTROL’ setting is common for all inputs.
235
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Integrator Mode
15) OSD Display Setting
This option allows the On-Screen-Display (OSD) menu to appear or to be hidden. OSD menu display features and
location are adjustable.
Factory setting: DISPLAY ........... ON
SIZE................... LARGE
ANGLE .............. H
1 Enter the integrator mode.
(Refer to section 5.4.1, “About the Integrator Mode” (pg. 214).)
2 Select ‘OPTION’.
Screen 3
3 Place the cursor on ‘OSD’ then press the [SET] button.
INTEGRATOR
I N P U T 1
OPTION
PICTURE SCREEN SETUP
:
F AN CONTROL
OS D
A U T O
:
:
F RONT I ND I CATOR
COLOR MOD E
P RO USE
ON
NORMAL
:
F R C
ON
SET
ENTER
MENU EXIT
7 Setting the Screen display
4 Place the cursor on ‘DISPLAY’ then use the [2/3] buttons
to change the settings.
Screen 4
Each time a [2/3] button is pressed, the setting changes
as shown below.
OS D
3 ON
2
:
:
:
D I S PLAY
S I Z E
ANGLE
ON
L ARGE
H
3 OFF 2
R E TURN
ON....... Pressing the MENU button displays the menu.
OFF ..... Even if the MENU button is pressed, the menu
is not displayed.
SET
MENU EXIT
7 Setting the Screen size
Screen 5
5 Place the cursor on ‘SIZE’ then use the [2/3] buttons to
change the settings.
Each time a [2/3] button is pressed, the setting changes
as shown below.
OS D
3
2
LARGE
:
:
:
D I S PLAY
S I Z E
ANGLE
ON
L ARGE
H
2
3 SMALL
R E TURN
LARGE ..... The display is doubled horizontally and
vertically.
SET
MENU EXIT
SMALL ..... The display appears in original size.
236
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Integrator Mode
7 Setting the display mode
If the display is installed vertically, set the display mode to ‘V’.
Screen 6
6 Place the cursor on ‘ANGLE’ then use the [2/3] buttons
to change the settings.
Each time a [2/3] button is pressed, the setting changes
as shown below.
OS D
3 H 2
:
:
:
D I S PLAY
S I Z E
ANGLE
ON
L ARGE
H
3 V 2
R E TURN
H ...... The menu is displayed horizontally.
V ....... Because it is positioned vertically, the menu is
displayed rotated 90°. The menu language is
English.
SET
MENU EXIT
Note
To return it to a vertical display, from the menu mode, select ‘OPTION‘ = ‘OSD ANGLE’ = ‘H’.
237
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Integrator Mode
16) FRONT INDICATOR Setting
This function controls the flashing of the indicator on the front of the display.
Factory setting: ON
1 Enter the integrator mode.
(Refer to section 5.4.1, “About the Integrator Mode” (pg. 214).)
2 Select ‘OPTION’.
Screen 3
3 Place the cursor on ‘FRONT INDICATOR’ then press the
[SET] button to change the setting.
INTEGRATOR
I N P U T 1
OPTION
Each time the [SET] button is pressed, the setting changes
as shown below.
PICTURE SCREEN SETUP
:
F AN CONTROL
OS D
A U T O
3
:
:
ON
F RONT I ND I CATOR
COLOR MOD E
P RO USE
ON
NORMAL
OFF 2
:
F R C
ON
ON: Normal LED function
SET
CHANGE
MENU EXIT
OFF: Lights red during standby
The ‘FRONT INDICATOR’ setting is common for all inputs.
Note
Regardless of the ON/OFF setting, during POWER MANAGEMENT operation and shutdown, the green indicator
flashes.
238
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Integrator Mode
17) COLOR MODE Setting
In addition to the normal operation mode (NORMAL), this display has a (STUDIO) mode for use in a TV studio. The
adjustment values for ‘PICTURE’ and ‘SCREEN’ can be set independently.
(Refer to section 5.4.4, “PICTURE, White Balance and SCREEN position Adjustment Values Memory Area Tables”
(pg. 257).)
Change the settings to meet the desired usage.
Factory setting: NORMAL
1 Enter the integrator mode.
(Refer to section 5.4.1, “About the Integrator Mode” (pg. 214).)
2 Select ‘OPTION’.
3 Place the cursor on ‘COLOR MODE’ then press the [SET]
button to change the setting.
Screen 3
INTEGRATOR
PICTURE SCREEN SETUP
I N P U T 1
OPTION
Each time the [SET] button is pressed, the setting changes
as shown below.
:
F AN CONTROL
OS D
A U T O
:
:
3
F RONT I ND I CATOR
COLOR MOD E
P RO USE
ON
NORMAL
NORMAL
2
STUDIO
:
F R C
ON
When the ‘COLOR MODE’ setting is changed, all input
functions as well as the ‘PICTURE’ and ‘SCREEN’
adjustment values for the input signal are changed.
SET CHANGE
MENU EXIT
The ‘COLOR MODE’ setting is common for all inputs.
239
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Integrator Mode
18) PRO USE Setting
Factory setting: UNDERSCAN ............ OFF
IMAGE PROCESS ..... NORMAL
SIGNAL TYPE............ MOTION
1 Enter the integrator mode.
(Refer to section 5.4.1, “About the Integrator Mode” (pg. 214).)
2 Select ‘OPTION’.
Screen 3
3 Place the cursor on ‘PRO USE’ then press the [SET]
button.
INTEGRATOR
I N P U T 1
OPTION
PICTURE SCREEN SETUP
:
F AN CONTROL
OS D
A U T O
:
:
F RONT I ND I CATOR
COLOR MOD E
P RO USE
ON
NORMAL
:
F R C
ON
SET
ENTER
MENU EXIT
Screen 4
4 Place the cursor on the desired item then use the [2/3]
buttons to change the setting.
Each time a [2/3] button is pressed, the setting changes
as shown below.
PRO U S E
:
For PC signal input
U N DE RS CAN
I MAGE PROCESS
S I GNAL T Y PE
R E T URN
O F F
NORMAL
S T I L L
:
:
• IMAGE PROCESS
3
2
2
2
MONO TONE
2
PURE
NORMAL
SET
MENU EXIT
3
2
2
2
BLUE ONLY
HIGH CNT
• SIGNAL TYPE
3
2
MOTION
3 STILL 2
For video signal input (Applicable only when a PDA-5003
or PDA-5004 is installed.)
• UNDERSCAN
3
2
2
OFF
3
ON
• IMAGE PROCESS
3
2
2
2
MONO TONE
2
PURE
NORMAL
3
2
2
2
BLUE ONLY
HIGH CNT
• SIGNAL TYPE
3
2
3
MOTION
3
2
2
NON STD
STILL
240
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Integrator Mode
UNDERSCAN
This function causes the outer edge of the display to appear, beyond the normal effective data area for a video signal.
[Method of Use]
After setting the UNDERSCAN setting to ON and leaving the MENU mode, select ‘UNDERSCAN’ with the remote
control’s SCREEN SIZE button.
Note
Due to signal path loss or internal-circuit loss, the position may shift a little. However, since the display position
cannot be adjusted using SIZE adjustment, adjust the display position at the source.
IMAGE PROCESS
Match the image to a specified display use.
NORMAL .......... Performs a normal display
PURE ................ Displays the input image as faithfully as possible
MONO TONE ... Cuts the color components of the image signal to display only the brightness signal
BLUE ONLY ...... Displays only when RGB are all blue signals. Set it to adjust COLOR and TINT.
HIGH CNT ......... Strengthens the contrast above the NORMAL level to raise the color temperature to approximately
+2000 K
Note
Even when set to ‘MONO TONE’, color appears according to the adjustment of the white balance. To correct this,
readjust the white balance.
SIGNAL TYPE
When performing YC separation (CVBS signal only) or IP conversion processing (interlace signal only), it is possible
to set the image quality for a still image.
Normally, MOTION is set.
When performing YC separation or IP conversion processing, STILL locks the still image without showing motion.
On a still image screen that may screen to have motion (blades of grass or forest), set to STILL.
Screen rolling may occur occasionally depending on the degree of degradation of the input signal. If this happens,
Set to NON STD to solve this issue.
Note
• When STILL is set for a moving image, the picture quality may deteriorate.
• 3D Y/C processing is not performed in the NON STD mode. When this mode is set for a standard signal color,
noise slightly may increase. Switching CTI to OFF can alleviate color noise depending on the screen pattern (refer
to section 5.3.7, “5) CTI Setting” (pg. 194)).
• The NON STD mode is effective for NTSC CVBS (composite video signal).
241
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Integrator Mode
19) FRC Setting
This option allows switching of the frame rate conversion.
Factory setting: ON
1 Enter the integrator mode.
(Refer to section 5.4.1, “About the Integrator Mode” (pg. 214).)
2 Select ‘OPTION’.
Screen 3
3 Place the cursor on ‘FRC’ then press the [SET] button.
Each time the [SET] button is pressed, the setting changes
as shown below.
INTEGRATOR
I N P U T 1
OPTION
PICTURE SCREEN SETUP
:
3
F AN CONTROL
OS D
A U T O
ON
:
:
F RONT I ND I CATOR
COLOR MOD E
P RO USE
ON
NORMAL
2
OFF
:
F R C
ON
ON........... Changes the frame rate.
SET
CHANGE
MENU EXIT
OFF ......... Does not change the frame rate.
The ‘FRC’ setting is common for all inputs.
Input correspondence signals
FRC
MODE
Vertical frequency Horizontal frequency
Use
Remarks
PC
Fv (Hz)
49.67
Fh (kHz)
24.69
640 x 480
848 x 480
OFF
49.54
24.62
PC
50Hz
Retake at a TV studio
(PAL camera)
50.08
40.365
39.988
31.47
1024 x 768
1280 x 768
640 x 480
848 x 480
1024 x 768
49.861
59.94
60.00
31.02
48.36
60.00
59.87
60.02
60.00
48.003
48.014
PC
60Hz
Retake at a TV studio
(NTSC camera)
47.78
63.98
65.32
38.69
38.51
1280 x 768
1280 x 1024
1400 x 1050
1024 x 768
1280 x 768
*1
*2
FILM re-shoot for a movie
(48 Hz camera)
PC
48Hz
*1, 2: The recommended signal formats are shown below.
H-sync
polarity
V-sync
polarity
Dot Clock H-Period H-Sync
H-BP
H-Disp
V-Period V-Sync
V-BP
V-Disp
*1
*2
52MHz
65MHz
1344dot
1688dot
134dot 163dot
118dot 242dot
1024dot
1280dot
806line
802line
4line
4line
31line
29line
768line
768line
nega
nega
nega
nega
242
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Integrator Mode
# Applicable only when a PDA-5003 or PDA-5004 is installed.
Input correspondence signals
FRC
MODE
Vertical frequency Horizontal frequency
Use
Remarks
VIDEO/PC
Fv (Hz)
Fh (kHz)
15.63
625i (576i)/SDTV
28.13
1125i (1080i)/HDTV
625p (576p)/SDTV
31.25
50
Retake at a TV studio
(PAL camera)
VIDEO
50Hz
37.5
56.25
62.5
750p (720p)/HDTV
1125p (1080p)/HDTV
1250p/HDTV
15.75
31.5
525i (480i)/SDTV
525p (480p)/SDTV
Retake at a TV studio
(NTSC camera)
VIDEO
60Hz
60
1125i (1080i)/HDTV
1125i (1035i)/HDTV
33.75
1125p (1080p)/HDTV
640 x 480
67.5
24.69
49.67
49.54
50.08
49.861
59.94
60.00
OFF
848 x 480
24.62
40.365
39.988
31.47
31.02
48.36
PC
50Hz
Retake at a TV studio
(PAL camera)
1024 x 768
1280 x 768
640 x 480
848 x 480
1024 x 768
60.00
59.87
60.02
60.00
48.003
48.014
PC
60Hz
Retake at a TV studio
(NTSC camera)
47.78
63.98
65.32
38.69
38.51
1280 x 768
1280 x 1024
1400 x 1050
1024 x 768
1280 x 768
*1
*2
FILM re-shoot for a movie
(48 Hz camera)
PC
48Hz
*1, 2: The recommended signal formats are shown below.
H-sync
polarity
V-sync
polarity
Dot Clock H-Period H-Sync
H-BP
H-Disp
V-Period V-Sync
V-BP
V-Disp
*1
*2
52MHz
65MHz
1344dot
1688dot
134dot 163dot
118dot 242dot
1024dot
1280dot
806line
802line
4line
4line
31line
29line
768line
768line
nega
nega
nega
nega
243
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Integrator Mode
20) POWER ON MODE Setting
This function sets the input at the time the power is switched on.
Factory setting: INPUT.......... LAST
VOLUME ..... LAST
1 Enter the integrator mode.
(Refer to section 5.4.1, “About the Integrator Mode” (pg. 214).)
2 Select ‘OPTION’.
3 Place the cursor on ‘PWR. ON MODE’ then press the
Screen 3
[SET] button.
INTEGRATOR
I N P U T 1
OPTION
PICTURE SCREEN SETUP
P WR. ON MODE
S E AML E S S SW
M I R ROR MODE
:
OFF
MU L T I S C R EE N SET
REPEAT T I MER
F U NC T I O N RESET
SET
ENTER
MENU EXIT
4 Place the cursor on ‘INPUT’ then use the [2/3] buttons
to change the settings.
Screen 4
Each time a [2/3] button is pressed, the setting changes
as shown below.
P WR. ON MODE
For PC signal input
:
:
:
I NPU T
VOLUME
RE T U RN
I NPU T 1
0
3
3
2
2
3
3
2
2
LAST
INPUT1
INPUT2
MULTI
SET
MENU EXIT
For video signal input (Applicable only when a PDA-5003/
PDA-5004 is installed.)
3
2
3
2
3
2
3
2
INPUT3
2
LAST
3
INPUT1
3
INPUT2
2
2
3
INPUT4
MULTI
INPUT5
Select ‘MULTI’ then press the [SET] button to change to
two-screen input.
244
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Integrator Mode
7 Setting when MULTI is selected
Place the cursor on ‘MULTI MODE’ then use the [2/3] buttons to change the settings.
Each time a [2/3] button is pressed, the setting changes as shown below.
2
3
2
3
2
3
SIDE BY SIDE1
SIDE BY SIDE2
SIDE BY SIDE3
3
2
3
2
3
2
3
2
TOP LEFT
TOP RIGHT
BOTTOM RIGHT
BOTTOM LEFT
Change the setting by placing the cursor on LEFT (or MAIN) in INPUT MODE, then pressing the [2/3] buttons.
The signal that has been selected is displayed in the left screen of SIDE BY SIDE 1 to 3 (or in the main screen of
Picture-in-picture).
Each time a [2/3] button is pressed, the setting changes as shown below.
For PC signal input
3
2
2
INPUT1
INPUT2
3
For video signal input (Applicable only when a PDA-5003/PDA-5004 is installed.)
3
3
3
2
2
2
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
2
3
2
3
INPUT5
INPUT4
Change the setting by placing the cursor on RIGHT (or SUB) in INPUT MODE, then pressing the [2/3] buttons.
The signal that has been selected is displayed in the right screen of SIDE BY SIDE 1 to 3 (or in the sub screen of
Picture-in-picture).
Each time a [2/3] button is pressed, the setting changes as shown below.
For PC signal input
3
3
2
2
INPUT1
INPUT2
For video signal input (Applicable only when a PDA-5003/
PDA-5004 is installed.)
3
3
3
2
2
2
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
2
3
2
3
INPUT5
INPUT4
5 Place the cursor on ‘VOLUME’ then use the [2/3] buttons
to change the settings.
Screen 5
Each time a [2/3] button is pressed, the setting changes
as shown below.
P WR. ON MODE
3
2
2
LAST
:
:
:
I NPU T 1
0
I NPU T
VOLUME
RE T U RN
3 0 to 42
SET
MENU EXIT
245
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Integrator Mode
21) SEAMLESS SW Setting
This setting switches between inputs at a speed of approximately 0.4 seconds.
Factory setting: SEAMLESS .................. OFF
SELECT1 ...................... INPUT1
SELECT2 ...................... INPUT2
1 Enter the integrator mode.
(Refer to section 5.4.1, “About the Integrator Mode” (pg. 214).)
2 Select ‘OPTION’.
Screen 3
3 Place the cursor on ‘SEAMLESS SW’ then press the [SET]
button.
INTEGRATOR
I N P U T 1
OPTION
PICTURE SCREEN SETUP
P WR. ON MODE
S E AML E S S SW
M I R ROR MODE
:
X
MU L T I S C R EE N SET
REPEAT T I MER
F U NC T I O N RESET
SET
ENTER
MENU EXIT
Screen 4
4 Place the cursor on an item then use the [2/3] buttons
to change the settings.
Each time a [2/3] buttons are pressed, the setting
changes as shown below.
SEAML E S S SW
• SEAMLESS SW
:
:
:
SEAML E S S SW
O F F
I NPU T 1
I NPU T 2
S E L E C T1
S E L E C T2
RE T U RN
2
3
ON
3
2
OFF
SET
MENU EXIT
ON........... The inputs set by ‘SELECT1’ and by ‘SELECT2’
are switched rapidly by the SWAP button
OFF ......... High speed switching does not occur
For PC signal input
• SELECT1
3
2
2
INPUT1
3
INPUT2
• SELECT2
3
2
2
INPUT1
3
INPUT2
For video signal input (Applicable only when a PDA-5003/PDA-5004 is installed.)
• SELECT1
3
2
3
2
3
2
INPUT3
2
INPUT1
INPUT2
3
2
3
INPUT4
INPUT5
• SELECT2
3
2
3
2
3
2
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
2
3
2
3
INPUT4
INPUT5
Note
During two-screen display and video wall, high speed switching is unavailable.
246
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Integrator Mode
22) MIRROR MODE Setting
This function reverses the image displayed on the screen in various ways.
For normal reproduction:
Set to ‘MIRROR MODE: OFF’
For left-right reversed reproduction: Set to ‘MIRROR MODE: X’
For up-down reversed reproduction: Set to ‘MIRROR MODE: Y’
For up-down, left-right reproduction: Set to ‘MIRROR MODE: XY’
Normal operating state
[MIRROR MODE: OFF]
Left-right reversal
[MIRROR MODE: X]
Up-down, left-right reversal
[MIRROR MODE: XY]
Up-down reversal
[MIRROR MODE: Y]
The ‘MIRROR MODE: XY’ setting is useful when the panel is hung upside down from the ceiling. With the display
suspended from the PDK-5012 mount, run the bundled cables up toward the ceiling.
Note
• To reverse an up-down setting, set ‘MIRROR MODE’ to ‘XY’ or ‘Y’.
• When using the PDK-5012 ceiling mount, pay attention to the operating temperature conditions (Refer to section
4.8, “Ceiling Mount Unit: PDK-5012” (pg. 116)).
Factory setting: OFF
1 Enter the integrator mode.
(Refer to section 5.4.1, “About the Integrator Mode” (pg. 214).)
2 Select ‘OPTION’.
Screen 3
INTEGRATOR
3 Place the cursor on ‘MIRROR MODE’ then press the [SET]
button to change the setting.
I N P U T 1
OPTION
PICTURE SCREEN SETUP
P WR. ON MODE
S E AML E S S SW
M I R ROR MODE
:
X
MU L T I S C R EE N SET
REPEAT T I MER
F U NC T I O N RESET
SET CHANGE
MENU EXIT
247
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Integrator Mode
4 Each time the [SET] button is pressed, the setting changes
Screen 4
as shown below (the OSD is also reversed).
I N P U T 1
O P T I O N
R O T
I N T E G R A
S E T U P
S C R E E N P I C T U R E
M O D E O N W P R .
S W S S E
M O D O E R R I
S C I R E U L M T
M I E T R T R E P E A
3
3
OFF
X
Y
2
2
XY
A M E S L
:
X
M
T E S N E
R E S N E O T I T C N F U
E X I T
M E N U
C H A N G S E E T
The ‘MIRROR MODE’ setting is common for all inputs.
248
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Integrator Mode
23) MULTISCREEN Setting
This function divides the screen into two areas when the remote control’s SPLIT button is pressed.
Factory setting: S BY S SIZE.................. NORMAL
S BY S LAYOUT ........... MODE1
PIP SIZE ....................... 2
TRANSLUCENT PIP ..... OFF
BANNER PIP ................ OFF
BANNER INPUT ........... INPUT1
1 Enter the integrator mode.
(Refer to section 5.4.1, “About the Integrator Mode” (pg. 214).)
2 Select ‘OPTION’.
Screen 3
INTEGRATOR
3 Place the cursor on ‘MULTISCREEN SET’ then press the
[SET] button.
I N P U T 1
OPTION
PICTURE SCREEN SETUP
P WR. ON MODE
S E AML E S S SW
M I R ROR MODE
:
X
MU L T I S C R EE N SET
REPEAT T I MER
F U NC T I O N RESET
SET ENTER
MENU EXIT
Screen 4
4 Place the cursor on an item then use the [2/3] buttons
to change the settings.
Each time a [2/3] button is pressed, the setting changes
as shown below.
MULTISCREEN S E T
:
S
S
BY
BY
S
S
S I Z E
L AYOUT
NORMAL
1
:
:
:
:
:
:
MOD E
4
• S BY S SIZE
P I P S I Z E
FADE P I P
T RANSLUCEN T P I P
BANNER P I P
BANNER I NPUT
3
3
3
3
NORMAL
FULL
OFF
8 0%
O F F
I NPUT 1
• S BY S LAYOUT
SET SET
MENU EXIT
3
2
3
2
MODE1
3
MODE2
2
MODE3
• PIP SIZE
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3 3
1
2
3
4
• FADE PIP
3
3
3
OFF
ON
• TRANSLUCENT PIP
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
30%
40%
3
10%
3
3
20%
OFF
3
3
3
3
3
80%
70%
60%
50%
• BANNER PIP
OFF
3
3
BOTTOM1
3
BOTTOM2
3
3
3
3
BOTTOM3
3
MID LOW
3
3
3
3
3 3
3
3
3
RIGHT
3
LEFT
3
3
3
3
TOP1
TOP2
TOP3
MID HIGH
• BANNER INPUT
3
3
3
3
INPUT1
INPUT2
Press the [SET] button to return to screen 3.
249
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Integrator Mode
S BY S SIZE/S BY S LAYOUT
Select a SIDE BY SIDE mode display, six options.
MODE1
SBYS1
SBYS4
MODE2
SBYS2
SBYS5
MODE3
SBYS3
SBYS6
NORMAL
FULL
PDP-507CMX
SIDE BY SIDE1
SIDE BY SIDE2
SIDE BY SIDE3
682 (682)*
683 (683)*
341
1024
1024
341
(341)*
(1024)*
(1024)*
(341)*
512
(384)*
256
(192)*
768
(576)*
768
(576)*
256
(192)*
A
B
A
B
B
A
SIDE BY SIDE4
SIDE BY SIDE5
SIDE BY SIDE6
682
683
341
1024
1024
341
768
768
768
B
A
A
B
B
A
*: Numbers in ( ) represent a case of 16:9 contents.
PDP-427CMX
SIDE BY SIDE1
SIDE BY SIDE2
SIDE BY SIDE3
512 (512)*
512 (512)*
256
768
768
256
(192)*
(768)*
(768)*
(256)*
512
(384)*
256
(192)*
768
(576)*
768
(576)*
256
(192)*
A
B
A
B
B
A
SIDE BY SIDE4
SIDE BY SIDE5
SIDE BY SIDE6
512
512
256
768
768
256
768
768
768
B
A
A
B
B
A
*: Numbers in ( ) represent a case of 16:9 contents.
250
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Integrator Mode
PIP SIZE
Select the size of the PICTURE IN PICTURE sub-screen.
PDP-507CMX
PIP1
PIP2
440
(440)*
340
(340)*
B
B
256
(192)*
330
A
A
(248)*
PIP3
PIP4
640
(640)*
540
(540)*
405 B
B
480
(360)*
A
A
(304)*
*: Numbers in ( ) represent a case of 16:9 contents.
PDP-427CMX
PIP1
PIP2
330
(330)*
256
(256)*
B
330B
256
(192)*
A
(248)*
A
PIP3
PIP4
480
(480)*
405
(405)*
405 B
B
A
A
480
(360)*
(304)*
*: Numbers in ( ) represent a case of 16:9 contents.
Note
It is also reflected in the sub-screen size when PIP has been set by “5.3.4 Adjustments and setting in the Menu
Mode: 13) SPLIT FREEZE Setting (pg. 188)”, “5.3.7 Adjustments and setting in the Menu Mode: 21) SPLIT FREEZE
Setting (pg. 213)”.
FADE PIP
If it is set to ON, it is possible to fade in/fade out (gradually appear/disappear) the sub-screen of Picture-in-picture.
Fade in occurs when the sub-screen has changed from no input to a signal.
It is possible to perform fade in/fade out with an RS-232C command at optional times. For details, refer to “5.5.5 List
of RS-232C Commands (pg. 267)”.
Note
It also operates during BANNER PIP.
251
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Integrator Mode
TRANSLUCENT PIP
Select the degree of transparency for the PICTURE IN PICTURE sub-screen.
As the translucent percentage rises, the sub-screen becomes less visible, fades.
BANNER PIP
Select the PICTURE IN PICTURE sub-screen position from the locations shown below.
The Banner sub-screen option uses only the top 1/4 of a PC signal input. For example, to add a picture or text as a
banner from Microsoft PowerPoint, the image or text must be placed in the top 1/4 area of the slide(s).
TOP 3
TOP 2
TOP 1
1024
768 576 384 192
MID HIGH
MID LOW
BOTTOM 3
BOTTOM 2
BOTTOM 1
(It displays the left 256 dots of the input signal. The sub-screen operates only during personal computer signal input.
To insert it, prepare it in an area of 256 dots x 786 lines on the left side.)
256
256
768
LEFT
RIGHT
Note
The higher the resolution of the main screen, the blurrier the sub-screen appears.
BANNER INPUT
Select input (INPUT1 or INPUT2) during BANNER PIP.
Note
This function will not operate if the main screen and BANNER INPUT are the same.
252
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Integrator Mode
24) REPEAT TIMER Setting
When two input modes have been set, they are displayed alternatively.
This can be used to set one screen, two screens, or video wall.
Factory setting: REPEAT TIMER............ SINGLE
1. WORK TIME ............ 00H10M
INPUT MODE........... INPUT1
2. WORK TIME ............ 00H10M
INPUT MODE........... INPUT2
1 Enter the integrator mode.
(Refer to section 5.4.1, “About the Integrator Mode” (pg. 214).)
2 Select ‘OPTION’.
3 Place the cursor on ‘REPEAT TIMER’ then press the [SET]
button.
Screen 4
4 Place the cursor on ‘REPEAT TIMER’ then use the [2/3]
buttons to change the settings.
REPEAT TIMER
Each time a [2/3] button is pressed, the setting changes
as shown below.
:
:
:
REPEAT T I MER
1
SINGLE
0 0H1 0M
I NPUT 1
WORK T I ME
INPUT MODE
3
3
3
3
3 SINGLE
3
VIDEO WALL
MULTI
:
:
0 0H1 0M
I NPUT2
2
WORK T I ME
INPUT MODE
VIDEO WALL .....It operates REPEAT TIMER during video
wall.
SET SET
MENU EXIT
MULTI ................It operates REPEAT TIMER during two
screen display.
SINGLE ..............It operates REPEAT TIMER during
single screen display.
Each item is set as follows.
Select the item with the [5/∞] buttons and change its setting with the [2/3] buttons.
7 Setting the single screen REPEAT TIMER
• WORK TIME .......... It sets the display time in a range from one minute to 24 hours.
• INPUT MODE ........ It sets the signal that is displayed
INPUT1 ⇔ INPUT2
Note
Perform this operation after turning the setting of DIVIDER in “5.4.3 Adjustments and setting in the Integrator Mode:
11) VIDEO WALL Setting (pg. 228)” to OFF.
253
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Integrator Mode
7 Setting the two screen REPEAT TIMER
• MODE .................... This sets the display mode.
S BY S1 ⇔ S BY S2 ⇔ S BY S3 ⇔ BTM LEFT ⇔ BTM RIGHT ⇔ TOP RIGHT ⇔ TOP LEFT
• WORK TIME .......... The display time is set in a range from one minute to 24 hours.
[When Side-by-side has been set]
• LEFT....................... The selected signal is displayed on the left side of Side-by-side 1 to 3
• RIGHT .................... The selected signal is displayed on the right side of Side-by-side 1 to 3
[When Picture-in-picture has been set]
• MAIN ..................... The selected signal is displayed on the main screen of Picture-in-picture.
• SUB........................ The selected signal is displayed on the sub screen of Picture-in-picture.
Note
Perform this operation after turning the setting of DIVIDER in “5.4.3 Adjustments and setting in the Integrator Mode:
11) VIDEO WALL Setting (pg. 228)” to OFF.
7 Setting the Video Wall REPEAT TIMER
• DIVIDER ................. It sets screen division
1 ⇔ 2 x 2 ⇔ 3 x 3
• WORK TIME .......... It sets the display time in a range from one minute to 24 hours.
• INPUT MODE ........ It sets the signal that is displayed
INPUT1 ⇔ INPUT2
Note
• Perform this operation after turning the setting of AUTO ID in “5.4.3 Adjustments and setting in the Integrator
Mode: 11) VIDEO WALL Setting (pg. 228)”.
• The REPEAT TIMER of Video Wall and two screens do not operate simultaneously.
• In the case of VIDEO WALL, only No. 1 is set and all sets are controlled.
254
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Integrator Mode
25) FUNCTIONAL LOCK
This is the FUNCTIONAL LOCK function that prevents operation from the main unit panel or the remote control in
order to prevent improper operation after installation (The RS-232C command is effective.)
While the FUNCTIONAL LOCK is set, if the remote control or main unit operating panel are operated, the following
are displayed in the center of the screen.
• ‘BUTTONS LOCK’
• ‘IR LOCK’
• ‘BUTTONS & IR LOCK’
• ‘MEMORY LOCK‘ *
* ‘MEMORY LOCK‘
The input functions, volume, and multi-screen display status when ‘MEMORY LOCK‘ is set are stored in memory,
and when the power is turned on, the display complies with this information.
When it is shipped from the factory, the lock is set to OFF, so the remote control and the main unit panel can be
operated.
Factory setting: Lock OFF
The following are two setting methods.
1) Main unit operating panel (concealed)
Each time the [FUNCTIONAL LOCK (concealed)] button is pressed, the switching occurs in the following sequence.
3
3 IR LOCK
3 BUTTONS & IR LOCK
3
BUTTONS LOCK
MEMORY LOCK
To turn the lock OFF, press and hold the [FUNCTIONAL LOCK (concealed)] button for at least about five seconds.
2) RS-232C command
Refer to “5.5.5 List of RS-232C Commands (pg. 267)“.
Note
When POWER ON MODE has been simultaneously set, POWER ON MODE has priority.
255
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Integrator Mode
26) Center Position Display
It is possible to display the horizontal and vertical center position.
1 Press the [MUTING] button twice.
2 Press the [SUB INPUT] button.
3 Press the [SET] button.
PDP-507CMX
5
683
384
384
683
5
PDP-427CMX
5
512
384
384
512
5
When it is off, Press the [MENU] button, [DISPLAY] button or [STANDBY ON] button etc.
256
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Integrator Mode
5.4.4 PICTURE, White Balance and SCREEN Position Adjustment Values Memory Area Tables
The memory areas for the PICTURE, White Balance and SCREEN adjustment values have the configuration shown
below. Adjustments in the menu mode share the same memory as the COLOR MODE NORMAL and STUDIO. The
adjustment values in the integrator mode are stored in memory that is separate from that for COLOR MODE NORMAL
and STUDIO.
7 INPUT1
MENU
INTEGRATOR
¥CONTRAST
¥CONTRAST
¥BRIGHTNESS
¥H. ENHANCE !
¥V. ENHANCE !
¥BRIGHTNESS
¥H. ENHANCE !
¥V. ENHANCE !
¥COLOR
¥TINT
¥SHARPNESS
¥H. POSITION
¥V. POSITION
¥CLOCK !
#
¥COLOR
¥TINT
¥SHARPNESS
¥C. DETAIL RED
¥C. DETAIL YELLOW
¥C. DETAIL GREEN
¥C. DETAIL CYAN
¥C. DETAIL BLUE
¥C. DETAIL MAGENTA
¥R. HIGH
#
#
#
#
#
¥PHASE !
¥COLOR TEMP.
¥DNR
¥MPEG NR
¥CTI
¥PURECINEMA
#
#
#
#
#
¥G. HIGH
¥B. HIGH
¥COLOR DECODING
#
¥R. LOW
¥G. LOW
¥B. LOW
¥H. POSITION
¥V. POSITION
¥CLOCK !
¥PHASE !
¥H. SIZE
¥V. SIZE
¥GAMMA
INPUT1–SIGNAL#1
INPUT1–SIGNAL##A
(COLOR MODE; NORMAL)
¥CONTRAST
#: Applicable only when a PDA-5003/PDA-
5004 is installed and when inputting/
adjusting a video signal.
¥BRIGHTNESS
¥H. ENHANCE !
¥V. ENHANCE !
¥COLOR
¥TINT
¥SHARPNESS
#
#
! : Applicable only when inputting/adjusting a
PC signal.
#
¥C. DETAIL RED
¥C. DETAIL YELLOW
¥C. DETAIL GREEN
¥C. DETAIL CYAN
¥C. DETAIL BLUE
¥C. DETAIL MAGENTA
¥R. HIGH
¥G. HIGH
¥B. HIGH
¥R. LOW
¥G. LOW
¥B. LOW
¥H. POSITION
¥V. POSITION
¥CLOCK !
¥PHASE !
¥H. SIZE
¥V. SIZE
¥GAMMA
INPUT1–SIGNAL##A
(COLOR MODE; STUDIO)
257
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Integrator Mode
7 INPUT2
MENU
INTEGRATOR
¥CONTRAST
¥CONTRAST
¥BRIGHTNESS
¥H. ENHANCE !
¥V. ENHANCE !
¥BRIGHTNESS
¥H. ENHANCE !
¥V. ENHANCE !
¥COLOR
¥TINT
¥SHARPNESS
¥H. POSITION
¥V. POSITION
#
¥COLOR
¥TINT
¥SHARPNESS
¥C. DETAIL RED
¥C. DETAIL YELLOW
¥C. DETAIL GREEN
¥C. DETAIL CYAN
¥C. DETAIL BLUE
¥C. DETAIL MAGENTA
¥R. HIGH
#
#
#
#
#
¥COLOR TEMP.
¥DNR
¥MPEG NR
¥CTI
¥PURECINEMA
#
#
#
#
#
¥COLOR DECODING
#
¥G. HIGH
¥B. HIGH
¥R. LOW
¥G. LOW
¥B. LOW
¥H. POSITION
¥V. POSITION
¥H. SIZE
¥V. SIZE
¥GAMMA
INPUT2–SIGNAL#1
INPUT2–SIGNAL##A
(COLOR MODE; NORMAL)
#: Applicable only when a PDA-5003/PDA-
5004 is installed and when inputting/
adjusting a video signal.
¥CONTRAST
¥BRIGHTNESS
¥H. ENHANCE !
¥V. ENHANCE !
! : Applicable only when inputting/adjusting a
PC signal.
¥COLOR
¥TINT
¥SHARPNESS
#
#
#
¥C. DETAIL RED
¥C. DETAIL YELLOW
¥C. DETAIL GREEN
¥C. DETAIL CYAN
¥C. DETAIL BLUE
¥C. DETAIL MAGENTA
¥R. HIGH
¥G. HIGH
¥B. HIGH
¥R. LOW
¥G. LOW
¥B. LOW
¥H. POSITION
¥V. POSITION
¥H. SIZE
¥V. SIZE
¥GAMMA
INPUT2–SIGNAL##A
(COLOR MODE; STUDIO)
258
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Integrator Mode
7 INPUT3
MENU
INTEGRATOR
¥CONTRAST
¥BRIGHTNESS
¥COLOR
¥CONTRAST
¥BRIGHTNESS
¥COLOR
¥TINT
¥TINT
¥SHARPNESS
¥H. POSITION
¥V. POSITION
¥COLOR TEMP.
¥DNR
¥MPEG NR
¥CTI
¥PURECINEMA
¥SHARPNESS
¥C. DETAIL RED
¥C. DETAIL YELLOW
¥C. DETAIL GREEN
¥C. DETAIL CYAN
¥C. DETAIL BLUE
¥C. DETAIL MAGENTA
¥R. HIGH
¥G. HIGH
¥B. HIGH
¥R. LOW
¥G. LOW
¥B. LOW
¥H. POSITION
¥V. POSITION
¥H. SIZE
¥V. SIZE
¥GAMMA
INPUT3–SIGNAL#1
INPUT3–SIGNAL##A
(COLOR MODE; NORMAL)
¥CONTRAST
¥BRIGHTNESS
¥COLOR
(INPUT3 is effective only when a PDA-5003/PDA-
5004 is installed.)
¥TINT
¥SHARPNESS
¥C. DETAIL RED
¥C. DETAIL YELLOW
¥C. DETAIL GREEN
¥C. DETAIL CYAN
¥C. DETAIL BLUE
¥C. DETAIL MAGENTA
¥R. HIGH
Note
When a PDA-5003/PDA-5004 is installed, the
values are stored in memory for both a 50 Hz
video signal and 60 Hz video signal.
¥G. HIGH
¥B. HIGH
¥R. LOW
¥G. LOW
¥B. LOW
¥H. POSITION
¥V. POSITION
¥H. SIZE
¥V. SIZE
¥GAMMA
INPUT3–SIGNAL##A
(COLOR MODE; STUDIO)
259
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Integrator Mode
7 INPUT4
MENU
INTEGRATOR
¥CONTRAST
¥BRIGHTNESS
¥COLOR
¥CONTRAST
¥BRIGHTNESS
¥COLOR
¥TINT
¥TINT
¥SHARPNESS
¥H. POSITION
¥V. POSITION
¥COLOR TEMP.
¥DNR
¥MPEG NR
¥CTI
¥PURECINEMA
¥SHARPNESS
¥C. DETAIL RED
¥C. DETAIL YELLOW
¥C. DETAIL GREEN
¥C. DETAIL CYAN
¥C. DETAIL BLUE
¥C. DETAIL MAGENTA
¥R. HIGH
¥G. HIGH
¥B. HIGH
¥R. LOW
¥G. LOW
¥B. LOW
¥H. POSITION
¥V. POSITION
¥H. SIZE
¥V. SIZE
¥GAMMA
INPUT4–SIGNAL##A
INPUT4–SIGNAL#1
(COLOR MODE; NORMAL)
¥CONTRAST
¥BRIGHTNESS
¥COLOR
(INPUT4 is effective only when a PDA-5003/
¥TINT
¥SHARPNESS
¥C. DETAIL RED
¥C. DETAIL YELLOW
¥C. DETAIL GREEN
¥C. DETAIL CYAN
¥C. DETAIL BLUE
¥C. DETAIL MAGENTA
¥R. HIGH
PDA-5004 is installed.)
Note
When a PDA-5003/PDA-5004 is installed, the
values are stored in memory for both a 50 Hz
video signal and 60 Hz video signal.
¥G. HIGH
¥B. HIGH
¥R. LOW
¥G. LOW
¥B. LOW
¥H. POSITION
¥V. POSITION
¥H. SIZE
¥V. SIZE
¥GAMMA
INPUT4–SIGNAL##A
(COLOR MODE; STUDIO)
260
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Integrator Mode
7 INPUT5
MENU
INTEGRATOR
¥CONTRAST
¥CONTRAST
¥BRIGHTNESS
¥H. ENHANCE !
¥V. ENHANCE !
¥BRIGHTNESS
¥H. ENHANCE !
¥V. ENHANCE !
¥COLOR
¥TINT
¥SHARPNESS
¥H. POSITION
¥V. POSITION
¥CLOCK !
#
¥COLOR
¥TINT
¥SHARPNESS
¥C. DETAIL RED
¥C. DETAIL YELLOW
¥C. DETAIL GREEN
¥C. DETAIL CYAN
¥C. DETAIL BLUE
¥C. DETAIL MAGENTA
¥R. HIGH
#
#
#
#
#
¥PHASE !
¥COLOR TEMP.
¥DNR
¥MPEG NR
¥CTI
¥PURECINEMA
#
#
#
#
#
¥G. HIGH
¥B. HIGH
¥COLOR DECODING
#
¥R. LOW
¥G. LOW
¥B. LOW
¥H. POSITION
¥V. POSITION
¥CLOCK !
¥PHASE !
¥H. SIZE
¥V. SIZE
¥GAMMA
INPUT5–SIGNAL#1
INPUT5–SIGNAL##A
(COLOR MODE; NORMAL)
¥CONTRAST
¥BRIGHTNESS
¥H. ENHANCE !
¥V. ENHANCE !
(INPUT5 is effective only when a PDA-5003/
PDA-5004 is installed.)
¥COLOR
¥TINT
¥SHARPNESS
#
#
#: Applicable only when inputting/adjusting a
#
video signal.
¥C. DETAIL RED
¥C. DETAIL YELLOW
¥C. DETAIL GREEN
¥C. DETAIL CYAN
¥C. DETAIL BLUE
¥C. DETAIL MAGENTA
¥R. HIGH
! : Applicable only when inputting/adjusting a PC
signal.
¥G. HIGH
¥B. HIGH
¥R. LOW
¥G. LOW
¥B. LOW
¥H. POSITION
¥V. POSITION
¥CLOCK !
¥PHASE !
¥H. SIZE
¥V. SIZE
¥GAMMA
INPUT5–SIGNAL##A
(COLOR MODE; STUDIO)
261
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RS-232C Adjustment
5.5 RS-232C Adjustment
This display has an RS-232C terminal. It is possible to use a PC to make various adjustments and settings.
5.5.1 About the RS-232C Adjustment
Adjustments using the RS-232C:
• The adjustments are written to the same memory area as for the integrator mode (refer to section 5.4.4, “PICTURE,
White Balance and SCREEN Position Adjustment Values Memory Area Tables” (pg. 257 to 261)).
Note
(1) Assign an ID before using the RS-232C adjustment. Include the panel ID in the RS-232C command.
For details, refer to section 5.5.2, “Interface” (pg. 263).
(2) Of the adjustment values and setting items set by RS-232C commands, there are some items that are
stored in memory and some that are not. For details, refer to section 5.5.5, “List of RS-232C Commands”
(pg. 267). Also, when storing values in “last” memory, the conditions described in section 5.1.5, “Last
Memory” (pg. 170), must be satisfied.
(3) <OSDS00>/<OSDS01> (OSD display disable/enable setting)
Regardless of the setting, the following items can be displayed.
• Menu display (menu mode, integrator mode)
• Warnings before Auto Power OFF or Power Management operation
• Warning of high temperature inside the panel
• Display announcing that the FUNCTIONAL LOCK is set and the FUNCTIONAL LOCK setting display
• Display call (including holding a button down)
(4) When using RS-232C commands, control the input signal as well as the power. If the power is ON when
there is no signal, the display continues to have a weak discharge. This activity can affect the life of the
display.
262
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RS-232C Adjustment
5.5.2 Interface
1) Connector
D-sub 9 pins (male/straight)
2) Pin layout
Pin No.
1
5
Signal
Pin No.
Signal
1
2
3
4
5
NC (not connected)
TxD (Transmit Data)
RxD (Receive Data)
NC (not connected)
GND
6
7
8
9
NC (not connected)
NC (not connected)
RTS (Request To Send)
NC (not connected)
6
9
3) Baud Rate
9 600 bps (standard)
(switch-able to 1 200, 2 400, 4 800, 19 200, 38 400 bps)
Note
The baud rate of this display should be set to match the baud rate of the PC.
Also, when the RS-232C cable is extended over a long distance, use a slower baud rate.
4) Data format
Start bit: 1 bit
Data bit: 8 bit
Parity: no
Stop bit: 1 bit
5) Connection
Control PC
Control PC
(with D25 serial port )
Plasma Display
(with D9 serial port)
Plasma Display
RXD 3
TXD 2
CTS 5
GND 7
2 TXD
3 RXD
8 RTS
5 GND
RXD 2
TXD 3
CTS 8
GND 5
2 TXD
3 RXD
8 RTS
5 GND
2
3
2
2
3
2
Straight Cable
* D-sub 9-pin/D-sub 25-pin conversion tables are now available on the market.
6) Protocol
From the PC to the display
(1) Sending one command at a time:
STX (02 hex)
ID (2 Byte) COMMAND (3 Byte or 6 Byte) ETX (03 hex)
(2) Sending numerical direct commands:
STX (02 hex)
ID (2 Byte) COMMAND (3 Byte) ARGUMENT (3 Byte) ETX (03 hex)
ID, COMMAND, ARGUMENT are transmitted as ASCII characters.
From the display to a PC
(1) Echo back (Normal response)
Command received and returned but the ID is not returned.
STX (02 hex)
COMMAND (3 Byte or 6 Byte) ETX (03 hex)
Received command is a numerical direct effect command and numerical data is returned:
STX (02 hex) COMMAND (3 Byte) ARGUMENT (3 Byte) ETX (03 hex)
(2) Error (Abnormal response)
Received command is a non-corresponding command, ‘ERR’ is returned:
STX (02 hex)
ERR (3 Byte)
ETX (03 hex)
Received command cannot be processed (when PON is received when the power is already ON, etc.), ‘XXX’ is
returned:
STX (02 hex)
XXX (3 Byte)
ETX (03 hex)
263
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RS-232C Adjustment
5.5.3 Combination Connection
When controlling/adjusting panels, it is convenient to connect several displays to one PC.
By performing a combination connection and assigning IDs to the panels, it is possible to control and adjust several
displays at the same time or separately.
Connection method:
Connect the panels as shown in the figure below.
First Panel
Second Panel
Third Panel
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
RS-232C
RS-232C
RS-232C
COMBINATION
COMBINATION
COMBINATION
PC
OUT
IN
OUT
IN
Combination cable
Combination cable
Note
Only the combination IN terminal or the RS-232C terminal can be used at the same time. Connecting them at the
same time could cause errors. Also, do not pair combination IN terminals or combination OUT terminals. Doing so
could cause communication to fail.
It is possible to use a general-purpose mini DIN 6-pin (straight) cable for the combination cable.
Note
To output RS-232C signals from the combination OUT terminal, an ID must be assigned.
For details, refer to section, 5.5.4, “ID Assignment” (pg. 265).
264
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RS-232C Adjustment
5.5.4 ID Assignment
The ID is assigned from the PC.
Commands: <IDC> (ID CLEAR)........ Clears the assigned ID
<IDS> (ID SET) ............. Assigns an ID
IDS is only effective when an ID is not assigned.
IDs are assigned starting from the panel closest to the PC.
Example: Case of 4 displays (assigning IDs with the PC for the first time)
First, connect an RS-232C and combination cables. (Refer to section 5.5.3, “Combination Connection” (pg.
264).)
PC
Set #1
Set #2
Set #3
Set #4
OUT
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
IN
ID = 01
ID = 02
ID = 03
ID = 04
RS-232C connection
Sent commands:
1 <01 IDS>
‘
2 <02 IDS>
‘
3 <03 IDS>
‘
4 <04 IDS>
By sending RS-232C commands in this order, it is possible to assign an ID for each panel.
When a panel has a PC-assigned ID, it can only receive commands containing the ID. Assign an ID before sending a
command.
Characters that can be used for an ID include, 0 - 9 and A - F (there is not distinction between upper case and lower case
letters).
An ∗ (asterisk) can be used as follows:
<∗∗IDC>: Clear the IDs assigned for all panels
<2∗IN1>: The input for which the first digit is 2 is set to INPUT1
Precautions when assigning IDs
Panels connected after a display’s ID has been cleared cannot be operated with RS-232C commands.
When the <∗∗IDC> command is sent, the IDs for all the sets from Set #1 to Set #4 are cleared. Only the first panel,
which is directly connected to the PC, can be controlled.
Send the command <01 IDS> to control the next panel. Continue setting IDs in this way for the remaining panels to
once again control the displays.
Note
When the IDs are set, when one or both of the IDs before a command is sent from the PC is an ∗, there is no echo.
When sending more commands, wait six seconds before sending the next command.
Example) When ∗∗OOO and ∗1OOO or 1∗OOO (OOO is the command) are sent from the PC, operation is performed
but there is no echo.
265
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RS-232C Adjustment
Under the connection conditions shown below, use a combination cable for up to 16 panels.
Conditions: 1 Length of RS-232C cable connecting PC to Plasma Display: 5 m
2 Combination cable length: 5 m each
3 Wire specifications for linking cable: Mini Din 6-pin straight (7 strand cable)
For one strand, suitable for AWG28:
Cross-section area = 0.08 mm2
≠
7 strands × π r2 = 7 × 3.14 × 0.062 = 0.079 mm2 ≠ 0.08 mm2
PC
Plasma Display
1
RS-232C
5m
OUT
IN
2
OUT
IN
Combination cable 5m
3
OUT
IN
#
Note
For details on the number of displays that can be connected in series using the video OUT terminal (INPUT1, 4), refer to
section 2.3, “Controls and Connectors” (pg. 12).
266
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RS-232C Adjustment
5.5.5 List of RS-232C Commands (Command 434CMX = Command 43MXE1 / Command 505CMX =
Command 50MXE10 , 50MXE11 , 50MXE1 , 50MXE1-S / Command 425CMX = Command 42MXE10)
7 Normal Operation Related Commands
Command
434CMX
505CMX
Command
427CMX
507CMX
Number direct
Command
425CMX
Last
memory
Function
Comment
Effective Minimum Maximum
POWER
POF
+
+
+
+
Turns the power OFF.
Turns the power ON.
ꢀ
ꢀ
PON
INPUT SELECT
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
Displays the present input.
INP
INPS01
INPS02
INPS03
INPS04
INPS05
IN1
+
+
Switches the main screen to INPUT1.
Switches the main screen to INPUT2.
Switches the main screen to INPUT3.
Switches the main screen to INPUT4.
Switches the main screen to INPUT5.
Switches the main screen to INPUT1.
Switches the main screen to INPUT2.
Switches the main screen to INPUT3.
Switches the main screen to INPUT4.
Switches the main screen to INPUT5.
Switches the sub screen to INPUT1.
Switches the sub screen to INPUT2.
Switches the sub screen to INPUT3.
Switches the sub screen to INPUT4.
Switches the sub screen to INPUT5.
Outputs main input to the full screen.
Outputs sub input to the full screen.
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
+
+
+
+
+
IN2
+
IN3
+
IN4
+
IN5
+
SSIS01
SSIS02
SSIS03
SSIS04
SSIS05
–
+
+
+
+
SWM
SWS
–
SCREEN SIZE
AST
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
Executes auto-setup.
ꢀ
Displays the present screen size.
Sets SCREEN SIZE to DOT BY DOT.
Sets SCREEN SIZE to 4 :3.
SZM
SZMS00
SZMS01
SZMS02
SZMS03
SZMS05
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Sets SCREEN SIZE to FULL.
Sets SCREEN SIZE to ZOOM.
Sets SCREEN SIZE to WIDE.
Sets SCREEN SIZE to 14:9.
Sets SCREEN SIZE to UNDERSCAN.
Sets SCREEN SIZE to 2.35:1.
–
SZMS09
–
SZMS06
+
SZMS10
VIDEO
MTN
MTY
SLN
+
+
+
+
Turns video mute to OFF.
Turns video mute to ON.
Cancels FREEZE.
PMTS00
PMTS01
STLS00
STLS01
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Sets FREEZE.
SLY
AUDIO
VOL
+
+
+
+
+
+
Adjusts audio volume.
ꢀ
000
042
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Turns audio mute to OFF.
Turns audio mute to ON.
Sets the audio source to main.
Sets the audio source to sub.
AMN
AMY
–
AMTS00
AMTS01
AUSS01
AUSS02
–
MULTI SCREEN
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
Displays the present multi-screen.
MSC
Turns MULTI SCREEN to OFF.
–
–
MSCS00
MSSS01
MSSS02
MSSS03
MSSS04
+
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Sets the PinP subscreen size to 1.
Sets the PinP subscreen size to 2.
–
Sets the PinP subscreen size to 3.
–
Sets the PinP subscreen size to 4.
–
Displays the present multi-screen type.
Sets the MULTI SCREEN to 2 SCREEN (side by side 1)
Sets the MULTI SCREEN to PinP (lower right).
Sets the MULTI SCREEN to PinP (upper right).
Sets the MULTI SCREEN to PinP (upper left).
Sets the MULTI SCREEN to PinP (lower left).
MST
+
MSTS01
MSTS02
MSTS03
MSTS04
MSTS05
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
+
+
+
+
267
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RS-232C Adjustment
Command
434CMX
505CMX
Command
427CMX
507CMX
Number direct
Command
425CMX
Last
memory
Function
Comment
Effective Minimum Maximum
+
+
Sets the MULTI SCREEN to PoutP (side by side, 2-L).
MSTS06
ꢀ
ꢀ
Sets MULTI SCREEN to SWAP (switches between main
and sub screens).
+
–
MSTS08
+
+
+
+
+
–
–
MSTS09
MSTS10
MSTS11
MSTS12
+
Sets MULTI SCREEN to PoutP (side by side 2-R).
Sets MULTI SCREEN to 2-SCREEN (side by side 3).
Sets MULTI SCREEN to PoutP (side by side 4-L).
Sets MULTI SCREEN to PoutP (side by side 4-R).
Displays the present input to the SUB Screen.
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
–
–
SSI
FUNCTIONAL LOCK
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
Displays the present set value of the FUNCTIONAL LOCK.
Cancels FUNCTIONAL LOCK.
FCL
+
FCLS00
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
+
Prohibits operation of buttons on the display.
Prohibits operation of buttons on the remote control.
Prohibits operation of buttons on the display/remote control.
Sets the memory lock
FCLS01
+
FCLS02
+
FCLS03
+
FCLS04
OSD
+
+
DOF
Turns off the OSD display that is now displayed.
7
“MENU”–“SETUP” related commands
Command
434CMX
505CMX
Command
427CMX
507CMX
Number direct
Command
425CMX
Last
memory
Function
Comment
Effective Minimum Maximum
COLOR TEMP.
CTP
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
Displays the present set value of the color temperature.
Sets the color temperature to LOW.
CTPS01
CTPS02
CTPS03
CTPS04
CTPS05
DNR
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Sets the color temperature to MID LOW.
Sets the color temperature to MIDDLE.
Sets the color temperature to MID HIGH.
Sets the color temperature to HIGH.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
Displays the present set value of the DNR.
Sets digital NR to OFF.
DNR
DNRS00
DNRS01
DNRS02
DNRS03
MPEG NR
MNR
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Sets digital NR to LOW.
Sets digital NR to MIDDLE.
Sets digital NR to HIGH.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
Displays the present set value of the MPEG NR.
Sets MPEG NR to OFF.
MNRS00
MNRS01
MNRS02
MNRS03
CTI
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Sets MPEG NR to LOW.
Sets MPEG NR to MIDDLE.
Sets MPEG NR to HIGH.
+
+
+
+
+
+
Displays the present set value of CTI.
Sets CTI to OFF.
CTR
CTRS00
CTRS01
ꢀ
ꢀ
Sets CTI to ON.
PURE CINEMA
+
+
+
+
Displays the present set value of PURE CINEMA.
Sets PURE CINEMA to OFF.
PUC
+
+
PUCS00
PUCS01
ꢀ
ꢀ
Sets PURE CINEMA to STANDARD.
COLOR DECORDING
+
+
+
+
+
Displays the present color decoding.
MCD
+
Sets COLOR DECORDING to RGB (VIDEO).
Sets COLOR DECORDING to COMPONENT1 (YCbCr).
Sets COLOR DECORDING to COMPONENT2 (YPbPr).
MCDS01
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
+
MCDS02
+
MCDS03
COLOR SYSTEM
+
+
+
+
+
+
Displays the present set value of the color system.
Sets color system to AUTO.
CLS
+
CLSS01
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
+
Sets color system to NTSC.
CLSS02
+
Sets color system to PAL.
CLSS03
+
Sets color system to SECAM.
CLSS04
268
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RS-232C Adjustment
Command
434CMX
505CMX
CLSS05
CLSS06
CLSS07
Command
427CMX
507CMX
+
Number direct
Effective Minimum Maximum
Command
425CMX
Last
memory
Function
Sets color system to 4.43NTSC.
Comment
+
+
+
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
+
+
Sets color system to PAL M.
Sets color system to PAL N.
SIGNAL FORMAT
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
SFT
Displays the present set value of the SIGNAL FORMAT.
Sets SIGNAL FORMAT to Type1.
Sets SIGNAL FORMAT to Type2.
Sets SIGNAL FORMAT to Type3.
Sets SIGNAL FORMAT to Type4.
Sets SIGNAL FORMAT to Type5.
Sets SIGNAL FORMAT to Type6.
Sets SIGNAL FORMAT to Type7.
Sets SIGNAL FORMAT to Type8.
+
SFTS01
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Note 1
Note 1
Note 1
Note 1
+
SFTS02
+
SFTS03
+
SFTS04
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
SFTS05
SFTS06
SFTS07
SFTS08
+
SFTS09 Sets SIGNAL FORMAT to Type9.
SFTS20 Sets SIGNAL FORMAT to Type10.
New
New
+
+
SFTS10
Sets SIGNAL FORMAT to AUTO.
DVI
+
EDIS01
EDIS02
–
–
DSGS01
DSGS02
DBLS01
DBLS02
Sets the DVI connection signal to PC.
Sets the DVI connection signal to STB/DVD.
Sets the DVI BLACK LEVEL to LOW.
Sets the DVI BLACK LEVEL to HIGH.
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Note 2
Note 2
+
+
+
Note 1: The operation differs between the PDP-434CMX/PDP-505CMX and PDP-425CMX/PDP-507CMX/PDP-427CMX
Note 2: EDIS01/02 only operates on the PDP-505CMX
7
“MENU”–“OPTION” related commands
Command
434CMX
505CMX
Command
427CMX
507CMX
Number direct
Command
425CMX
Last
memory
Function
Comment
Effective Minimum Maximum
ENERGY SAVE
+
+
+
ESV
Displays the present set value of ENERGY SAVE.
Sets ENERGY SAVE to STANDARD (STANDARD1).
Sets STANDARD1
only on the 507CMX
+
ESVS00
ꢀ
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
ESVS01
ESVS02
ESVS03
ESVS04
–
Sets ENERGY SAVE to save energy.
Sets ENERGY SAVE to fixed brightness.
Sets ENERGY SAVE to mode 3 (long service life).
Sets ENERGY SAVE to AUTO.
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ESVS05 Sets ENERGY SAVE to MUTE.
New
New, and effective
only on the 507CMX
+
–
ESVS06 Sets ENERGY SAVE to standard 2.
ꢀ
TIMER
+
–
–
TSMS00
TSMS01
Turns summer time to OFF.
Turns summer time to ON.
ꢀ
ꢀ
+
000 – 023: Set by
24-hour clock time
000 – 059: Set
for 60 minutes
001: Monday –
007; Saturday
+
–
–
–
TPH
TPM
TPW
Sets the hour of the present time.
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
000
000
001
023
059
007
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
+
Sets the minute of the present time.
+
Sets the day of week of the present time.
+
–
–
TPTS00
TPTS01
+
Sets PROGRAM TIMER/REPEAT TIMER to OFF.
Sets PROGRAM TIMER to ON.
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
+
–
ORBITER
OMN
OMY
–
TPTS02 Sets REPEAT TIMER to ON.
New
+
ORBS00
ORBS01
ORBS02
ORBS03
Sets the ORBITER to OFF.
Sets the ORBITER to ON (AUTO1).
Sets the ORBITER to ON (AUTO2).
Sets the ORBITER to ON (AUTO3).
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
+
+
+
–
SOFT FOCUS
+
–
–
–
–
–
SOFS00
Sets SOFT FOCUS to OFF.
Sets SOFT FOCUS to 1.
Sets SOFT FOCUS to 2.
Sets SOFT FOCUS to 3.
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
+
SOFS01
SOFS02
SOFS03
SOFS04
+
+
+
Sets SOFT FOCUS to 4.
SUB SCREEN FREEZE
+
–
–
–
SSTS00
SSTS01
SSTS02
Sets SUB SCREEN FREEZE to OFF.
Sets SUB SCREEN FREEZE to SIDE BY SIDE.
Sets SUB SCREEN FREEZE to PinP.
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
+
+
269
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RS-232C Adjustment
7
“INTEGRATOR”–“PICTURE” related commands
Command
434CMX
505CMX
Command
427CMX
507CMX
Number direct
Command
425CMX
Last
memory
Function
Comment
Effective Minimum Maximum
VIDEO QUALITY
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Adjusts the contrast.
CNT
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
255
255
015
015
127
060
015
+
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Adjusts the brightness.
BRT
+
Adjusts the horizontal enhance.
Adjusts the vertical enhance.
Adjusts the color.
ENH
+
ENV
+
COL
+
Adjusts the tint.
TNT
+
Adjusts the sharpness.
SHP
WHITE BALANCE
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Adjusts R.HIGH of the white balance.
Adjusts G.HIGH of the white balance.
Adjusts B.HIGH of the white balance.
Adjusts G.LOW of the white balance.
Adjusts R.LOW of the white balance.
Adjusts B.LOW of the white balance.
RHI
000
000
000
000
000
000
255
255
255
255
255
255
+
GHI
+
BHI
+
GLW
+
RLW
+
BLW
COLOR DETAIL
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
Adjusts color detail red.
Adjusts color detail yellow.
Adjusts color detail green.
Adjusts color detail cyan.
Adjusts color detail blue.
Adjusts color detail magenta.
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
CGR
000
000
000
000
000
000
060
060
060
060
060
060
+
CGY
+
CGG
+
CGC
+
CGB
+
CGM
GAMMA
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
Displays the present set value of gradation.
Sets gradation GAMMA 1.8.
Sets gradation GAMMA 1.9.
Sets gradation GAMMA 2.0.
Sets gradation GAMMA 2.1.
Sets gradation GAMMA 2.2.
Sets gradation GAMMA 2.3.
Sets gradation GAMMA 2.4.
GRA
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
–
GRAS18
GRAS19
GRAS20
GRAS21
GRAS22
GRAS23
GRAS24
–
–
–
–
–
–
PRESET
Restores the PICTURE, W/B adjustment value of the integrator
to the initial values.
+
+
STD
ꢀ
7
“INTEGRATOR”–“SCREEN” related commands
Command
434CMX
505CMX
Command
427CMX
507CMX
Number direct
Command
425CMX
Last
memory
Function
Comment
Effective Minimum Maximum
POSITION
HPS
+
+
+
+
Adjusts the horizontal position.
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
000
000
255
255
Adjusts the vertical position.
VPS
CLOCK/PHASE
+
+
+
Adjusts the CLOCK (PLL frequency).
Adjusts the PHASE (PLL phase).
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
CFR
CPH
000
000
255
031
+
SIZE
+
+
+
+
Adjusts the horizontal size.
Adjusts the vertical size.
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
HSI
VSI
000
000
064
064
PRESET
Restores the SCREEN adjustment value of the integrator to the
initial values.
+
+
FRP
ꢀ
7
“INTEGRATOR”–“SETUP” related commands
Command
434CMX
505CMX
Command
427CMX
507CMX
Number direct
Command
425CMX
Last
memory
Function
Comment
Effective Minimum Maximum
SUB VOLUME
+
+
SVL
Adjusts the SUB VOLUME.
ꢀ
000 020
ꢀ
270
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RS-232C Adjustment
7
“INTEGRATOR”–“OPTION” related commands
Command
434CMX
505CMX
Command
427CMX
507CMX
Number direct
Effective Minimum Maximum
Command
425CMX
Last
memory
Function
Comment
SCREEN MASK
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
Displays the present set value of SCREEN MASK.
Sets SCREEN MASK to OFF.
FMK
FMKS00
FMKS02
FMKS03
FMKS04
FMKS05
FMKS06
FMKS07
SIDE MASK
RSL
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Sets SCREEN MASK to inverse (negative – positive reversed).
Sets SCREEN MASK to white mask.
Sets SCREEN MASK to red mask.
Sets SCREEN MASK to green mask.
Sets SCREEN MASK to blue mask.
Sets SCREEN MASK to yellow mask.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
Adjusts side mask RED.
Adjusts side mask GREEN.
Adjusts side mask BLUE.
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
000
000
000
255
255
255
GSL
BSL
–
SMAS00 Sets AUTO SIDE MASK to OFF.
SMAS01 Sets AUTO SIDE MASK to ON.
New
New
–
VIDEO WALL
MGF
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
Displays the set value of VIDEO WALL.
Sets VIDEO WALL to OFF.
+
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
MGFS00
–
–
–
–
–
Sets VIDEO WALL to DIVIDER:1.
Sets VIDEO WALL to DIVIDER:4.
Sets VIDEO WALL to DIVIDER:9.
Sets VIDEO WALL to DIVIDER:16.
Sets VIDEO WALL to DIVIDER:25.
MGFS11
MGFS12
MGFS13
MGFS14
MGFS15
Displays the present VIDEO WALL (accounting/not accounting
for expanded position/joints) setting.
nn=01 to 04: Sets display position during DIVIDER=2 x 2 (not
accounting for joints).
+
+
+
+
MGP
MGPSnn
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
nn=05 to 08: Sets display position during DIVIDER=2 x 2
(accounting for joints).
nn=10 to 18: Sets display position during DIVIDER=3 x 3 (not
accounting for joints).
nn=20 to 28: Sets display position during DIVIDER=3 x 3
(accounting for joints).
nn=30 to 3F: Sets display position during DIVIDER=4 x 4 (not
accounting for joints).
nn=40 to 4F: Sets display position during DIVIDER=4 x 4
(accounting for joints).
nn=50 to 68: Sets display position during DIVIDER=5 x 5 (not
accounting for joints).
nn=70 to 88: Sets display position during DIVIDER=5 x 5
(accounting for joints).
+
+
ꢀ
ꢀ
–
–
Executes AUTO ID setting.
IDA
Sets POWER ON DELAY mode to OFF.
PDES00
Sets POWER ON DELAY mode to ON (other than cases used for
a higher than 16 screen system) or mode 1 (used for a higher
than 16 screen system).
Sets POWER ON DELAY mode 2 (used for a higher than 16
screen system).
+
+
–
–
PDES01
PDES02
ꢀ
ꢀ
+
+
ꢀ
ꢀ
–
Sets ABL link to OFF.
Sets ABL link to ON.
LNKS00
LNKS01
–
RS-232C
BRA
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
Displays the present set value of baud rate.
Sets the RS-232C baud rate to 1200 bps.
Sets the RS-232C baud rate to 2400 bps.
Sets the RS-232C baud rate to 4800 bps.
Sets the RS-232C baud rate to 9600 bps.
Sets the RS-232C baud rate to 19200 bps.
Sets the RS-232C baud rate to 38400 bps.
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
BRAS01
BRAS02
BRAS03
BRAS04
BRAS05
BRAS06
ID NUMBER
+
+
+
+
Clears the ID number.
Sets the ID number.
ꢀ
ꢀ
IDC
IDS
271
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RS-232C Adjustment
Command
434CMX
505CMX
Command
427CMX
507CMX
Number direct
Command
425CMX
Last
memory
Function
Comment
Effective Minimum Maximum
FAN
FCM
FCA
+
+
+
+
Maximizes fan rotation control.
ꢀ
ꢀ
Automates fan rotation control.
Sets integrator’s fan rotation control maximum to apply a
brightness
New, and effective
only on the 507CMX
–
–
FCU
ꢀ
OSD
DIN
DIY
–
+
+
+
+
+
+
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Sets OSD display to OFF.
OSDS00
OSDS01
OSSS01
OSSS02
OSAS01
OSAS02
Sets OSD display to ON.
Displays expanded OSD.
Displays contracted OSD.
–
Sets the OSD display angle to horizontal.
Sets the OSD display angle to vertical.
–
–
FRONT INDICATOR
+
+
ꢀ
ꢀ
Sets the FRONT INDICATOR to OFF.
Sets the FRONT INDICATOR to ON.
LEN
LEY
LESS00
LESS01
COLOR MODE
+
+
ꢀ
ꢀ
Sets the COLOR MODE to NORMAL.
Sets the COLOR MODE to STUDIO.
CM1
CM2
CLMS00
CLMS01
UNDER SCAN
USCS00
+
+
+
+
+
+
Sets the UNDERSCAN setting to OFF.
Sets the UNDERSCAN setting to ON.
Displays the present set value of UNDERSCAN.
ꢀ
ꢀ
USCS01
USC
IMAGE PROCESS
+
+
–
–
–
–
–
–
Obtains the present IMAGE PROCESS setting.
Sets the IMAGE PROCESS to NORMAL.
Sets the IMAGE PROCESS to PURE.
IPR
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
IPRS01
IPRS02
IPRS03
IPRS04
–
+
+
Sets the IMAGE PROCESS to MONOTONE.
Sets the IMAGE PROCESS to HIGH CONTRAST.
Sets the IMAGE PROCESS to BLUE ONLY.
+
IPRS05
New
FRC
+
FRCS00
+
+
+
+
Displays the present set value of FRC.
Sets the FRC to OFF.
FRC
–
ꢀ
ꢀ
Sets the FRC to ON.
FRCS01
Note 1
SEAMLESS INPUT SWITCH
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
–
Sets the SEAMLESS INPUT SWITCH mode to OFF.
Sets the SEAMLESS INPUT SWITCH mode to ON.
Sets the SEAMLESS SW SELECT 1 to INPUT1.
Sets the SEAMLESS SW SELECT 1 to INPUT2.
Sets the SEAMLESS SW SELECT 1 to INPUT3.
Sets the SEAMLESS SW SELECT 1 to INPUT4.
Sets the SEAMLESS SW SELECT 1 to INPUT5.
Sets the SEAMLESS SW SELECT 2 to INPUT1.
Sets the SEAMLESS SW SELECT 2 to INPUT2.
Sets the SEAMLESS SW SELECT 2 to INPUT3.
Sets the SEAMLESS SW SELECT 2 to INPUT4.
Sets the SEAMLESS SW SELECT 2 to INPUT5.
SLSS00
SLSS01
SL1S01
SL1S02
SL1S03
SL1S04
SL1S05
SL2S01
SL2S02
SL2S03
SL2S04
SL2S05
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
MIRROR
MIRS00
MIRS01
MIRS02
MIRS03
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
Sets mirror mode to OFF (normal display).
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Performs left-right reversal with MIRROR MODE.
Performs up-down reversal with MIRROR MODE.
Performs up-down left-right reversal with MIRROR MODE.
MULTI SCREEN
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Sets sub screen translucence to OFF (0%).
Sets sub screen translucence to 10 %.
Sets sub screen translucence to 20 %.
Sets sub screen translucence to 30 %.
Sets sub screen translucence to 40 %.
Sets sub screen translucence to 50 %.
Sets sub screen translucence to 60 %.
Sets sub screen translucence to 70 %.
Sets sub screen translucence to 80 %.
PTRS00
PTRS01
PTRS02
PTRS03
PTRS04
PTRS05
PTRS06
PTRS07
PTRS08
Note 1: The operation differs between the PDP-434CMX/PDP-505CMX and PDP-425CMX/PDP-507CMX/PDP-427CMX
272
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RS-232C Adjustment
Command
434CMX
505CMX
Command
427CMX
507CMX
Number direct
Command
425CMX
Last
memory
Function
Comment
Effective Minimum Maximum
+
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Sets the BANNER PinP input to INPUT1.
Sets the BANNER PinP input to INPUT2.
Sets the BANNER PinP setting to OFF.
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
BPIS01
BPIS02
BPPS00
BPPS01
BPPS02
BPPS03
BPPS04
+
+
+
+
Sets the BANNER PinP setting to TOP3.
Sets the BANNER PinP setting to MID-HIGH.
Sets the BANNER PinP setting to MID-LOW.
Sets the BANNER PinP setting to BOTTOM3.
Sets the BANNER PinP setting to TOP2.
Sets the BANNER PinP setting to BOTTOM2.
Sets the BANNER PinP setting to TOP1.
Sets the BANNER PinP setting to BOTTOM1.
Sets the BANNER PinP setting to LEFT.
Sets the BANNER PinP setting to RIGHT.
PIP fade in function ineffective.
+
+
+
BPPS05
BPPS06
BPPS07
BPPS08
BPPS09
BPPS10
PFAS00
PFAS01
PFAS10
PFAS11
New
New
New
New
New
New
New
New
New
New
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
PIP fade in function effective.
+
PIP fade in (only when PIP fade in function is effective).
PIP fade off (only when PIP fade in function is effective).
+
FUNCTION
+
+
ꢀ
Executes FUNCTION DEFAULT.
FDT
7
Other commands
Command
434CMX
505CMX
Command
427CMX
507CMX
Number direct
Command
425CMX
Last
memory
Function
Comment
Effective Minimum Maximum
DISPLAY CALL
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Displays DISPLAY CALL 1.
DITS01
DITS02
IM0
Displays DISPLAY CALL 2.
INFORMATION write-in (1-3 characters).
INFORMATION write-in (4-6 characters).
INFORMATION write-in (7-9 characters).
INFORMATION write-in (10-12 characters).
INFORMATION write-in (13-15 characters).
INFORMATION write-in (16-18 characters).
INFORMATION write-in (19-21 characters).
Clears INFORMATION.
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
IM1
IM2
IM3
IM4
IM5
IM6
IMD
AUXILIARY COMMAND
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
Subtracts 10 from the adjustment value.
Minimizes the adjustment value.
DW0
+
DWF
+
Subtracts n from the adjustment value. (n=1~9)
Adds 10 to the adjustment value.
Maximizes the adjustment value.
Adds n to the adjustment value (n = 1 to 9).
Obtains status information.
DWn
+
UP0
+
UPF
+
UPn
GST
QST
QPI
Obtains integrator/PICTURE information.
Obtains integrator/WHITE BALANCE information.
Obtains integrator/SCREEN information.
Obtains SETUP information.
GPI
GWB
QWB
QPS
QSS
QSO
QAP
QCI
GPS
GSS
Obtains Menu Integrator/OPTION information.
Obtains various machine names.
GSO
–
–
Obtains time information.
–
Obtains audio status.
QSU
OTHER
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
MRKS00 Sets mark display off.
New
New
New
New
New
New
New
New
MRKS01 Sets mark display on.
RMCS10 Remote control key: CURSOR RIGHT
RMCS11 Remote control key: CURSOR LEFT
RMCS12 Remote control key: CURSOR UP
RMCS13 Remote control key: CURSOR DOWN
RMCS14 Remote control key: SET
RMCS25 Remote control key: MENU
273
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RS-232C Adjustment
Command
434CMX
505CMX
Command
427CMX
507CMX
Number direct
Command
425CMX
Last
memory
Function
Comment
Effective Minimum Maximum
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
RMCS26 Remote control key: POINT ZOOM
RMCS27 Remote control key: ID NO SET
RMCS28 Remote control key: CLEAR
New
New
New
New
New
New
New
New
New
New
New
New
RMCS29 Remote control key: FREEZE
RMCS30 Remote control key: STANDBY/ON
RMCS31 Remote control key: VOLUME UP
RMCS32 Remote control key: VOLUME DOWN
RMCS33 Remote control key: MUTING
RMCS34 Remote control key: SCREEN SIZE
RMCS35 Remote control key: SPLIT
RMCS36 Remote control key: SUB INPUT
RMCS37 Remote control key: PIP SHIFT
274
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RS-232C Adjustment
5.5.6 QUEST Commands
What are QUEST commands?
• Quest commands output TXD such as adjustment data from the panel’s microprocessor to a PC.
• Adjustment and other data is output in ASCII code.
Note
Command names are given inside brackets < >.
• Data output format
Command
(3 Byte)
Checksum
(2 Byte)
STX (02hex)
Data
····
Data
ETX (03hex)
Note
• A QUEST command is invalid when no ID has not been assigned.
• A QUEST command is invalid when a wildcard (*) is used in the ID when sending the command.
7 Quest Command Table
Command
434CMX
505CMX
Command
427CMX
507CMX
Number direct
Command
425CMX
Last
memory
Function
Obtains status information.
Comment
Effective Minimum Maximum
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
GST
GPI
GWB
GPS
GSS
GSO
–
QST
QPI
Obtains integrator/PICTURE information.
Obtains integrator/WHITE BALANCE information.
Obtains integrator/SCREEN information.
Obtains SETUP information.
QWB
QPS
QSS
QSO
QAP
QCI
Obtains Menu Integrator/OPTION information.
Obtains audio status.
Obtains time information.
–
Obtains various machine names.
–
QSU
275
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RS-232C Adjustment
1) Obtaining QST Status Information
Sequence
Data Content
Size
1 Byte
3 Byte
1 Byte
1 Byte
1 Byte
1 Byte
1 Byte
Remarks
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
STX
02hex
Command echo-back
QST (fixed)
5 (fixed)
Generation information
Inch information
4: 42 inch 5: 50 inch
M (fixed)
Forwarding
Power source state
During standby: Standby cause
S: Standby status P: Power supplied status
N: Normal standby time
W: Standby time based on POWER MANAGEMENT
S: Standby time based on SD or PD
N: normal signal input time
During power supply: main screen signal status
L: no signal input time
O: OUT OF RANGE signal input time
8
During standby or 1 screen display: dummy data
During 2-screen display: sub screen signal status
1 Byte
N: normal signal input time
L: no signal input time
O: OUT OF RANGE signal input time
IN1: INPUT1 IN2: INPUT2 IN3: INPUT3 IN4: INPUT4
IN5: INPUT5
9
Main input function information
Sub input function information
Main screen size information
Two-screen display state
3 Byte
3 Byte
1 Byte
1 Byte
10
11
12
IN1: INPUT1 IN2: INPUT2 IN3: INPUT3 IN4: INPUT4
IN5: INPUT5 Note1)
0: DOT BY DOT 1: 4:3 2: FULL 3: ZOOM 5: WIDE 6: 14:9
9: UNDERSCAN A: 2.35:1
0: OFF (1 screen)
2: PinP (lower right) 3: PinP(upper right)
4: PinP (upper left) 5: PinP(lower left)
6: SIDE BY SIDE 2-L 9: SIDE BY SIDE 2-R
1: SIDE BY SIDE 1
A: SIDE BY SIDE 3
C:SIDE BY SIDE 4-R
B: SIDE BY SIDE 4-L
13
Functional lock information
1 Byte
0: LOCK OFF 1: BUTTONS LOCK 2: IR LOCK
2: IR LOCK 3: IR&BUTTONS LOCK
4: MEMORY LOCK
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
Temperature information 1 (interior)
3 Byte
3 Byte
3 Byte
Temperature inside the set (Centigrade) Note 2)
Outside air temperature (Celsius) Note 2)
SLOT temperature (Celsius) Note 2)
Temperature information 2 (outside air)
Temperature information 3 (SLOT)
Serial No.
15 Byte 15 digit character string
Dummy data
3 Byte
2 Byte
Dummy data
HOUR METER
Check sum
5 Byte
2 Byte
1 Byte
5 digit number
03hex
ETX
Note 1) During standby and during a single screen display, the unit outputs the value that is in memory.
Note 2) During standby and immediately after POWER ON, the correct value is not output.
In this case, please obtain the information after waiting a short period of time after POWER ON.
These types of information are output as reference information (these are not guaranteed information).
Normally refer to temperature information 3.
276
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RS-232C Adjustment
2) <QPI> Obtaining Integrator/PICTURE information
Sequence
Data Content
Size
1 Byte
3 Byte
3 Byte
3 Byte
3 Byte
3 Byte
3 Byte
3 Byte
3 Byte
3 Byte
3 Byte
3 Byte
3 Byte
3 Byte
3 Byte
3 Byte
1 Byte
2 Byte
1 Byte
Remarks
1
2
STX
02hex
Command echo-back
CONTRAST
QPI (fixed)
3
000 to 255 Note 1)
000 to 255 Note 1)
000 to 060 Note 1)
000 to 060 Note 1)
000 to 060 Note 1)
000 to 060 Note 1)
000 to 060 Note 1)
000 to 060 Note 1)
4
BRIGHTNESS
5
C,DETAIL R (RED)
C,DETAIL Y (YELLOW)
C,DETAIL G (GREEN)
C,DETAIL C (CYAN)
C,DETAIL B (BLUE)
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
C,DETAIL M (MAGENTA)
H.ENHANCE
000 to 015 Note 1), Note 2)
000 to 015 Note 1), Note 2)
000 to 127 Note 1), Note 3)
000 to 060 Note 1), Note 3)
000 to 015 Note 1), Note 3)
Same as item 9 of QST commands
Same as item 11 of QST commands
V.ENHANCE
COLOR
TINT
SHARPNESS
Main input function
Main screen size information
Check sum
ETX
03hex
Note 1) If the signal type is not confirmed, dummy data is output.
Note 2) During video signal input, dummy data is output.
Note 3) During PC signal input, dummy data is output.
3) <QWB> Obtaining integrator/WHITE BALANCE information
Sequence
Data Content
Size
1 Byte
3 Byte
3 Byte
3 Byte
3 Byte
3 Byte
3 Byte
3 Byte
3 Byte
1 Byte
2 Byte
1 Byte
Remarks
02hex
1
2
STX
Command echo-back
R.HIGH
QWB (fixed)
3
000 to 255 Note 1)
000 to 255 Note 1)
000 to 255 Note 1)
000 to 255 Note 1)
000 to 255 Note 1)
000 to 255 Note 1)
Same as item 9 of QST commands
Same as item 11 of QST commands
4
G.HIGH
5
B.HIGH
6
R.LOW
7
G.LOW
8
B.LOW
9
Main input function
Main screen size
Check sum
ETX
10
11
12
03hex
Note 1) If the signal type is not confirmed, dummy data is output.
4) <QPS> Obtaining integrator/SCREEN information
Sequence
Data Content
Size
1 Byte
3 Byte
3 Byte
3 Byte
3 Byte
3 Byte
3 Byte
3 Byte
3 Byte
1 Byte
2 Byte
1 Byte
Remarks
02hex
1
2
STX
Command echo-back
H.POSITION
V.POSITION
H.SIZE
QPS (fixed)
3
000 to 255 Note 1)
4
000 to 255 Note 1)
5
000 to 064 Note 1)
6
V.SIZE
000 to 064 Note 1)
7
CLOCK
000 to 255 Note 1), Note 2)
000 to 031 Note 1), Note 2)
Same as item 9 of QST commands
Same as item 11 of QST commands
8
PHASE
9
Main input function
10
18
19
Main screen size information
Check sum
ETX
03hex
Note 1) If the signal type is not confirmed, dummy data is output.
Note 2) During DVI or video input, dummy data is output.
277
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RS-232C Adjustment
5) <QSS> Obtaining SETUP information
Sequence
Data Content
Size
1 Byte
3 Byte
1 Byte
Remarks
1
2
3
STX
02hex
Command echo-back
COLOR TEMP.
QSS (fixed)
1: LOW 2: MID LOW 3: MIDDLE 4: MID HIGH
5: HIGH Note 1)
4
5
POWER MGT.
AUTO POWER OFF
DNR
1 Byte
1 Byte
1 Byte
1 Byte
1 Byte
1 Byte
1 Byte
1 Byte
0: OFF 1: ON
0: DISABLE 1: ENABLE
6
0: OFF 1: LOW 2: MIDDLE 3: HIGH Note 1)
0: OFF 1: LOW 2: MIDDLE 3: HIGH Note 1)
0: OFF 1: ON Note 1)
7
MPEG NR
8
CTI
9
PURECINEMA
COLOR DECODING
COLOR SYSTEM
0: OFF 1: ON Note 1)
10
11
1: RGB 2: COMP1 3: COMP2 Note 1)
1: AUTO 2: NTSC 3: PAL 4: SECAM 5: 4.43NTSC
6: PAL M 7: PAL N Note 1)
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
DVI SET UP (PLUG/PLAY)
DVI SET UP (BLACK LEVEL)
BRT.ENHANCE
1 Byte
1 Byte
1 Byte
2 Byte
3 Byte
1 Byte
2 Byte
1 Byte
1: PC
2: VIDEO Note 1)
1: LOW 2: HIGH Note 1)
0: OFF 1: ON Note 1)
00 to 20
SUB VOLUME
Main input function
Main screen size information
Check sum
Same as item 9 of QST commands
Same as item 11 of QST commands
ETX
03hex
Note 1) In the case of set data that cannot be output because of the type of input signal, dummy data is output.
6) <QSO> Obtaining menu integrator/OPTION information
Sequence
Data Content
Size
1 Byte
3 Byte
1 Byte
Remarks
1
2
3
STX
02hex
Command echo-back
ENERGY SAVE
QSO (fixed)
0: STANDARD1 1: MODE1 2: MODE2 3: MODE3
4: AUTO 5: MUTE 6: STANDARD2
4
5
PROGRAM/REPEAT timer
SCREEN MANAGEMENT (ORBITER)
SCREEN MANAGEMENT (SOFT FOCUS)
AUTO SETUP MODE
1 Byte
1 Byte
1 Byte
1 Byte
1 Byte
1 Byte
1 Byte
1 Byte
0: OFF 1: PROGRAM 2: REPEAT
0: OFF 1: MODE1 2: MODE2 3: MODE3
0: OFF 1: 1 2: 2 3: 3 4: 4
0: INACTIVE 1: ACTIVE
6
7
8
AUTO FUNCTION
0: OFF 1: INPUT1 2: INPUT4
0: INACTIVE 1: ACTIVE
9
PIP DETECT
10
11
SPLIT FREEZE
0: OFF 1: SIDE BY SIDE 2: PIP
0: OFF 2: INVERSE 3: WHITE 4: RED 5: GREEN 6: BLUE
7: YELLOW
SCREEN MASK
12
13
14
15
SIDE MASK R-LEVEL
SIDE MASK G-LEVEL
SIDE MASK B-LEVEL
VIDEO WALL (MODE)
3 Byte
3 Byte
3 Byte
1 Byte
000 to 255
000 to 255
000 to 255
0: OFF 1: 1 screen 2: 4 screens (2 x 2) 3: 9 screens (3 x 3)
4: 16 screens (4 x 4) 5: 25 screens (5 x 5)
01 to 56
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
VIDEO WALL (POSITION)
VIDEO WALL (TYPE)
VIDEO WALL (POWER ON DELAY)
VIDEO WALL (ABL LINK)
Spare (dummy)
2 Byte
1 Byte
1 Byte
1 Byte
1 Byte
1 Byte
1 Byte
1 Byte
1 Byte
1 Byte
1 Byte
0: NORMAL 1: ADJUSTED
0: OFF
0: OFF
* (FIX)
1: AUTO
0: OFF
0: LARGE
0: H
1: ON 2: MODE1 3: MODE2
1: ON
FAN CONTROL
2: MAX
1: ON
OSD DISPLAY
OSD SIZE
1: SMALL
1: V
OSD ANGLE
FRONT INDICATOR
COLOR MODE
0: OFF
1: ON
1: NORMAL 2: STUDIO
278
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RS-232C Adjustment
Sequence
Data Content
PRO USE UNDERSCAN
Size
1 Byte
1 Byte
Remarks
27
28
0: OFF
1: ON
PRO USE IMAGE PROCESS
1: NORMAL 2: PURE 3: MONOTONE 4: BLUE ONLY
5: HIGH CONTRAST
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
PRO USE SYGNAL TYPE
1 Byte
1 Byte
1 Byte
1 Byte
1 Byte
1 Byte
2 Byte
1 Byte
1: MOTION 2: STILL 3: NONE STD
FRC
0: OFF
1: ON
POWER ON MODE INPUT
POWER ON MODE MULTI MODE
POWER ON MODE MULTI INPUT 1
POWER ON MODE MULTI INPUT 2
POWER ON MODE VOLUME
SEAMLESS SW
See the table below.
See the table below.
1: INPUT 2: INPUT2 3: INPUT3 4: INPUT4 5: INPUT5
1: INPUT 2: INPUT2 3: INPUT3 4: INPUT4 5: INPUT5
0 to 42: In the case of last memory, FF
0: OFF
1: ON
SEAMLESS SW SELECT1
SEAMLESS SW SELECT2
MIRROR MODE
1: INPUT 2: INPUT2 3: INPUT3 4: INPUT4 5: INPUT5
1: INPUT 2: INPUT2 3: INPUT3 4: INPUT4 5: INPUT5
0: OFF 1: X 2: Y 3: XY
1 Byte
1 Byte
1 Byte
1 Byte
1 Byte
1 Byte
MULTI SCREEN SET (S BY S SIZE)
MULTI SCREEN SET (S BY S LAYOUT)
MULTI SCREEN SET (PIP SIZE)
MULTI SCREEN SET (TRANSLUCENT)
1: NORMAL 2: FULL
1: MODE1
2: MODE2 3: MODE3
1: 1 (SMALL) to 4: 4 (LARGE)
0: OFF 1: 10 % 2: 20 % 3: 30 % 4: 40 % 5: 50 %
6: 60 % 7: 70 % 8: 80 %
44
MULTI SCREEN SET (BANNER PIP)
1 Byte
0: OFF 1: BOTTOM1 2: BOTTOM2 3: BOTTOM3
4: MID LOW 5: MID HIGH 6: TOP3 7: TOP2 8: TOP1
9: LEFT A: RIGHT
45
46
MULTI SCREEN SET (BANNER INPUT)
Main input function
1 Byte
3 Byte
1: INPUT1 2: INPUT2
Input functions of the main screen (refer to the following table for
details)
47
48
49
Main screen size information
1 Byte
2 Byte
1 Byte
Main screen size (refer to the following table for details)
Check sum
ETX
03hex
7 POWER ON MODE INPUT
7 POWER ON MODE MULTI MODE
Input functions
(response)
Input functions
INPUT
INPUT
(response)
0
1
2
3
4
5
A
LAST
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
SIDE BY SIDE1
SIDE BY SIDE2
SIDE BY SIDE3
BOTTOM LEFT
BOTTOM RIGHT
TOP RIGHT
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
MULTI
TOP LEFT
7 Main screen input function
7 Main screen size
Input function
Input
Main screen size
Screen size
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
IN5
* * *
INPUT1
INPUT2
0
DOT BY DOT
1
2
3
5
6
9
A
4 : 3
FULL
INPUT3
INPUT4
ZOOM
INPUT5
WIDE
Unconfirmed (standby time)
14 : 9
UNDER SCAN
2.35 : 1
279
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RS-232C Adjustment
7) <QSU> obtaining the audio status
Sequence
Data Content
Size
1 Byte
3 Byte
3 Byte
1 Byte
3 Byte
3 Byte
3 Byte
3 Byte
3 Byte
2 Byte
1 Byte
Remarks
1
2
STX
02hex
Command echo-back
Main volume
QSU (fixed)
000 to 042
0: OFF 1: ON
000 to 020
000 to 020
000 to 020
000 to 020
000 to 020
3
4
Audio mute status
INPUT1 sub volume
INPUT2 sub volume
INPUT3 sub volume
INPUT4 sub volume
INPUT5 sub volume
Check sum
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
ETX
03hex
8) <QCI> Obtaining time information
Sequence
Data Content
Size
1 Byte
3 Byte
2 Byte
2 Byte
2 Byte
8 Byte
1 Byte
Remarks
1
2
3
STX
02hex
Command echo-back
Time information
QCI (fixed)
Hour (24 hour system) 00 to 23 Note 1)
Minute 00 to 59 Note 1)
Second 00 to 59 Note 1)
4
5
Dummy data
Day of week
1: Sunday 2: Monday 3: Tuesday 4: Wednesday
5: Thursday 6: Friday
7: Saturday Note 1)
6
7
Check sum
ETX
2 Byte
1 Byte
03hex
Note 1) During standby and when this command was initially set, the value at the time that power was finally shut off is transmitted.
9) <QAP> Obtaining machine name
Sequence
Data Content
Size
1 Byte
3 Byte
Remarks
1
2
3
STX
02hex
Command echo-back
QAP (fixed)
Machine name information
18 Byte 42 inch:
A (North America model): PDP-427CMX********
G (Europe-general model): PDP-42MXE20*******
50 inch:
J (Japan model): PDP-507CMX-JP*****
A (North America model): PDP-507CMX********
G (Europe-general/CKD model): PDP-50MXE20*******
GS (Europe-general/silver model): PDP-50MXE20*******
4
5
Check sum
ETX
2 Byte
1 Byte
03hex
280
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RS-232C Adjustment
7 Table of commands not compatible with PDP-434CMX to PDP-425CMX
AJN
AJY
COF
Ends 232C integrator adjustment mode.
Starts 232C integrator adjustment mode.
Displays present color off setting.
MCN
MCY
Turns off MASK CONTROL.
Turns on MASK CONTROL.
MGFS01 Turns on VIDEO WALL.
MSCS01 Turns on MULTI SCREEN.
COFS00 Does not set color off.
COFS01 Sets color off.
SIM
Displays present setting of SIDE MASK.
DPR
FXO
Resets still picture movement function.
Selects audio output fix.
SIMS01 Sets setting of SIDE MASK to normal.
SIMS02 Sets setting of SIDE MASK to overlay 1.
SIMS03 Sets setting of SIDE MASK to overlay 2.
SZMS04 Sets screen size to CINEMA.
FRCS02 Sets FRC to MODE2.
FRCS03 Sets FRC to MODE3.
GRAS04 Sets gradation to “DRE MID”.
GRAS05 Sets gradation to “DRE HIGH”.
GRAS06 Sets gradation to “DRE LOW”.
GRAS07 Sets gradation to “HIGH CONTRAST”.
SZMS08 Sets screen size to FULL 1035i.
MIR
PLN
PLY
Displays present MIRROR MODE setting
Turns off center brightness correction.
Turns on center brightness correction.
LNN
LNY
Prohibits loudness.
Permits loudness
PUCS02 Sets PURE CINEMA to advance.
VRO Selects audio output variable.
7 Table of commands not compatible with PDP-505CMX
EDIS01 Sets DVI SELECT to PC.
EDIS02 Sets DVI SELECT to VIDEOS1.
281
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RS-232C Adjustment
7 Check Sum
This is data to which 2-Byte ASCII code is added to a data group returned by a QUEST command.
PC side
STX
ID
QUEST command
ETX
02 (hex)
2 Byte
3 Byte
03 (hex)
Set side
STX
02 (hex)
QUEST command
Data
Check sum
ETX
3 Byte
*Byte
2 Byte
03 (hex)
A detailed example is given below.
Example) The check sum value that is added when the QUEST command “QAA” returned the following 6-Byte data string.
Data group (ASCII)
+ check sum
QUEST command
Data (6 Byte)
Check sum
QAA
100128
xx (before calculation)
≠
47
41
41
31 30 30 31 32 38
The data group is put into binary code one
character at a time then displayed (only the
last two digits are displayed).
When these values are added the result is 1F5 (hex).
≠
xx, where xx is 0B (hex), is added to 1F5 so the last two digits are 00 (in this case 200).
≠
As the data format, OB is converted to ASCII code and sent.
≠
The following data is output from the Plasma Display side.
STX
QUEST command
Data
Check sum
ETX
02 (hex)
QAA
100128
0B
03 (hex)
* The returned data group is in capital letters. Please keep this in mind when introducing it into the binary
display.
7 Examples of check sum applications
Example 1) When the data is missing 1 Byte
STX
QUEST command
Data
Check sum
ETX
02 (hex)
QAA
100 (missing data) 28
0B
03 (hex)
47 41
31 30 30 32 38
The data group is calculated according to rules by a PC application,
and when these values are added the result is 1C4 (hex).
≠
A value xx, where xx is 3C (hex), is added to 1C4 such that the last
two digits are 00 (in this case 200).
≠
Here, the check sum [OB (hex)] and the calculated [3C (hex)] do not match.
≠
Since they do not match, the PC application sends the QUEST command
again and gets the data again.
Example 2) When 1 Byte of data in the data is unreadable
STX
02 (hex)
QUEST command
Data
100328
Check sum
ETX
QAA
0B
03 (hex)
47 41
31 30 33 30 32 38
The data group is calculated according to rules by a PC application,
and when these values are added the result is 1F7 (hex).
≠
A value xx, where xx is 09 (hex), is added to 1F7 such that the last
two digits are 00 (in this case 200).
≠
Here, the check sum [OB (hex)] and the calculated [09 (hex)] do not match.
≠
Since they do not match, the PC application sends the QUEST command
again and gets the data again.
282
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Screen Burning
5.6 Screen Burning
When the same image is reproduced for a long period (still image, telop, etc.), the image is burned into to screen. It may
be difficult to remove this image. Burning should be managed by making necessary changes in the video software,
projection method, system configuration etc.
This display has a function that reduces this kind of burning.
[Example of still screens]
1. When displaying a PC screen
• Examples: Power Point, Excel, Word etc.
2. When displaying a monitor camera image
• Examples: images from an outdoor or in-store monitor camera
3. When the same image is displayed repeatedly
• Exhibit explanation video in an art gallery or museum
4. Images with permanent superimposed letters
• Visual information displayed by games, on karaoke screens, or at public facilities
5. Image with lines permanently
• Facility guidance images etc.
6. Image with a remaining peripheral mask
• 4:3 aspect, squeeze contents etc.
The above are typical examples of contents that easily cause burning.
7 Menu mode
1 ENERGY SAVE setting (Refer to section 5.3.4, “Adjustment and setting in the Menu Mode 4) Energy Saving
Setting” (pg. 178) and 5.3.7, “Adjustment and setting in the Menu Mode 12) Energy Saving Setting” (pg. 203).)
The screen brightness is controlled according to the input signal and by the brightness of the room.
2 ORBITER Setting (Refer to section 5.3.4, “Adjustment and setting in the Menu Mode 7) Orbiter Setting” (pg. 181)
and 5.3.7, “Adjustment and setting in the Menu Mode 15) Orbiter Setting” (pg. 206).)
This function gradually and randomly moves the image position vertically and/or horizontally after a set amount of
time. Or the edges of the images are restricted by setting soft focus in order to soften images edges.
7 Integrator Mode
1 SCREEN MASK Setting (Refer to section 5.4.3, “Adjustment and setting in the Integrator Mode 9) SCREEN
MASK Setting” (pg. 225).)
An inverse or full mask signal appears on the screen.
When a full mask is prepared beforehand, it becomes more difficult for the screen to become burned.
Using an inverse signal may be an emergency measure when the screen is burned from displaying a still image.
However, completely removing the burn is not possible.
2 SIDE MASK Setting (Refer to section 5.4.3, “Adjustment and setting in the Integrator Mode 10) SIDE MASK
Setting” (pg. 226).)
This setting adjusts the method of displaying the SIDE MASK signal and adjusts the signal level of the SIDE
MASK signal.
7 Menu Mode and Integrator Mode
1 PROGRAM TIMER Setting (Refer to section 5.3.4, “Adjustment and setting in the Menu Mode 6) Program/Repeat
Timer Setting” (pg. 180) and 5.3.7, “Adjustment and setting in the Menu Mode 14) Program/Repeat Timer Setting”
(pg. 205), ”5.4.3, “Adjustment and setting in the Integrator Mode 8) Program Timer Setting” (pg. 223).)
The display contents change at a predetermined time according to set conditions.
283
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Screen Burning
7 Standard Functions (Settings cannot be changed)
1 Auto Brightness Adjustment (still image detection)
When an image that has little or no motion, such as a photograph or computer screen, is displayed for a long
period, the screen may appear dimmer. This feature is part of the screen-protection function, to automatically
adjust the brightness and protect the screen when an image with little or no motion is detected. This function
activates after an image with little or no motion has been detected for three minutes.
This function is not found in the menu (the setting cannot be changed).
Note
To enjoy using your plasma display for many years;
You can use this plasma display’s orbiter, inverse display and all white display and other functions to either prevent or
reduce burning. When you will be displaying still picture contents for a long time, set these functions with your program
timer to perform regular maintenance of your plasma display.
7 Setting example
Setting with Menu Mode
• OPTION → ENERGY SAVE: setting to MODE1 or MODE2 (refer to pg. 178 and pg. 203).
• OPTION → SCREEN MGT. → ORBITER: setting to MODE1, MODE2, or MODE3 (refer to pg. 181 and pg. 206).
• OPTION → TIMER SETTING → PROGRAM/REPEAT: Setting to PROGRAM (refer to pg. 180 and pg. 205)
Setting with Integrator Mode
• OPTION → PROGRAM TIMER (refer to pg. 223)
Example of setting PROGRAM TIMER
Program Timer Setting Screen
PROGRAM T I MER
• Case where one day operating time in daily operation is 10:00 to
18:00
DATE
ON
:
OFF
:
INPUT
INPUT4
FUNC.
ORB.
I N V.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
18 0 0
:
10 0 0
:
• During operation INPUT4 (Component Video Signal) is displayed.
• Set contents
18 0 0 19 0 0 INPUT4
:
WHITE
:
19 0 0 20 0 0
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
- Inverse display for one hour after end of work period (18:00 to
19:00)
8
9
10
- And after that, perform all white display for one hour (19:00 to
20:00) then end operation for the day.
- The following day, power turns on at 10:00
RETURN
SEL.
SET
ADJ
MENU EXIT
The above is repeated every day.
(Setting example: supplementary)
1. All white display can be done even if program timer is stopped six months after operation begins.
2. When it is used for outdoor monitoring, all white setting is impossible, because of conspicuous fluctuation of
brightness.
284
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Precautions on Connecting Camera Images/Concerning frame delay (lip sync)
5.7 Precautions on Connecting Camera Images
Connecting and using moving images that are nearly still, such as images from a surveillance camera, could damage or
reduce the life of the panel.
In this situation, it is necessary to set the image quality beforehand.
Set the ‘ENERGY SAVE’ function to ‘MODE2’ or ‘MODE3’ (pg. 178, 203).
5.8 Concerning frame delay (lip sync)
The following table shows the approximate time after the video signal is input until it appears on the display.
It is the guideline when considering the audio delay time following the video (lip sync).
The video signal is, in multi-screen mode, delayed by approximately 1 V (there is no delay that exceeds 4 V) in the following
cases.
• Right screen of side by side mode (left screen in a case where the same signals are combined)
• Subscreen of picture in picture mode
There is no frame delay in other situations.
(These data are reference values; they cannot be ensured.)
FRC
setting
Input vertical
frequency (Hz) number (V)
Frame delay
Video input signal
PAL, SECAM, PAL N, 625i (576i), 1125i (1080i)
NTSC, 4.43NTSC, PAL M, 525i (480i), 1125i (1080i)
625p (576p), 750p (720p),1125p (1080p)
50
60
50
60
50
60
50
60
60
75
85
50
60
50
60
50
60
50
60
50
60
72
60
75
85
50
60
72
60
75
85
4
3
2
1
4
4
2
2
Normal time
525p (480p), 750p (720p), 1125p (1080p)
PAL, SECAM, PAL N, 625i (576i), 1125i (1080i)
NTSC, 4.43NTSC, PAL M, 525i (480i), 1125i (1080i)
625p (576p), 750p (720p), 1125p (1080p)
525p (480p), 750p (720p), 1125p (1080p)
Video signal
When zoom
function is
used *2
ON
2
PC signal
PAL, SECAM, PAL N, 625i (576i), 1125i (1080i)
NTSC, 4.43NTSC, PAL M, 525i (480i), 1125i (1080i)
625p (576p), 750p (720p), 1125p (1080p)
525p (480p), 750p (720p), 1125p (1080p)
PAL, SECAM, PAL N, 625i (576i), 1125i (1080i)
NTSC, 4.43NTSC, PAL M, 525i (480i), 1125i (1080i)
625p (576p), 750p (720p), 1125p (1080p)
525p (480p), 750p (720p), 1125p (1080p)
3
1
4
2
Normal time
Video signal
When zoom
function is
used *2
FRC setting object signal *1
FRC setting non-object signal
FRC setting object signal *1
FRC setting non-object signal
1
2
2
2
OFF
Normal time
PC signal
When zoom
function is
used *2
*1: The FRC object signal in the PC signal is as follows.
640x480@60 Hz VGA, 848x480@60 Hz WVGA, 1280x768@60 Hz WXGA 1024x768@60 Hz XGA, 1280x1024@60 Hz SXGA,
1024x768@50 Hz XGA 1024x768@72 Hz XGA, 640x480@50 Hz VGA (only analog input), 848x480@50 Hz WVGA 1280x768@50 Hz
WXGA, 1280x768@72 Hz WXGA, 1400X1050@60 Hz SXGA+
*2: The zoom function indicates the expansion functions based on H size, V size, and video wall in point zoom and integrator modes.
285
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Precautions
6.1 Precautions
1) If the power shuts down and stays OFF for an extended time, an internal problem has probably occurred (failing part,
etc.).
Turn OFF the main power switch on the Plasma Display then wait one to two minutes then try turning the power ON
again.
If the power goes OFF again, the display needs to be serviced.
If the display operates normally, the power reset has cleared the issue.
2) When an image (still image, telop or subtitle, etc.) is shown on the screen for a long period, there is a possibility that
the image could burn in. This should be managed by making changes in the imaging software, display method,
system configuration etc.
3) The following kinds of input signals could cause inferior image quality (when a PDA-5003/PDA-5004 card is installed).
• Video signal that has been dubbed (copied) repeatedly
• Copyright-protected signals
• Scrambled cable TV signals
• Signals with a sync signal and video signal that are extremely out of phase
4) The fan starts operating when the surrounding temperature is greater than 32 °C (the fan rpm becomes faster as the
temperature increases, this is normal).
5) Screen-saver function (still image detection)
When an image having little motion such as a photograph or PC screen is displayed continuously, the image may
appear dimmer. To protect the plasma panel, the screen-saver function detects images with little or no motion and
automatically adjusts the brightness. This action is not an indication that the display is failing.
Time until the screen-saver function operates:
• Normal-operation mode/menu mode: Approximate three minutes after the power is turned ON or after the input is
switched
7 Self-diagnosis Function
When there is an operating or connection error, a message appears on the screen.
After reading the contents of the error message, check the condition of the unit.
Error Message
Remedy
CAUTION
¶ The current signal input is not supported by the unit. Check the table of supported
OUT OF RANGE
UNSUPPORTED SIGNAL
SIGNAL NG
input signals on pg. 146 to 161 and change the output signal setting.
WARNING
¶ Turn OFF the main power.
THERMAL ALERT
SHUT DOWN
¶ Check whether the surrounding temperature is high.
¶ If the cooling vents on the display are blocked, remove the obstacles blocking the
vents.
WARNING
¶ There is a problem with the fan. Immediately turn OFF the power and contact a
FAN FAILURE
SHUT DOWN
Pioneer service center or dealer.
ERROR
¶ An invalid operation was attempted. Check the input signals, connections and
INVALID KEY ENTRY
settings.
SHUT DOWN
¶ Turn the main power OFF, wait one or two minutes and turn the power ON again. If
the problem still persists, remove the power plug from the outlet and contact a
Pioneer service center or dealer.
286
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance
1) Be sure to unplug the power cord from the power outlet before performing maintenance.
Note
If the plasma display is connected to a computer linked to a network, disconnect and reconnect using the following
procedure.
7 Disconnect and Remove Hardware
1 Turn the plasma display to Standby using either the computer (RS-232C control) or the remote control.
2 Turn off the power to the computer.
3 Turn off the main power to the plasma display.
4 Remove the RS-232C cable and RGB cable from the plasma display.
5 Remove the RS-232C cable and RGB cable from the computer.
6 Remove the power cord from the computer.
7 Remove the power cord from the plasma display.
8 Finally remove hardware.
7 Connection procedure
1 Connect the power cord of the plasma display to an AC power source.
2 Connect the power cord of the computer to an AC power source.
3 Connect the RS-232C cable and RGB cable to the computer.
4 Connect the RS-232C cable and RGB cable to the plasma display.
5 Turn on the power to the computer.
6 Turn on the main power to the plasma display.
7 Turn on the plasma display using either the computer (RS-232C control) or the remote control.
Note
After disconnection, wait for approximately 10 minutes before reconnecting the units.
2) Cabinet and Remote-control Unit
Never use solvents such as benzene or thinner. Using such solvents could cause the cabinet and remote control to
degrade the coating.
Wipe the cabinet and remote control with a soft cloth. If there is heavy soiling, soak a soft cloth in water mixed with
a mild detergent. Ring out the water well then clean the panel. Dry the chassis by wiping with a soft, dry cloth.
287
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance
3) Screen (front protection panel)
The screen (front protection panel) is treated with a special coating to prevent glare and is very delicate. To clean it,
remove any dust then wipe gently with a soft cloth. Do not clean it with tissue or a rough, textured cloth.
DO NOT use solvents such as benzene or thinner to clean as this could damage or discolor the display panel.
The following cleaning cloths and cleaning liquid are recommended.
Name
Part Number
AED1285
Cleaning cloth: Wiping cloth
Cleaning cloth: Minimax
Cleaning liquid: B4
GED-009
GEM1004
In the case of light soiling, remove the dust then gently wipe with a Minimax cloth. If there is heavy soiling, remove
the dust then apply a small amount of B4 cleaning liquid to an area of the Minimax cloth, do NOT apply the liquid to
the panel. Any of the cleaning chemical left on the unit may make the surface uneven. After the B4 has dried, wipe
it clean with a dry Minimax cloth.
4) Vents
Once a month, use a vacuum cleaner set to LOW to remove dust from the cooling vents on the sides and rear of the
unit and in the fan installation area. The main power switch MUST be turned OFF before cleaning the vents. Using
the unit with accumulated dust causes the internal temperature to rise and could cause fire or other trouble to occur.
5) Readjustment of the White Balance
This unit uses phosphor elements as in a CRT display than degrades over time, reducing the brightness. Blue
phosphor elements degrade faster than red or green.
* Occasional readjustment of the white balance may be beneficial.
288
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|